- Tham gia
- 28/1/21
- Bài viết
- 86,154
- Điểm
- 113
tác giả
TÀI LIỆU 30 đề ôn luyện hsg tiếng anh lớp 6 có đáp án được soạn dưới dạng file word gồm 94 trang. Các bạn xem và tải 30 đề ôn luyện hsg tiếng anh lớp 6 có đáp án về ở dưới.
30 ĐỀ ÔN LUYỆN HSG TIẾNG ANH LỚP 6
ENGLISH TEST 01
I. Chän tõ cã c¸ch ph¸t ©m kh¸c víi nh÷ng tõ cßn l¹i
1, A. ground B. should C. about D .mountain
2. A. tables B. noses C. boxes D. changes
3. A. son B. sugar C. soup D. sing
4. A. brush B. museum C. lunch D. drugstore
5. A. play B. says C. day D. stay
6. A. orange B. cabbage C. lemonade D. sausage
7. A. chest B. lunch C. bench D. school
8. A. noodles B. shoulders C. packets D. tomatoes
9. A. clown B. down C. own D. town
10.A. intersection B. eraser C. bookstore D. history
II. Chän tõ cã träng ©m nhÊn kh¸c víi c¸c tõ cßn l¹i.
1. A. beautiful B. vegetable C. breakfast D. apartment
2. A. toothpaste B. sandwich C. cartoon D. chocolate
3. A. aerobic B. activity C. badminton D. basketball
4. A. visit . unload C. receive D.correct
5. A. police B. gymnast C. teacher D. farmer
6. A. different B. dangerous C. difficult D. delicious
III. S¾p xÕp c¸c tõ s¸o trén thµnh c©u hoµn chØnh cã nghÜa
1. Lunch / a / grandfather / after / always / sleep / has.
…………………………………….…………………………………
2. famous / reading / I / people / about / like / books.
………………………………………………………………………….…
3. to work / she / how / travel / does / morning / every?
………………………………………………………………………….…
4. practice / you / every day / should / speaking / English.
………………………………………………………………………….…
5. listen/ she's/ and/ going/ to/ pop music/ book/ read/ to/ a.
………………………………………………………………………….…
IV. ViÕt l¹i c©u cho nghÜa kh«ng thay ®æi
1. That book belongs to Nam. ->That is………………………………………………………………….……
2.What is the age of Peter ?-> How ……………………………………………………………………… ?
3.No one in our class is taller than Nam .-> Nam is the ………………………………………………………
4. Mr. Hung drives very carefully.->Mr. Hung is ...............................................................................................
5. Does your father cycle to work?->Does your father get ..............................................................................?
6.Why don’t we go to the movies tonight?-> What about…………………………………..………………..?
7. She doesn’t have classes on Sunday .-> She never…………………………..…………………………….
8. How wide is BaDinh square->What.............................................................................................................?
10 Reading is more boring than watching TV->Watching Tv is more...............................................................
V. Chän ®¸p ¸n ®óng nhÊt trong c¸c ®¸p ¸n A, B, C, hoÆc D.
1. My father is ........ man.
A. a old B. an old C. not young D. not very young
2. What was the matter with him? He …….. a toothache
A. to have B. have C. has D. had
3. Do you have any toothpaste? I’d like a large ...................
A. tin B. roll C. bar D. tube
4. What ..... does Peter study at school? - He has Maths, English, Art….
A. objects B. subjects C. food D. drink
5. Bangkok is ............. capital of Thailand.
A. a B. one C. X D. the
6. There are ................. girls in his class.
A. not B. no C. none D. any
7. ......... she plays the piano!
A. How beautiful B. How beautifully C. What good D. What well
8. On .... we often go out.
A. nights of Saturday B. Saturday nights C. Saturday’s nights D. none is correct
9. I don’t want much sugar in coffee. Just ........., please.
A. little B. a little C. few D. a few
10. The weather is ..................... today than yesterday.
A. much better B. very better C. too better D. so better
11. A. Always they do their homework. B. They always do their homework.
C. They do their homework always. D. They always do their homeworks.
12. Why do you like Music? Because I like …..
A. to read B. to draw C. to write D. to sing
13. It’s very hot. Why ...... go swimming?
A. not we B. not C. don’t we D. Both B & C are correct
14. At an intersection, you ....... slow down.
A. can B. should C. must D. have
15. Which word has the final sound /s/:
A. bananas B. carrots C. apples D. guavas
16. Don’t move. You have a .............. leg.
A. break B. breaking C. broke D. broken
17. If there aren’t any trash cans, we should put it in a bag and ..................... .
A. take it to our home B. take it to home C. take it home D. take it back our house
18. Make sure ........... is no traffic.
A. they B. it C. there D. some
19. Let’s eat here. The ............. seems very good.
A. list B. paper C. programme D. menu
20. Don’t ..................... electricity.
A. save B. waste C. use D. leave
VI. §Æt cau hái cho tõ g¹ch dưới.
1.He often does his homework in the evening.
………………………………………………………………………….…
2.She is practicing the piano
………………………………………………………………………….…
3.I usually play soccer after school
………………………………………………………………………….…
4.We are going to stay there for a week.
………………………………………………………………………….…
5.Minh goes swimming with his friends
………………………………………………………………………….…
6.I wait for my friends everyday.
………………………………………………………………………….…
7.The children are in the library.
………………………………………………………………………….…
8.He has math on Monday and Thursday.
………………………………………………………………………….…
9.She buys some milk at the store
………………………………………………………………………….…
10.It is 2kilometers from my house to the market.
………………………………………………………………………….…
VII. Cho d¹ng ®óng cña ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc.
1.He (do) ............................. our work now. But he will go with you when he (finish) ………..it.
2.On my way home I often (meet) ………. many children who (go) ………….to school.
3.The sun (rise) …………… in the east and (set) ………………… in the west.
4. Mary (not work) ……………………today because it's Sunday.
5. My father and I (visit) …………………….Ha Long Bay this summer vacation.
6. You mustn’t (eat) ………………..food in the classroom.
7. Let’s (help)…………….. mom, Lan. She (clean)……………… the floor.
8. Look! The plane (fly) ………………..towards the airport. It (land) ……………………..
9. Why we (not/ go)…………………………………….. to Ha Long Bay this summer?
10.What(be) …………….there ( eat)…………………………………
VIII. Cho d¹ng ®óng cña tõ in hoa:
2.She sent her best wishes for my future…… .(HAPPY) ………………………..
3. The ……………of this tree are very green and beautiful. ( LEAF ) ………………………..
4. Mr Pike lives on the ……………floor of this building . ( NINE) ………………………..
5.The coffee is too……….for me to drink. ( HEAT ) …………………………
6. Who is the............................person in the world? (rich) .....................................
7. What is the...................mountain in the world? (HIGH) ………………………
8. He is a famous football................................ (PLAY). …………………….
9. They are ........................... to their teacher (TALK). ……………………..
10. English is an ....................and important subject.(INTEREST) ………………………
IX. T×m- g¹ch ch©n lçi sai vµ söa l¹i cho ®óng.
1. That's my aunt over there. She stands near the window…………………………………..
2. Sorry, you can't speak to Jenny. She's have a bath. ……………………………………
3. Nam likes read books in the library …………………………………..
4. What time does Thu has science class? ……………………………………..
5. Nam's grandparents lives in the old house with his uncle and aunts………………………………
6.She has a little friends in the city. …………………………………….
7.How many time a week do you wash your clothes? ……………………………………….
8.What is the long of this river ? …………………………………………
X. §iÒn giíi tõ thicchs hîp vµo chç trèng.
1. There is a big tree.........................my garden.
2. Wait....................me.......................the school-gate, please.
3. Her birthday is..................August the third. She always gets a lot of presents .................her birthday.
4. I want to stay.........................home this evening. What's.......................TV?
5. New Year's Day is...............................January 1st.
6. He's not very good.......................repairing things.
7. We often have two days off ....................... weekends.
XI. §äc ®o¹n v¨n vµ lµm theo híng dÉn.
The Vietnamese students take part in different after – school activities. Some students plays sports. They often play soccer, table tennis or badminton. Sometimes they go swimming pools . Some students like music and movies. They often practice musical instruments in the school music room.They join in the school theater group and usually rehearse plays.Some are members of the stamp collector ‘s club. They often get together and talk about their stamps. A few students stay at home and play video games or computer games. Most of them enjoy their activities after school hours
1. Chän True (T) or False (F):
a. The Vietnamese students take part in different activities…………………
b. All the students plays sports. ……………….
c. They never go swimming in the pool. ……………….
d. Some students like movies. ………………..
2. Tr¶ lêi c©u hái:
a. How often do you rehearse plays?
………………………………………………………………………….…
b. What do the members of the stamps collector’s club often do?
………………………………………………………………………….…
c. Do Vietnamese students enjoy their activities?
………………………………………………………………………….…
d. Do you often go to the movies after school?
………………………………………………………………………….…
XII. ViÕt mét ®o¹n v¨n ng¾n vÒ trêng cña b¹n ( 8-10 c©u )
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
I. Tìm từ không cùng nhóm với từ còn lại.
1. a. Wednesday b. everyday c. Friday d. Thursday
2. a. third b. two c. twelve d. thirty
3. a. history b. English c. literature d. timetable
4. a.finish b. read c. watch d. soccer
5. a. evening b. morning c. homework d. afternoon
II. Chọn đáp án đúng cho mỗi câu sau.
1. …………… sports do you play?
a. How b. Who c. Which d. What’s
2. My mother wants a good pair of shoes because she often goes ………….
a. jogging b. fishing c. sailing d. running
3. He often …………….. his kite when he’s not busy.
a. does b. plays c. goes d. flies
4. How ......................... kilos of beef does she want?
a. many b. much c. any d. about
5. “Is that your father?” - “Yes, .........................”
a. it is b. that is c. he is d. it’s
6. “Would you like some noodles, Lan?” - “No, .........................I’m full. Thanks.”
a. I wouldn’t b. I don’t c. I’m not d. I don’t like
7. There is …………………….. oil in this bottle. We should buy some more.
a. a few b. few c. little d. a little
8. Can I help you? - …………., please. I need a kilo of beef.
a. Sorry b. Yes c. Can d. No
9. Minh …………… likes fish and beef.
a. isn’t b. don’t c. doesn’t d. never
10. He goes to work six days a week. He ………………..…. goes to work.
a. always b. usually c. often d. never
11. ............................ are you going to spend your summer vacation?
a. Where b. Which c. What d. Who
12. Let’s ................................. some photos.
a. to take b. takes c. taking d. take
13. Why don’t we go to the cinema tonight?
a. Because we don’t like film b. That’s a good idea
c. You are right d. Thank you very much
14. We are going to stay..................................... my uncle’s house.
a. in b. at c. with d. on
15 ....................................to go for a walk?
a. How about b. Would you like c. Why don’t d. Let’s
16. “How ..................... oranges would you like” - “A dozen, please. And ..................... tea.”
a. much, some b. many, any c. much, any d. many, some
17. I don’t like vegetables but my sister .........................
a. do b. likes c. does d. would like
18. Ba ………….lunch at school.
a. does b. has c. have d. eat
19.What time……….classes start ?
a. do b. does c. it d. are
20.Lan’s brother…………..volleyball now.
a. playing b. plays c. is playing d
III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc.
1. What they (do) .............tonight? - They (listen)................. to music on the radio.
2. Your brother (can, swim)............. ? - Yes, he can. He (swim)............. very well.
3. He (be)…….......... tired and he’d like (sit)……........ down.
4. Hoa (not do)............. her homework in the afternoon. She (do)............. it in the evening.
5. Look! The plane (fly)..................... towards the airport. It (land).........................
IV. Điền giới từ thích hợp cho mỗi câu sau.
1. I live (1) ………………… a small house (2) ………………… the countryside.
2. My house is (3) ………………… a bookstore and a toystore: the bookstore to the left and the toys tore to the right.
3 .Miss Mai wants a kilo ……………… (4) meat and a dozen (5) …………… eggs.
4.Nga goes (6) …………… school (7) ……………foot every morning and she goes (8) ………… home (9) ……… four thirty in the afternoon.
5. Who do you usually play badminton (10) …………………?
V. Cho dạng đúng của từ ttrong ngoặc.
1. There are lots of (beauty) ……………………beaches in Viet Nam.
2. Is Mr.Ha a (business) ……………………………………………..?
3. September is the (nine)......................................... month of the year.
4. My father goes (jog)..............................................every morning.
5. She has small white (tooth) ……………………......................... .
VI. Tìm và sửa lỗi sai.
My brother are working in the city.
Mr Minh rides his bike to work at the moment.
I don’t have some oranges, but I have some bananas.
How many homework does Lien have everyday?
What would you like buying at the canteen?
I go to Ha Long tomorrow.
The children play games usually in the afternoon.
It’s often cold in the summer.
How many season are there in a year?
We need eight hundred gram of meat.
VII. Em hãy điền một từ thích hợp để hoàn thành lá thư sau.
Dear Mai,
I am visiting Ha Long Bay with my family ...................… June 12th to 20th……………… you have a double room with a shower for these days? How ………..… is the room? We would like ….…….…… room facing the sea if it is possible. We …… eat meat but we ……………… all other kinds of food. We are arriving ………… Ha Long Bay …………..… about six o’clock on Monday evening. We plan to leave the hotel ……………Sunday morning.
I …………..… forward to hearing from you soon.
Love
Nga.
VIII. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân.
1. You can go to the supermarket to buy beef ..........................................................................................
2. Lan goes to school with her friends. ........................................................................................................
3. They go to the zoo every weekend..................................................................................................................
4. I’d like some beef...................................................................................................................
5. She is going to stay there for two days. ..............................................................................................
6. My daughters do aerobics every morning............................................................................
7. This bar of soap is 8000 dong..................................................................................................................
8. His pencils are brown.......................................................................................................
9. Lan is going to live in China...........................................................................................................
10. They are going to paint their house..........................................................................................................
11. We want two English books...................................................................................................................
IX. Sắp xếp các câu sau thành đoạn hội thoại hợp lí.
ENGLISH TEST 03
Question I: Choose the word which is pronounced differently from the others.
Question II. Choose the words that is different from the rest in each group.
Question III. Choose the best answer to fill in the gap.
1. ……………..straight across the road.
A. Don’t run B. Not run C. No run D. Can’t run
2. I learn music………………. : on Mondays and Fridays.
A. two times a week B. once a week
C. one a week D. twice a week
3. Which month is ……………? May or June.
A. hottest B. hotter C. more hot D. hot than
4. She doesn’t have ………..friends at school.
A. a B. some C. many D. much
5. Why don’t we go camping? ………… a good idea.
A. Let’s B. That’s C. It D. With
6. There are five …………. in one hand.
A. fingers B. arms C. toes D. feet
7. We……….. stop when the light is red.
A. can’t B. can C. mustn’t D. must
8. What is your favourite food?
A. I favourite chicken B. My favourite food chicken
C. Chicken favourite me D. I like chicken best.
9. Linda ……… her hair every day.
A. washes B. wash C. clean D. cleans
10 .How many minutes are there in………… hour?
A. a B. an C. the D. these
11. Does Mrs. Mai go to school _______ car? - Yes, she does.
A. on B. in C. by D. of
12. Is he good __________ Physics and Math?
A. for B. at C. on D. in
13. I can’t speak French but my brother __________.
A. can B. can’t C. does D. doesn’t
14. My mother always wants me __________ the piano well.
A. to play B. playing C. play D. to playing
15. Who _____________ you English?
A. teach B. does teach C. do teach D. teaches
Question IV. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets
1. Where is your mother? – She is in the kitchen. She ______(cook) the dinner.
2. Your mother ______ (go) to school by bus every day?
3. Don’t talk so loudly, please! My son_______(sleep) in the next room.
4. She _______(not be) hungry and she _______(not want) any rice.
5. Look! The plane (fly) ............................ toward to the airport. It(land)..........................
6. Take these medicines and you ( feel ) ……………….. better then, Ha .
7. I …………..(have) a birthday party tomorrow evening. Would you like ………..(come)?
Question V. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in brackets (10p).
IV. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently
1. A. lamp B. table C. family D. bag
2. A. copy B. post C. body D. orange
3. A. weak B. head C. heavy D. breakfast
4. A. bean B. please C. near D. read
5. A. foot B. toothpaste C. floor D. look
Question V. Each of the following sentences has one mistake. Identify and correct the mistakes
1. Ba often does his homeworks in the evening.
2. They aren’t go to bed at 9 o’clock.
3.That’s my sister over there. She stands near the window.
4. Her garden is big. It’s a garden big.
5. He’s waiting to the bus at the moment.
6. My father never have lunch at home.
7. We need eight hundred gram of beef.
8. Do you know how many teachers does your school have?
9. How long are you going to staying in Vietnam?
10. Would you like any sugar? – Yes , please.
Question VI.Choose the best option (a,b,c or d) to complete the passage.
It’s Sunday morning . The Browns are sitting in (1)……… living room. They are talking (2)…….. the dinner this evening. David likes beef and Susan does ,too. He says that beef (3)……..good for children. Their father, Mr. Brown , prefer chicken to beef . He asks his wife to buy (4)…….. for him. Helen , their youngest daughter doesn’t want any meat .She would (5)……….. cakes and sweets. Mrs. Brown doesn’t like beef . She doesn’t like chicken, either. She likes fish, vegetables and fruit. She says that fish and vegetables (6)…………. good for old men and every body (7)………. to eat fruit.
At last they decide to go out (8)…….dinner (9)………..Mrs. Brown says that she can’t cook so(10)…………food for every body in the family.
1.A. the B.a C.an D. to
2. A. with B. for C. about D. to
3.A . are B. has C. does D. is
4. A. little B. some C. any D. none
5. A. like B. likes C.have D. has
6. A. is B. have C.are D. do
7. A. need B. needs C. are D. have
8. A. to B.of C. with D. for
9. A. because B. but C. so D. and
10. A. many B. little C. much D. lots of
Question VII: Fill in the blank of the following passage with ONE suitable word
I _______(1) in a house near the sea. It is_______ (2) old house, about 100 _______(3) old and it's very small. _______(4) are two bed rooms upstairs but no bathroom. The bathroom iis down stairs, next to the kitchen and there _______(5) a living room where there is a lovely old fire place. There is a _______(6) in front of the house. The garden _______(7) down to the beach and in Spring and Summer there are flowers every where. I like alone _______(8) my dog, Rack, but we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with me.
I love my house for many _______(9): the garden, the flowers in Summer, the fire in Winter, but the best thing is the view _______ (10) my bedroom window.
.Question VIII.Rewrite each of the following sentences in such a way that it means exactly the same as
1. Huong’school bag is new.
ð Huong has ………………………………………………………………………………..…..
2. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms?
ð Are……………………………………………………………………………………………?
3. Phuong has a brother ,Nam.
ð Phuong………………………………………………………………………………………
4. No house on the street is older than this house.
ð This house…………………………………………………………………………….………
5. How many apples does she want?
ð How many apples would……………………………………………………………………..?
6. Learning how to use a computer is very easy
ð It is …………. …………………………………………….…………….……………………
7. He drives very carefully
ð He is ..…………………………………………….……………………………………………
8. Why don’t we listen to music tonight?
ð How about …………………………………………….……………………………..………
9. How much is this dictionary ?ð What ...........................................................................................
10.It’s often hot in the summer.ð It’s never......................................................................................................................
Question IX. Rearrange the words given into the meaning sentences
1. yard/ front/ school/There/ big/ of/ is/ our/ in/ a.
......................................................................................................................................................
2. many/ right/ the/ museum/ Are/ flowers/ the/ there/ to/ of/?
......................................................................................................................................................
3. next/ photocopy/ What/ store/ there/ the/ is/ to /?
......................................................................................................................................................
4. hospital/ father/ in/ the/ city/ My/ a/ works/ in.
......................................................................................................................................................
5. there/ family/ many/ in/ are/ How/ Linh’s/ people/ ?
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
Question X. Using the cues to complete the sentences.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………...
3. Many / plants/ animals/ danger/ because /we /destroying /them.
…………………………………….……………………………………………………………
4. There/ peas/ but / not/ potatoes.
→............................................................................................................................................
5.She/ like /dozen/ eggs/ vegetables.
→..........................................................................................................................................
ENGLISH TEST 04
I. Choose the best options to complete the sentences.
1. ..………………. your teacher?- Yes, she is very kind.
A. Do you like B. Do you want C. Would you like D. How is
2. My father is……………………..man.
A. a old B. an old C. not young D. not very young
3. I need some tea. Please give me a……………… of tea.
A. bottle B. bar C. tube D. packet
4. We are waiting……………... a bus.
A. to B. of C.for D. at
5. Is there any……………….in the bottle?- Yes, there is some.
A. peas B.carrots C.milk D.beans
6. Does your brother………………..any games?- No, he doesn’t.
A. play B. plays C. playing D. to play
7. I don’t like vegetables but my sister……………………
A. do B. likes C. does D. would like
8. Would you like some biscuits, Lan?-No,……………..I’m full.
A. I wouldn’t B. I don’t C. thanks D. I don’t like
9. How do they want ………………to work?- By minibus.
A. to go B. to travel C. to walk D. Both a and b
10. …………………………….tonight?- Nothing.
A.What are you do B. What do you do
C. What are you going to do D. Both a and b
11. ………………….go to the zoo?- That’s a good idea!
A. What do we B. Would we like to C.Why don’t we D.Are we going to
12. We need …………… water.
A. blue B. fresh C. green D. red
13. …………………are you going to stay with?- My sister and my brother.
A. Who B. Where C. How D. How long
14. There are four seasons …………a year……………are they?
A. in/Which B. at/What C. in/What D. on/Which
15. The opposite of “weak” is………………..
A. strong B.thin C. heavy D. small
16. My grandparents are old, they don’t like……………..because it’s very cold.
A. summer B. fall C. spring D. winter
17. He usually goes swimming once………………………..
A. the week B. a week C. all weeks D. in the week
18. The room of my parents is small. “The room of my parents” means:
A. my room’s parents B. my parents’s room
C. my parents’ room D. my room’parent
19. How…………..oranges would you like?- Six, please. And …………..tea.
A. much/some B. many/any C. much/any D. many/some
20. Does Mary like …………….?- Yes, she goes jogging every morning.
A. jog B. to jog C. jogs D. jogging
21. The children are playing………………..the garden.
A. in B. on C. under D. at
22. Don’t be late ……… your school!
A. in B. for C. at D. on
23. We go there by car and they go…………foot.
A. on B. by C. to D. with
24. How much is a bowl of noodles?-……………..five thousand five hundred dong.
A. They are B. It is C. It has D. There is
25. He is…………….English at a big school.
A. teach B. teaches C. teacher D. teaching
26. I want a ……………..of orange juice.
A. can B. box C. tube D. bar
27. I’d like some meat, please. How much……………………………?
A. do you like B. do you want C. you’d like D. you need
28. They are going to stay ……………….their grandparents in the country.
A. in B. to C. at D. with
29. It’s a lovely day! Let’s……………….to the beach.
A. go B. to go C. going D. we go
30. Listen! ………………to your sister?
A.Who is going to talk B. Who talks
C.Who does talk D .Who is talking
II. Put the words into the correct word forms
31. It’s very …………… in the city. (noise)
32. There is a …………… next to my house. (bake)
33. She is a …………… of English. (teach)
34. I brush my …………… twice a day. (tooth)
35. Long goes …………… at the weekend. (fish)
36. Their house is on the …………… floor of the building. (two)
37. Hanoi is …………… than Thai Binh (big)
38. Do you …………… play video games?. (usual)
39. This is the …………… house in my village. (beautiful)
40. Peter is a taxi…………………………. (drive)
51. I like watching TV. There are a good film on TV tonight.
A B C D
52. What is he often do when it’s hot?
A B C D
53. How much rooms are there in the new house?
A B C D
54. I’m very thirsty. I like some apple juice.
A B C D
55. How many children does your sister has?
A B C D
ENGLISH TEST 05
6. A. these B. brother C. think D. that
7. A. change B. Christmas C. school D. chemistry
8. A. car B. city C. cook D. cake
9. A. flower B. town C. know D. brown
IV: Fill in the blank of the following passage with ONE suitable word :
I _______(1) in a house near the sea. It is_______ (2) old house, about 100 _______(3) old and it's very small. _______(4) are two bed rooms upstairs but no bathroom. The bathroom iis down stairs, next to the kitchen and there _______(5) a living room where there is a lovely old fire place. There is a _______(6) in front of the house. The garden _______(7) down to the beach and in Spring and Summer there are flowers every where. I like alone _______(8) my dog, Rack, but we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with me.
I love my house for many _______(9): the garden, the flowers in Summer, the fire in Winter, but the best thing is the view _______ (10) my bedroom window.
V. Rewrite each of the following sentences in such a way that it means exactly the same
1. Huong’school bag is new.ð Huong has ………………………………………………..…..
2. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms?ð Are…………………………………………………………?
3. Phuong has a brother, Nam.ð Phuong………………………………………………………………
4. No house on the street is older than this house.ð This house……………………………………………….………
5. How many apples does she want?ð How many apples would………………………………..?
6. Learning how to use a computer is very easyð It is ………………………….…………….……………………
7. He drives very carefullyð He is ..………….……………………………………………
8. Why don’t we listen to music tonight?ð How about ……………….……………………………..………
9. How much is this dictionary?ð What ............................................................................................................................
10.It’s often hot in the summer.ð It’s never...............................................................................................
VI. Rearrange the words given into the meaning sentences
1. yard/ front/ school/There/ big/ of/ is/ our/ in/ a.
......................................................................................................................................................
2. many/ right/ the/ museum/ Are/ flowers/ the/ there/ to/ of/?
......................................................................................................................................................
3. next/ photocopy/ What/ store/ there/ the/ is/ to /?
......................................................................................................................................................
4. hospital/ father/ in/ the/ city/ My/ a/ works/ in.
......................................................................................................................................................
5. there/ family/ many/ in/ are/ How/ Linh’s/ people/ ?
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
VII. Choose the best answer.
1. There are five …………. in one hand.
A. fingers B. arms C. toes D. feet
2. How..............................kilos of beef does she want?
A. many B. much C. often D. about
3. His father is waiting ..............................a bus.
A. to B. for C. of D. at
4. The room of my parents is small. “The room of my parents” means:
A. my room’s parents B. my parents’s room
C. my parents’ room D. my room’ parents
5. How.......................oranges would you like? - Six please. And ....................... tea.
A. much/some B. many/any C. much/any D. many/some
6. We go there by car and they go..................... foot.
A. on B. by C. to D. with
7. Listen! Who................................... to your sister?
A. is going to talk B. talks C. does talk D. is talking
8. .....................................go to the zoo? - That’s a good idea!
A. What do we B. Would you like C. Why don’t we D. Are we going to
9. Fall means ..............................in British English.
A. summer B. winter C. spring D. autumn
10. Don't forget to buy five .............. of bread!
A. bottles B. loaves C. cans D. bars
11. They buy some fruit but ............. vegetables.
A. some B. any C. little D. no
12. It's seven thirty and Minh is late ................ school.
A. for B. at C. to D. in
13. Lan combs her ............ every morning.
A. face B. nose C. hair D. mouth
14. There is a ............... water in the bottle.
A. much B. lot C. little D. few
15. Is there .............. else you want?
A. a B. an C. some D. anything
16. My sister and I ............................. television in the living - room now.
A. am watching B. are watching C. is watching D. watching
VIII. What do you say in these situations?
1. What do you say when you want to know the way to the post office?- "................"
2. What do you say when you want to go out? - "........................................................"
3. What do you say when you want to know the price of a book? - ".........................."
4. What do you say when you want to know the time now? - "..................................."
5. What do you say when you want to know the weather today? - "............................"
6. What do you say when you want to invite your friend home for dinner? - "..........."
7. What do you say when you want to borrow your friend's ruler? - "........................"
8. What do you say when you want to know your friend's phone number? - "............"
9. What do you say when you want to help someone? - "..........................................."
10. What do you say when you want to know the distance between Ha Noi and Da Nang? - "......................................................................................................................."
IX. Supply the correct form of the word in capital.
ENGLISH TEST 06
I. Pick out the word whose underlined part in pronounced differently from
II. Choose the best answer
1. There are...................eggs in the fridge.
A. a lot B. a few C. a little D. little
2. What do you do .............................the weekend.
A. on B. in C to D. for
3. I am going .........Ha Long bay
A. visiting B. visit C. visited D. to visit
4. There isn’t _______milk in the bottle.
A. an B. a C. any D. some
5. How much is a _________of toothpaste.
A. can B. bar C. tube D. box
6. What about ______table-tennis?
A. to play B. playing C. plays D. play
7. Fall means ……………..in British-English.
A. summer B. winter C. autumn D. spring
8. What is her _____________? _ She is Australian.
A. language B. nationality C. population D. country
9. They are going _________vacation in London.
A. in B. on C. at D. for
10. ________languages can you speak?
A. When B. How C. How much D. Which
11. The Great Wall of China is the world’s _____structure.
A. long B. longer C. the longest D. longest
12. Ho Chi Minh has a ___________of 3.5 million.
A. city B. capital C. population D. country
13. I am Mary. I am __________ Great Britain.
A. to B. from C. at D. on
14. ______are you going to stay? _ In a hotel.
A. Which B. Where C. When D. What
15. Tomatoes, lettuce and potatoes are ………………
A. fruits B. vegetables C. drinks D. flowers
16. There is an intersection ahead. You must______ .
A. slow down B. go fast C. stop D. go ahead
17. There isn’t any water in the bottle. I am going to take ______.
A. many B. an C. any D. some
18. A. What is the matter with you? – B: ______
A. I go by bike B. I’m heavy C. I like chicken D. I’m tired
19. A: Would you like a glass of lemon juice? – B: ______
A. No, I’m not B. No, I don’t like C. No, thanks D. No. It’s too hot.
20. PETRONAS Twin Towers is the…………. building in the world.
A. tall B. taller C. tallest D. the tallest
21. Mai needs ……………………chocolates.
A. a bar of B. a packet of C. a box of D. a bottle of
22. He ……………………his bicycle at the moment.
A. rides B. is riding C. ride D. to ride
23. Phanxipang is the ……………………mountain in Viet nam.
A. high B. higher C. highest D. the highest
24……………………is the weather like?
A. How B. What C. Who D. How much
25.My house is as ……………………as Hoa’s house.
A. smaller B. small C. biggest D. bigger
26.We ……………………waste food and feed it to pigs.
A. damage B. collect C. leave D. throw
27.Chi is……………………girl in her class.
A. more beautiful B. the most beautiful C. beautiful D. a most beautiful
28.I’m going ……………………the Ngoc Son Temple tomorrow
A. see B. sees C. to see D.seeing
29.What ……………………you ……………………to do tomorrow?
A. does / go B.is / going C.are / going D. do / go
30. We shouldn’t ………… our environment.
A. destroying B. to destroy C. destroys D. destroy
31. He often ________ he ________ the kites when he isn’t busy?
A. does / flies B. does / fly C. does / play D. does / play
32. Why don’t we ________ to the movies? ~ That’s a good idea.
A. go B. to go C. going D. to going
33. Some people can speak many ________
A. countries B. nationalities C. languages D. speeches
34. There are four ________ in a year: spring, summer, fall and winter.
A. activities B. pastimes C. weathers D. seasons
35. Can I help you? ~ ________ please. I need a kilo of beef.
A. Yes B. Sorry C. Can D. No
36. Mr Thanh is a policeman. He has a ……………….job
A. fast B. careful C. difficult D. bad
37. Her sister has an…………face and long black …………
A. round - hairs B. long - hairs C. oval -hair D. oval - hairs
38. What are ………? …………..are his shoulders
A. those-These B. those-Those C. this-This D. those-This
39. How many oranges, Mom? ……… dozen, please
A. A half of B. Half a C. A half D. Half
40.You ……… eat too much meat. It isn’t good for your health.
A. should B. shouldn’t C. not D. don’t want
III. Supply the correct verb tense/ form of the verbs in the brackets.
1. Mrs Thu (do) …………… the housework every day. => ………………………………….
2. My brother (listen) ………………. to music now. => …………………………………….
3. They (visit)……………. Da Lat this summer vacation. => ………………………………….
4. Long is thirsty. He’d like (drink)………….. some water. => ………………………………...
5. Now they ( play ) …………soccer. => ………………………………….
6. He ( not go ) ………….fishing in the winter. => ………………………………….
7. You usually ( jog) ………in the morning? – Yes, I do. => ……………………………...
8. This summer vacation, my parents ( visit)……..to Hue. => ………………………………….
9. What about ( go) ……….to Nha Trang? => ………………………………….
10. We mustn’t (drive) fast on the street. => …………………………………..
IV. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets to complete each sentence.
1. It is very …………………………………….. in the city. NOISE
3. This is my favorite chair. It’s so ………………… . COMFORT
4. There is a ………………………. next to my house. BAKE
5. She is a ……………………. of English. TEACH
6. I brush my ……………….. twice a day. TOOTH
7. Long goes ……………….. at the weekend. SAIL
8. Their house is on the ………………… floor of the room. FIVE
9. Bac Giang is ………………………… than Ha Noi. SMALL
10. Do you ……………………… play video games? USUAL
V. Read the passage carefully and then answer the following questions.
My name is Petty and this is my husband, Phil. We both work in offices in London. We have breakfast at half past seven. We don’t have a big breakfast. We usually have bread, coffee and orange juice.
For lunch we usually have a salad or soup and sandwich. That’s at about 1.30.
We usually have dinner at half past seven in the evening. It is a big meal of the day and we have meat or fish with vegetables and potatoes or rice. We have orange juice with the milk. On Saturday evenings we go to a restaurant for dinner at about eight o’clock.
1. Who is Petty’s husband?.................................................................................... …………………………………….
2. What do they have for lunch?…………………………………………………………………………………………
3. What time do they usually have dinner?……………………………………………………………………………….
4. What do they drink for dinner?……………………………………………………………………………………..
5. Where do they have dinner on Saturday evenings?……………………………………………………………………
6. Is dinner a big meal for Petty and her husband?.............................................................................................................
VI. Choose the suitable word for each blank in the following passage
London has a (1) ……….. of 6.7 million. London is a famous city. Tourists come from all over the world to (2) ……… its historic buildings, theaters, museums, and its many shops. You can also see and hear the famous (3) ………., Big Ben. Like many big cities, London has problems with traffic and (4) ……….. There are too many cars on the (5) ………..
The (6) ……….. thing about London is the parks. There are (7) ……….. in the city center. But my children’s favorite place is Harleys. It is the biggest toyshop in the (8) ………..
VII. Rewrite the following sentences so that the second sentence means the same as the first one
1. What about eating some rice?--> Let’s .................................................................................................
2. Her eyes are brown.--> She has .................................................................................................................................
3. What drink do you like?--> What is ...............................................................................................................................
4. Our school has 12 classrooms.--> There are .................................................................................................................
5. Let’s go to the park.→ What about ………………………………………………………………………………?
6. How about watching Television?→ Why don’t you ……………………………………………………………….?
7. . Why don’t we go to the movies? → What ………………………………………………………………………….?
8. What’s the weather like in the spring? →How ………………………………………………………………………?
9. How about visiting our friends? →Why..............................................................................................................................?
10. How’s the weather this morning? → What ............................................................................................................?
VIII. Correct the mistakes in the following sentences
There are an books. =>
This are benches. =>
What time it is? =>
She is ride her bike. =>
There aren’t some tall trees behind my house. =>
My father watching TV at the moment. =>
Chi is beautiful. Her tooth are small and white=>
I like drink apple juice. It’s my favorite drink. =>
I’m very full. I’d like a bowl of noodles, Mom. =>
There are four season in a year in Viet Nam. =>
IX. Write the sentences with the cue words.
1. I’d / am / so / like / noodles / I / hungry / some.=>…………………………………………………………………
2. Skipping / her / and / younger / like / winter / Mai / sister / in.
=>……………………………………………………………………………………………
3. Vietnamese / is / Vietnam / He / and / speak / He / from =>……………………………………………………………………………………………
4. language / you / often / French / ? / Which / do / speak / English / or
=>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
5. like / what / the / is / weather/ in / winter /the / ?
=>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
6. often / Peter / to / school / goes / 6:30 / at
=>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
7. often / at / dinner / I / o’clock / have / seven. =>….…………………………………………………………………………………………..
8. bigger / Ho Chi Minh City / which / or / Ha Noi / is? =>….……………………………………………………………………………………………..
9. don’t / Pagoda / go / why / to / we / Huong? =>….……………………………………………………………………………………………..
10. listens / usually / in / to / free / Lan / her / music / time. =>….……………………………………………………………………………………………...
ENGLISH TEST 07
I. Fill in each gap with a suitable word given.
I live in a house near the sea. It is ...(1)... old house, about 100 years old and...(2)... very small. There are two bedrooms upstairs...(3)... no bathroom. The bathroom is downstairs ... (4)... the kitchen and there is a living room where there is a lovely old fire place. There is a garden...(5)... the house. The garden...(6)... down to the beach and in spring and summer...(7)... flowers every where. I live alone...(8)... my dog, Rack, but we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with...(9)...
I love my house for... (10)... reasons: the garden, the flowers in summer, the fee in winter, but the best thing is the view from my bedroom window.
II. Fill in each gap with ONE suitable word.
Mr. Tuan is…………(1) engineer in a big factory. He lives in a small apartment…………(2) the fifth floor of a building in Ho Chi Minh City. The factory is (3)……… near his house, so he goes to work by bus. He ……….(4) home at 7 o’clock to arrive to work at 7.45. …………(5) is Saturday morning now, and Mr. Tuan is…………..(6) home, in bed. On Saturdays he………..(7) up at a quarter to seven. Then he sits in the living room and………..(8) breakfast. On Saturday afternoons he………….(9) tennis or goes swimming. On Saturday evenings, he (10)………. stay at home, he usually goes out.
III. Rearrange the words to make meaningful sentences.
1. stay / grandparents / vacation / are / with / next / we / to / our / going / summer/.
………………………………………………………………………......................
2. in / the / Nile River / the / longest / the / is / world / river /.
………………………………………………………………………………………
3. good / the / there / let’s / and / time / beach / go / have / to / a /.
……………………………………………………………………………………...
4. small / thin / sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has /.
....................................................................................................................................
5. "No parking" / here /, so / sign / mustn’t / says / park / this / we/ .
...................................................................................................................................
6. happy / always / John / home / feels / when / he / comes / .
...................................................................................................................................
7. sister / home / rides/ and / my/ at / has/ and / lunch/ twelve / a / to / quarter/ .
..................................................................................................................................
8. usually / notebook / cheaper / dictionary / a / a / is / than / .
...................................................................................................................................
9. isn't / water / much / bottle / there / the / in / .
...................................................................................................................................
10. still / more / hungry / need / some / I / and / am / rice / I / .
....................................................................................................................................
IV. Rewrite sentences as directed so that the meaning stay the same.
1. Is there a colorful picture in your room?Has ……………………………………...……..................?
2. How much is a bowl of noodles?How much does .......................................................................................
3. Let's go out for a walk.Why ....................................................................?
4. I like beef and vegetables best.Beef ..........................................................................
5. That pencil belongs to Hoa.Hoa is……………………………..................................................................
6. What is the age of this building?. How ..................................................................... ?
7. The Mekong river is longer than the Red river.The red river ………………………...................................
8. I spend two hours a day doing my homework.It......................................................................
9. No one in my class is as beautiful as Hoa.Hoa..................................................................
10. How heavy is that big bag? How much.............................................................
V Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently
31. a.lamp b.table c.family d.bag
32. a.copy b.post c.body d.orange
33. a.weak b.head c.heavy d.breakfast
34. a.bean b.please c.near d.read
35. a.skip b.swim c.fried d.milk
VI. Choose the best options to complete the statements.
1.……………….your teacher?- Yes, she is very beautiful.
a.Do you like b.Do you want c.Would you like d.How is
2.How………………kilos of beef does she want?
a.many b.much c.often d.about
3.I need some tea. Please give me a……………… of tea.
a.bottle b.bar c.tube d.packet
4. His father is waiting……………... a bus.
a.to b.of c.for d.at
5.Is there any……………….in the bottle?- Yes, there is some.
a.peas b.carrots c.sugar d.beans
6.Does your brother………………..any games?- No, he doesn’t.
a.play b.plays c.playing d.to play
7.I don’t like vegetables but my sister……………………
a.do b.likes c.does d.would like
8.Would you like some apples, Lan?-No,……………..I’m full.Thanks!
a.I wouldn’t b. I don’t c. I’m not d.I don’t like
9.How do they want ………………to work?- By minibus.
a.to go b.to travel c.to walk d. Both a and b
10…………………………….tonight?- Nothing.
a.What are you doing b.What do you do
c.What are you going to do d. Both a and b
11.My grandparents are old, they don’t like……………..because it’s very cold.
a.summer b.fall c.spring d.winter
12. He usually goes swimming once………………………..
a.the week b.a week c.all weeks d.in the week
13.The room of my parents is small. “The room of my parents” means:
a.my room’s parents b.my parents’s room
c.my parents’ room d.my room’parent
14.How…………..oranges would you like?- Six, please. And …………..tea.
a.much/some b.many/any c.much/any d.many/some
15. Does Mary like …………….?- Yes, she goes jogging every morning.
a.jog b.to jog c.jogs d.jogging
16. The children are playing………………..the garden.
a.in b.on c.under d.at
17. They often eat……………….ice-cream after dinner.
a.some b.any c.a d.an
18.We go there by car and they go…………foot.
a.on b.by c.to d.with
19.How much is a bowl of noodles?-……………..five thousand five hundred dong.
a.They are b.It is c.It has d.There is
20.He is…………….English at a big school.
a.teach b.teaches c.teacher d.teaching
21.I want a ……………..of orange juice.
a.can b.box c.tube d.bar
22. I’d like some meat, please. How much……………………………?
a.do you like b.do you want c.you’d like d.you need
23. They are going to stay ……………….their grandparents in the country.
a.in b.to c.at d.with
24. It’s a lovely day! Let’s……………….to the beach.
a.go b.to go c.going d.we go
25.Listen! ………………to your sister?
a.Who is going to talk b.Who talks
c.Who does talk d.Who is talking
26. ………………….go to the zoo?- That’s a good idea!
a. What do we b. Would we like to c.Why don’t we d.Are we going to
27.The weather is……………………today.
a.blue b.nice c.green d.red
28. …………………are you going to stay with?- My sister and my brother.
a.Who b.Where c.How d.How long
29.There are four seasons …………a year……………are they?
a.in/Which b.at/What c.in/What d.on/Which
30.Which cinema…………………………………?
a.do you want to go to b.do you want to go it
c.you want to go d.do you want to go
VII/ Choose the word or the phrase that are not correct
31.I like watching TV.There are a good film on TV tonight.
A B C D
32. What is he often do when it’s hot?
A B C D
33.How much rooms are there in the new house?
A B C D
34. I’m very thirsty. I like some apple juice.
A B C D
35. How many childs does your sister have?
A B C D
ENGLISH TEST 08
I/ Find the word which is not the same with the others in a group.
1. a.bed b.window c.table d.chair
2. a.oranges b.apples c.bananas d.flowers
3. a.day b.week c.month d.holiday
4. a.summer b.fall c.winter d.fly
5. a.leg b.foot c.finger d.toe
II /Read the passage carefully then write T for true statements and F for false statements.
Minh and her friends are going to camp for four days in SAPA.Vui is going to bring a tent and some food. Lan is going to bring a ball to play volleyball. Ly is going to bring her camera to take some photos. Nga and Mai are going to bring some drinks. They take some orange juice. They don’t take iced tea because it’s cold. They also take some food. Their favorite food is chicken, lettuces and tomatoes. Vui’s mother helped them to arrange food and drink for their camping.They are going to stay in a small hotel.They leave their house at 6 o’clock.
III/ Đặt câu hỏi cho phần bị gạch chân ở mỗi câu
11. She is cooking meal in the kitchen.=>……………………………………………………………………………
12. I’d like some milk and vegetables.=>………………………………………………………………………………
13. Miss Nga is teaching English at a secondary school.=>……………………………………………………………
14.Nam never flies a kite.=>…………………………………………………………………………………
15. I have Math and Literature on Monday and Thursday.=>……………………………………………………………
16. He goes to the cinema once a week.=>……………………………………………………………………………
17. My sister is in grade 6.=>…………………………………………………………………………………………
18. Mai always has dinner at seven o’clock.=>…………………………………………………………………………
19. My brother wants a glass of lemon juice.=>………………………………………………………………………
20. Linh has milk and eggs for her breakfast.=>………………………………………………………………………
IV/ Viết lại câu với nghĩa không đổi
21. What time does she go to work?=>When ...........................
22. She likes noodles.=>Her favorite………………………………………………
23. What is the price of these apples?=> How much……………………………………………………………
24. The car is blue.=> It is………………………………………………………………
25.It’s often hot in the summer. => It’s never………………………………………………………………………
Hien and Hoa are students. They live in Viet Nam. There are four seasons in a year in their country. They are spring, summer, fall and winter. In the spring, the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold, but not very cold. There are many flowers in this season. After spring, it is the summer. In the summer, the days are long and the nights are short. They often go on vacation in the summer. Fall is nice season. The weather is often cool. In the winter, it is usually very cold. The days are short and the nights are long. They always wear warm clothes in the winter.
Questions:
36.How many seasons are there in their country? What are they?
=>………………………………………………………………………………………………
37.What is the weather like in the spring?=>………………………………………………………………
38.What do they often do in the summer?=>………………………………………………………………………
39.Are the days long or short in the winter?=>……………………………………………………………………
40. What do they always wear in the winter?=>………………………………………………………………
IX. Choose the word whose stress pattern is different
X. Circle the best answer
11. How often do you do morning exercises in the summer?
12. We are going to have an English examination ………………… April, 21st .
13. There is a lot of …………………in Viet Nam. Our country is very green.
14. My friend, Linh …………………drinks cocacola and beer.
15. …………………is your uncle going to stay here? - …………………about three days.
16. …………………do they go to work every morning? - On foot.
19. Why don’t we go to the zoo this Sunday morning?
20. …………………is your father? He is very well, thank you.
21. When it is hot, we often feel quite…………………
22. In our country, the weather often …………………quickly.
23. My French penpal, Jack can speak six …………………fluently.
24. What …………………your little sister …………………in the evening?
25. I want a good pair of shoes because I always goes …………………in the morning.
ENGLISH TEST 09
Câu 1: Chọn một từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại.
Câu 2: Chọn đáp án đúng nhất cho mỗi câu sau.
11. My sister ……………………. her homework every day.
A. does B. is C. are D. do
12.There is an intersection ahead. We……………………. .
A. must not slow down. B. must slow down.
C. must go fast. D. cannot go straight.
13. Does Mrs. Van ……..…….. one kilo of sugar.
A. need B. needs C. to need D. needing
14. There is a ……………………..behind my classroom.
A. big flower garden B. flower big garden C. garden big flower D. big garden flower
15. Mexico City is .................. city in the world.
A. biger B. big C. bigger D. the biggest
16.......................... trash over there.
A. Don’t throw B. Not throw C. Throw D. Can’t throw
17. Nam lives ________ a market
A. near B. on C. between D. at
18. Do you like pop music?
A. I would B. Yes, a lot C. No, I like it D. Yes, we are
19. I’m playing table tennis. .......................you like table tennis ?
A. Have B .Is C. Are D. Do
20. The students have got ..................... news about their exams .
A. many B. some C. a D. a few
21 . The boy looks a little thin, ................... he is strong.
A. and B. for C. or D. but
22. Mary and ................... would like to join the English Club speaking.
A. me B. my C. mine D. I
23. How...........apples are there ?
A. much B. more C. may D. many
24. There aren’t......pictures on the wall.
A. any B. some C. a D. an
25. How much rice .......your mother...............?
A. do - need B. does - needs C. do - needs D. does - need
Câu 3. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc:
30. Look! The children (wait) …………………………for the bus over there.
31. Nga (not visit) …………………………………………………..Hue next week.
32. …………………… (be/ there) any milk in the fridge? – Yes, we have some.
33. Let's ( do) ................................. our work now.
34. What about (help)........................... the street children?.
35. Can we (play) … ………..soccer on the streets?
Câu 4. Cho dạng đúng của từ in đậm:
36. Her father is a................................ FARM
37. His ……………….are small and long. FOOT
38. Near my house there is a market. It’s very …………………… NOISE
39. Her ………………..are in the yard. They are playing soccer. CHILD
40. There are many………………………….on the street. TREE
41. There is a………………………rice paddy near my house. BEAUTY
42. In the ……………..... , there is a museum, a factory and a stadium. NEIGHBOR
43. The photocopy is between the ……………….and the drugstore. BAKE
44. Minh is ..... ........................... at English than I am. good
45. I go to visit my grandparents .........................a month. ONE
Câu 5. Mỗi câu có MỘT lỗi sai, gạch chân chỗ sai và sửa lại:
46. She lives in 12 Le Hong Phong street. .......................................................
47. What does the weather like today? .......................................................
48. What do Ba do when it is hot? ............................. ........................
49. There is trees and flowers in front of my yard.....................................................
50. Nga goes to school six day a week. .....................................................
51. How much rooms are there in the new house?.......................................................
52. I’m very thirty. I would like some apple juice..................................................
53. They no get up at 6 o’clock. ......................................................
54. We go to the library in Monday afternoon......................................................
55. What is the higher mountain in the world?......................................................
Câu 6: Đọc đoạn văn, sau đó trả lời câu hỏi :
My name is Nguyen Minh Trung. I’m a new student in class 6A. I’m from Da Nang and my family still lives there. In Ho Chi Minh City, I live with my grandparents at 21/3B Nguyen Trai street. My new school is not far from our house – about one kilometer, so I go to school by bike. There are a lot of students in my new school. But I don’t have any friends. I’m unhappy. I miss my parents, my sisters and my friends in Da nang.
56. Which grade is Trung in?..............................................................................................................................
57. Is he a new student? .....................................................................................................................................
58. Where is he from? ........................................................................................................................................
59. How far is it from his house to school? ........................................................................................................
60. What's his address? ....................................................................................................................................
Câu 7. Điền từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống:
I have a very close friend. Her name is Mai. She is eleven years old and she is in (61)........................ six. She(62)........................ speak English. She has English (63)..........................Tuesday, Thursday and Friday. She can also (64)......................... the piano. In her room,(65)............................... is a piano and some books. Every day she gets up at six. She (66).............................. breakfast at six thirty and goes to school at a (67).............................. to seven. She has her (68)................................ from seven o’clock to eleven thirty. Then she(69)............................... home and has lunch at twelve o’clock. It’s three o’clock in the afternoon now and Nga is in her room. She (70)...........................doing her homework.
Câu 8: Đặt câu hỏi cho từ hoặc cụm từ gạch chân
71. She is cooking meal in the kitchen.=>……………………………………………………………………
72. I’d like some milk and vegetables.=>……………………………………………………………………
73. Nam is doing his homework.=>…………………………………………………………………………
74. Nam never flies a kite.=>………………………………………………………………………………
75. We often go to school by bicycles.=>………………………………………………………………………
76. Her eyes are brown=>………………………………………………………………………………
77. My sister is in grade 6.=>………………………………………………………………………………
78. Mai is tired and hungry=>………………………………………………………………………………
79. My brother wants a glass of lemon juice.=>………………………………………………………………
80. Linh has milk and eggs for her breakfast.=>……………………………………………………………
Câu 9: Hoàn thành câu thứ hai sao cho câu có cùng nghĩa với câu đã cho.
81. Let’s walk to school!=> Why.....................................................................................................................?
82. My father usually drives to work.=> My father usually goes………………………….……………………………
83. There are four people in her family=> Her family………………………………………………………………..
84. The girl is beautiful.=> She is.....................................................................................................
85. No house in this street is older than my house.=> My house .......................................................................................
86. The bookstore is to the right of the museum =>The museum………………………………………………
87. We have English class at 7.15.> Our English class……………………………………..
88. How much is a kilo of beef?=> How much does…………………………………………………………
89. What time does she go to work?=> When…………………………………………………………………
90. She likes noodles best.=> Her favorite………………………………………………………..
Câu 10. Dùng từ gợi ý để hoàn thành câu :
91. Quang / brother / walk / movie theater / moment.
=> ………………………….…………………………………………………..
=>………………………………………………………………………………
95. What / there / front / your house ?
=>………………………………………………………………………………
ENGLISH TEST 10
I. Fill in the blanks with the correct prepositions.
1. I usually go to school by bicycle but today I am going……………….……foot.
2. Is there a flower garden ……………….…… front of your house? - Yes, there is.
3. My mother wants a sandwich and a glass ……………….……orange juice.
4. What would you like……………….……dinner? - I’d like some noodles.
5. The plane flies……………….…….mountains, rivers and towns.
6. What are they doing at the moment? - They are listening……………….……the tape.
7. Elizabeth and Charls are ……………….……England. They speak English.
II. Write the correct form of the words given in capital letters:
1. My school is the …………………..one in Thanh Oai District. (OLD)
2. All of us are are very good ………………….. (STUDY)
3. In our school library, there are four ………………….. (BOOKSHELF)
4. Hung visits his grandparents …………………..a week. (ONE)
5. My house is on the …………………..floor of that tall building. (NINE)
6. Nobody in my class is …………………..than Trang. (GOOD)
III. Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets:
1. Look! The plane is flying towards the airport. It (land) ……………….……
2. Ha’s father (drive) ……………….……his car to the garage at the moment.
3. How your sister (go) ……………….……to school every day? - By motorbike, of course.
4. Mr. Tung is a teacher and he (not have).……………….……classes in the afternoon.
5. You mustn’t (eat) ……………….……food in this canteen.
6. The Nile River (flow) ……………….……to the Mediterranean Sea.
7. Mrs. Thuy is cleaning the windows and doors. Let’s (help) ……………….……her.
IV. Read and circle the best option
Everyone (1)……………….…… oranges. They are quite sweet and juicy. They are in sections so (2)……………….…… is very easy to eat them. Some oranges (3)……………….…… not have seeds. Some (4)……………….…… thick skins and some have thin skins. The orange tree is beautiful. It has a lot of (5)……………….……. leaves. The small white flowers smell very sweet. (6)……………….…… orange tree has a lot of flowers and fruit at the same (7)……………….…… . "Orange" is both a fruit (8)……………….…… a colour. The (9)……………….…… of orange is so beautiful that in English we use the name of the fruit (10)……………….…… the colour.
V. There is a mistake in each line of the following passage. Find and correct it:
VI. Read the passage and fill the suitable word in the blank:
My eldest brother, Tuyen is (1).……………….…… engineer in a big company. He lives in a small apartment on (2).……………….…… third floor of a building in Ha Noi. The company is far from his house, so he always goes to work (3).……………….…… bus. He leaves home at seven o’clock to get to work (4).……………….…… 7.45 a.m. It is Saturday morning now, and he is at home, in bed. (5).……………….……Saturdays he often gets up at a quarter to seven in the (6).……………….…….,then he sits in the living room and (7).……………….…… breakfast. On Saturday afternoons, he usually plays tennis or (8).……………….…… swimming with some (9).……………….…… his friends. On Saturday evenings, he doesn’t stay at (10).……………….…… , he usually goes out.
VII. Rearrange the words to make meaningful sentences.
1. stay / grandparents / am / with / this / I / to / my / going / weekend./
-> ………..………………………………………………………………………......................
2. out? / do/ want/ you/ when/ what/ you/ to/ say/ go/
-> ………..………………………………………………………………………......................
3. often/ brother/ his/ listens/ in/ to/ time./ my/music/ free
-> ………..………………………………………………………………………......................
4. I/ to/ to/ every/ city/ buy/ go/ books/ Sunday morning./ the
-> ………..………………………………………………………………………......................
5. good / the / there./ let’s / and / time / mountain / go / have / to / a /
-> ………..………………………………………………………………………......................
VIII. Complete the second sentence, using the word given in brackets so that it has a similar
1. What about singing and dancing? -> Why don’t………………………………………………………….…..?
2. Noone in our school is stronger than me.-> I……..…………………………………..……………….......................
3. What’s your brother’s height?-> How ……………………….…………………………….……………………….?
4. His teacher always drives to work.-> His teacher always goes………………………………………………….
5. Peter is 1.80 meters tall. Linda is 1.70 meters tall-> Linda……………………………….…………..……..………
IX. Write a composition (about 80 words) to tell about your school:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
X. Using the cues to complete the sentences.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………...
3. Many / plants/ animals/ danger/ because /we /destroying /them.
…………………………………….……………………………………………………………
4. There/ peas/ but / not/ potatoes.
→............................................................................................................................................
5.She/ like /dozen/ eggs/ vegetables.
→...........................................................................................................................................
ENGLISH TEST 11
I. Make questions for the underlined words:
1. She is cooking meal in the kitchen.=>………………………………………………………………………………
2. I’d like some milk and vegetables.=>………………………………………………………………………………
3. I am doing my homework.=>………………………………………………………………………………………
4. Nam never flies a kite.=>………………………………………………………………………………………
5. We often go to school by bicycles.=>……………………………………………………………………………
6. Her eyes are brown=>………………………………………………………………………………………
7. My sister is in grade 6.=>………………………………………………………………………………………
8. Mai is tired and hungry=>………………………………………………………………………………………
9. My brother wants a glass of lemon juice.=>…………………………………………………………………………
10. Linh has milk and eggs for her breakfast.=>…………………………………………………………………………
II. Rewrite the sentences with the same meaning:
1. What time does she go to work?=> When……………………………………………………………
2. She likes noodles.=> Her favorite…………………………………………………………..
3. What is the price of these apples?=> How much…………………………………………………………
4. The car is blue.=> It is…………………………………………………………………………
5. It’s often hot in the summer. => It’s never ……………………………………………………………
1.A. these B. thank C. those D. there
2. A. pencils B. rulers C. books D. boards
3. A. classroom B. school C. afternoon D. book
4. A. class B. father C. man D. family
5. A. goes B. nurses C. watches D. boxes
6. A. home B. come C. open D. cold
7. A. opens B. gets C. likes D. speaks
8. A. lunch B. watch C. teacher D. architect
9. A. city B. family C. fifteen D. telephone
10. A. number B. plum C. put D. but
V. Chän vµ khoanh trßn phÇn tr¶ lêi ®óng cho mçi c©u sau.
1.Tom and Peter are classmates and Mary is …………..friend
A. his B. her C. their D. our
2. What’s his brother’s name? …………..Nam.
A. His name B. He’s C. His brother name’s D. She
3. How many ……….are there in the living-room? There’s only one…………
A. couch/ couches B. couches/ couches C. couches/ couch D. couch/ couch
4. What ………..your parents …..after dinner?
A. do / do B. does / do C. do / does D. does / does
5. Are you and Lan students? Yes, ………
A. we are B. they are C. you are D. I am
6. My brother and ………….are at home.
A. Me B. my C. mine D. I
7. …………… are Hoa’s pens.
A. This B.That C.These D. There
8. ……………. is your baby sister? She’s fine.
A. How much B. How C. How old D. How many
9. He …………….to school on Sundays.
A. not goes B. don’t go C. doesn’t go D. no goes
10. Are these couches? No, ………… aren’t.
A. they B. there C. these D. it
ENGLISH TEST 12
I. Chọn 1 từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại.
1. A hats B pens C cats D books
2. A bus B museum C drug D lunch
3. A heavy B leave C head D ready
4. A fly B hungry C usually D early
5. A brother B these C thank D that
6. A door B book C look D cook
7. A read B teacher C near D eat
8. A face B small C grade D late
9. A twice B swim C skip D picnic
10. A arm B charm C farm D warm
II. §iền 1 mạo từ a, an hoặc the vào chỗ trống các câu không cần giói từ thì để nguyên
I’d like (1)…………… dozen eggs, pleased.
Math is my favorite (2)…………… subject.
We live in (3)…………… apartment in town.
I want to travel all over (4)…………… world.
His father sometimes goes to (5)…………… work (6)…………… foot.
Can I have (7)…………… apple?
(8)…………… People don’t like him because he is selfish.
Nam is (9)…………… artist. He has (10)…………… studio.
III. Viết lại câu sao cho nghĩa không đổi
My school has over 25 classrooms.
Miss White’s face is oval. It is small.
Jane goes to school on foot.
What food do you like?.
He gets up at five fifteen.
I brush my teeth after breakfast, lunch and dinner.
What does he do?
Why don’t we go to Dam Sen Park?
The bookstore is to the right of the restaurant
Carol doesn’t live far from her office.
IV. Tìm 10 lỗi sai trong đoạn văn sau
Miss Lien live in a small house on Hanoi. She teaches English at a school there. She usually is breakfast in seven in the morning and she has dinner at twelve o’clock in the canteen of the school. She teaches his students in the morning. She teaches them dialogue on Wednesday to Friday. On Mondays, she teach them grammar. In the evening, she usually stay at home and listens books. She sometimes goes to the movies theater. She always go to bed at ten o’clock.
V. Tìm 1 từ thích hợp điền vào chỗ trống
I have a very close friend. Her name is Nga. She is twelve years old (1) …………… she is in grade six. She (2) …………… speak English. She has English (3) …………… Tuesday and Friday. She can also (4) …………… the piano. In her room, (5) …………… is a piano and some books. Everyday she gets up at six. She (6) …………… breakfast at 6.30 and goes to school at a (7) …………… to seven. She has her (8) …………… from seven o’clock to eleven thirty. Then she (9) …………… home and has lunch at twelve o’clock. It’s three o’clock in the afternoon now. Nga is in her room. She is (10) …………… the piano.
VI. Sắp xếp lại các từ bị sáo trộng thành câu có nghĩa
1. house / a / Minh /lake / lives / in / near / a.
……………………………………………………………………………………………
2. a / plays / badminton / Paul / week / twice.
……………………………………………………………………………………………
3. like / the / weather / fall/ what / is / the / in?
……………………………………………………………………………………………
4. building / tallest / in / this / my city / the / is .
……………………………………………………………………………………………
5. good / the/ there /let’s / and/ time / beach / go / have / to / a.
……………………………………………………………………………………………
6. small / thin / sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has.
…………………………………………………………………………………………….
7. hot / go / when / I/ go swimming / it / is.
…………………………………………………………………………………………….
8. camping / often / do / how / you / go?
…………………………………………………………………………………………….
9. stay / grandparents / vacation / are / with / next / we / to / we / to / our / going / summer.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
10. in / the / Nile River / the / longest / the / is / world.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
VII.S¾p xÕp c¸c tõ x¸o trén thµnh c©u hoµn chØnh.
live / on / in / not / aunt / does / small / Hung Vuong Street / house / a/ my.
…………………………………………………………………………..……………………
these / notebooks / their / new / are ?
…………………………………………………………..……………………………………
there / wall / picture / is / in / a / your / the / on / living-room?
…………………………………………………………………………..……………………
city / it / in / is / house / house / a / the / is / big / Lan’s / and.
……………………………………………………………………………...………………...
years / a / Mrs. Nga/ teacher / and / thirty-two / old / she / is / is.
…………………………………………………………………..……………………………
VIII. T×m lçi sai, gạch ch©n vµ söa l¹i cho ®óng trong c¸c c©u sau.
1.There are two benchs in my room. ……………………
2.Mr Hien isn’t lives in a house in the country. ……………………
3.My mother is fourty years old. ……………………
4. What color are her eyes? It’s blue. ……………………
5.Our classroom is on the three floor. ……………………
6. She often plays football in hers free time. ……………………
7. Hoa house is in the country. ……………………
8. Our school is big. They have four floors. ……………………
9. I go to school every mornings with my friends. ……………………
10. There is a hospital new near our school. ……………………
IX. ChuyÓn sang sè nhiÒu c¸c c©u sau.
1. What’s this ? It’s a bench.…………………………………………………………………………………………..
2. Is that her knife? ……………………………………………………………………………………………..
3. This woman has a child. …………………………………………………………………………………………..
4. The policeman is in his room.………………………………………………………………………………………..
5. Does he has a white tooth? …………………………………………………………………………………….
X. §Æt c©u hái cho phÇn g¹ch ch©n.
1. Mai is not very well today...................................................................................................................................?
2. The man in the car is our new teacher............................................................................................................................?
3. There is a board on the wall...................................................................................................................................?
4. My sister lives on Le Qui Don Street.....................................................................................................................?
5. No. She is a nurse..................................................................................................................................?
6. My brother gets up at a quarter to six............................................................................................................................?
7. Her mother is a teacher..................................................................................................................................?
8. There is a lamp by the telephone.
.................................................................................................................................?
9. Nam goes to school with his friends.
………………………………………………………………………………………………?
10. Tuan does his homework in the evening.
……………………………………………………………………………..……………….?
ENGLISH TEST 13
I. Sö dông tõ gîi ý viÕt thµnh c©u hoµn chØnh.
1. That / your teacher ? No. This / my / teacher.
……………………………………………………………………………………………....
2.There / many books / bookshelf?
……………………………………………………………………………….………………
3. How / your brother? He / one.
………………………………………………………………………………..………………
4.This / not / my pen // It / her pen.
……………………………………………………………………………….……………
5. What / these ? They / ink-pot.
……………………………………………………………………………………………..
6. Minh/ live/ brother/ apartment/ city.
……………………………………………………………………………………………….
7. Mrs. Lan/ and/ children/ travel/ London/ plane.
……………………………………………………………………………………………….
8. Sister/ have/ bike/ and/ cycle/ work/ everyday.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
9. Where / the dogs? They / yard.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
10. brother / homework / dinner / evening?
………………………………………………………………………………………………
II. Dïng tõ gîi ý ë ®Çu c©u viÕt l¹i c¸c c©u sau sao cho nghÜa kh«ng thay ®æi.
How old are your parents? What…………………………………………………………………………………?
How many classroom are there in your family?How many…………………………….…………...?
What are these people?What are ………………………………………………………………………...…...?
Mrs. Xuan has a son, Duc. Mrs Xuan……………………………………………………………………………...
His family has four people.There are ……………………………………………………………………………..
Mr. and Mrs. Minh has a daughter, Lan.Mr. and Mrs. Minh………………………………………………………
My mother goes to work at seven thirty.My mother goes to work………………………………………………
Mai’s books are new.Mai ……………………………………………………………………………………
The lamp is in front of the stereo.The stereo …………………………………………………………………….
III. §äc ®o¹n v¨n sau ræi ®iÒn tõ thÝch hîp vµo chç trèng.
I have a little sister. (1)………….. name is Daisy. She (2)………………. to school six days a week. On (3)………………..days she has lunch (4)……………. school, but (5)………………… weekend she has lunch at home. She often has bread and a glass of milk (6)……………. breakfast. She likes milk very much. She drinks ( 7)………….. for every meal. After dinner, she often listens to music, then she (8)……………… her homework. Sometimes she watches television but she (9)……………like to watch it very much. She goes to (10)……….. at eleven o’clock.
IV.Write a short paragraph (about 80-100 words) about your family
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
ENGLISH TEST 14
I. Choose the word which is pronounced differently from the others.
1. A. clothes B. watches C. benches D. classes
2. A. read B. teacher C. eat D. ahead
3. A. books B. pens C. rulers D. erasers
4. A. kite B. twice C . swim D. pastimes
5. A. full B. tube C. blue D. fruit
6. A. thin B. thick C. thanks D .with
7. A. doors B. dogs C. floors D. maps
8. A. hour B. happy C. high D. hotel
9. A . tenth B. math C. brother D. theater
10. A. intersection B. eraser C. bookstore D. history
II. Choose the best answer.
1.I like ………..because I like to learn about the numbers.
A. literature B. Geography C. History D. Math
2. The hotel is in front of the car park so the car park is ……. the hotel.
A. between B .behind C. next to D.opposite
3. People often play sports at the ………….
A .factory B. movie theater C. stadium D.bakery
4. Why do you like flowers? – Because ………. beautiful.
A. They’re B.It’s C. There’re D. We’re
5. The weather is………… in the deserts.
A. hot B.warm C. cold D. foggy
6. Her…………season is spring.
A. nice B. beautiful C. favourite D. interesting
7. We save the earth by not……… forests.
A.make B. lifting C. cutting D. bringing
8. There isn’t ………in the next room.
A. some one B. no one C. any one D.somebody
9. The football match………… at three o’clock.
A. does B. gives C. watches D. finishes
10. Could I have a………… of matches, please?
A. bar B. can C. box D.bottle
11. Ho Chi Minh city is………… city in Vietnam.
A. the bigger B. biggest C. the biggest D.more big
12. I learn music………………. : on Mondays and Fridays.
A. two times a week B. once aweek
C.one aweek D. twice a week
13. Which month is ……………? May or June.
A. hottest B. hotter C. more hot D. hot than
14. She doesn’t have ………..friends at school.
A. a B. some C. many D. much
15. Why don’t we go camping? ………… a good idea.
A. Let’s B.That’s C. It D. With
16. There are five …………. in one hand.
A. fingers B. arms C. toes D. feet
17. We……….. stop when the light is red.
A. can’t B. can C. mustn’t D. must
18. What is your favourite food?
A. I favourite chicken B. My favourite food chicken
C. Chicken favourite me D. I like chicken best.
19. Linda ……… her hair every day.
A. washes B. wash C. clean D.cleans
20 .How many minutes are there in………… hour?
A. a B. an C. the D. these
21.What are there in this box? ………….. of shoes.
A. a couple B. a pair C. some D . afew
22. It’s hot ………. our country …….. the summer .
A. in/in B. in/on C. in/at D. on/in
23. I often help my mother …….. her housework.
A. of B. with C. for D .from
24. My sister …….. a new language every year.
A. study B. studies C. works D. prepares
25. When it becomes hot, people often feel ……..
A.hungry B. thirsty C. happy D. full
26. The boy looks a little thin ,……….. he’s strong.
A. and B. for C. or D. but
27. Mary and ……… would like to join the English Speaking Clup.
A. me B. my C. mine D. I
28. Please read the dialogue……………
A. aloud B. loud C. loudly D. loudily
29 . I always get up early. I ………. get up late.
A. usually B.often C. never D. sometimes
30. Classes ……… at 7.15 every morning.
A. start B. starts C. is start D. starting
III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in standard English.
1.Ba often does his homeworks in the evening.
A B C D
2. They aren’t go to bed at 9 o’clock.
A B C D
3. I don’t have some apples but I have some bananas.
A B C D
4. That’s my sister over there. She stands next to the window
A B C D
5. He’s waiting to the bus at the moment.
A B C D
6. My father never have lunch at home.
A B C D
7. We need eight hundred gram of beef.
A B C D
8. There is a temple old near our school.
A B C D
9. How long are you going to staying in Vietnam?
A B C D
10. Would you like any sugar? – Yes , please.
A B C D
IV.Choose the best option to complete the passage.
It’s Sunday morning. The Browns are sitting in (1)……… living room. They are talking (2)…….. the dinner this evening. David likes beef and Susan does, too. He says that beef (3)……..good for childen. Their father, Mr. Brown, prefer chicken to beef. He asks his wife to buy (4)…….. for him. Helen, their youngest daughter doesn’t want any meat .She would (5)……….. cakes and sweets. Mrs. Brown doesn’t like beef. She doesn’t like chicken, either. She likes fish, vegetables and fruit. She says that fish and vegetables (6)…………. good for old men and every body (7)………. to eat fruit.
At last they decide to go out (8)…….dinner (9)………..Mrs. Brown says that she can’t cook so(10)…………food for every body in the family.
1.A. the B.a C.an D. to
2. A. with B. for C. about D. to
3.A . are B. has C. does D. is
4. A. little B. some C. any D. none
5. A. like B. likes C.have D. has
6. A. is B. have C.are D. do
7. A. need B. needs C. are D. have
8. A. to B.of C. with D. for
9. A. because B. but C. so D. and
10. A. many B. little C. much D. lots of
ENGLISH TEST 15
I. Chọn từ có cách phát âm khác với các từ còn lại :
1. A. call B. fall C. shall D. wall
2. A. clown B. down C. own D. town
3. A. thank B. that C. this D. those
4. A. books B. pens C. rulers D. bags
5. A. come B. home C. some D. none
II. Chọn câu trả lời đúng nhất
1. We have Geography on Tuesday and on Saturday. We have it …………… a week.
A. once B. twice C. second D. two time
2. Mai and Thao often do aerobic in ……………… free time.
A. your B. her C. his D. their
3. She doesn't like playing badminton. She ……………… plays badminton.
A. always B. usually C. often D. never
4. He wants …………. an engineer.
A. is B. be C. to be D. being
5. I'm tired. I'd like …………….
A. sit down B. sitting down C. to sit down D. to sitting down
6. Do you have any toothpaste? I want a large …………………
A. tin B. box C. bar D. tube
7. What …. the weather like in summer?
A. is B. does C. are D. do
8. It's very hot. Why ………. go swimming?
A. not we B. we not C. don't we D. we don't
9. How ………….. is a kilo of beef?
A. many B. much C. money D. much money
10. ……………………. book is this, yours or mine?
A. What B. Which C. Whose D. Who's
11. Hoa ………………… a lot of friends at her school.
A. has B. have C. to have D. to has
12. I'd like a hot drink. What ………….. you, Uyen?
A. are B. would C. about D. for
13. There are ………… eggs in the supermarket.
A. hundred B. hundred of C. hundreds of D. of hundred
14. …………… is Ba going to stay with?
A. Who B. Where C. What D. Which
15. In Math, Tom is …………….. than Billy.
A. good B. well C. better D. best
16.She often goes to school …………………
A. with bike B. on bike C. by plane D. by bus
17. Who is …………………, Bill Gates or Bill Clinton?
A. rich B. richer C. richest D. poor
18. The police station is ……………… to the bank.
A. next B. near C. besides D. opposite
19. There is …………….. milk in the glass.
A. many B. a lot C. any D. some
20. She has …………….. hair.
A. a black long B. black long C. long black D. long a black
III. Cho dạng đúng của từ viết hoa
1. Is your brother an ……………………… ? ACT
2. Mai's sister is a ………………….…….. . SING
3. I am Vietnamese. What's your ……….…………… NATION
5. These children like ……………….….. weather. SUN
6. How are you today? - I am ……….……………… GOOD
7. She doesn't have many …………..………… in Ha Noi. RELATE
8. There are nineteen ………….………. in my school. CLASS
9. In Tan's ……………….…, there are many high buildings. NEIGHBOR
10. Students like taking part in many ……….……........ at recess. ACTIVITY
IV. Chia động từ
1. There ………………..…. (be) many bookselves in the library.
2. Lan and Mai …………………… (play) games at the moment.
3. ………………..…………... (she / drive) a car? - Yes, she can.
4. Hoa ……………..…….. (not go) to shool on Sundays.
5. You shouldn't ………………….. (get) up late. 6. Don't …………………… (throw) trash in the street.
7. What ……………………….. (she / have) for breakfast everyday?
8. ………………………………. (you / live) in a town?
9. How often …………………….. (you / watch) television?
10. He is not going to read books. He …………………………. (listen) to music.
V. Xác định và sửa lỗi sai
1. I am twelve year old. …………………………
A B C D
2. My school have three floors and twelve classrooms. ………………………….
A B C D
3. What is your classroom? - It is on the third floor. ………………………….
A B C D
4. She often plays sports in afternoon. ………………………….
A B C D
5. There are many tree near her house. ………………………..
A B C D
6. We often reads books in the library. ………………………….
A B C D
7. What does Ngan go to school every day? …………………………..
A B C D
8. My mother is going to the market with my. ……………………….….
A B C D
9. There are some beef on the table. …………………………..
A B C D
10. He plays badminton five time a week. ……………………………
A B C D
VI. Điền một giới từ thích hợp vào mỗi chỗ trống
1. How …………….. eating out tonight, Tom? 2. Lan sometimes goes to school ………………… foot.
3. The film starts ………………… half past seven. 4. They are never late ……………….. school.
5. She is English. She is ……………..….. England.
VII. Điền vào mỗi chỗ trống một từ thích hợp
Salesperson: Can I ……(1)……… you
Customer: Yes. I would like ……(2)…….. meat.
Salesperson: How ……(3)………. do you want?
Customer: A kilo, ……(4)…...
Salesperson: A kilo of meat. Is there ……(5)……. else?
Customer: Yes. I'd ……(6)……….. some banans.
Salesperson: How ……(7)…….. do you want?
Customer: Five. And I want to buy half a ……(8)…..of sugar.
Salesperson: ……(9)…… you are.
Customer: Thank you.
Salesperson: Thank you. See ……(10)… again.
VIII. Chọn từ thích hợp nhất để điền vào chỗ trống
Jim Green ……(0)…… a student in a secondary chool. He …(1)… classes from Monday to Friday. He has many …(2).. to do after class in the afternoon. On Monday and Wednesday, he helps his ..(3)... with their English. On Tuesday and Thursday, he takes part in the Informatics Club. On Friday, he …(4)……basketball. He goes to the park or museum …(5)…. his parents and his sister ……(6)……Saturday. On Sunday, he has a good rest …(7)….. home and …….(8)…. his homework.
Now, it is 8:30 in the morning, Jim ………(9)……… in the classroom and having a Math class. He is listening to the teacher carefully. His friends David and Tony are looking at the blackboard. Lucy and Lily are thinking. Mary is writing something in her notebook. All of them ……(10)….. working hard.
IX. Đọc đoạn văn, trả lời câu hỏi
Anna lives in a village in Africa. Her day start at 4 o'clock. She gets up and she walks three kilometers to the river. She collects some water and carries it back to her house. The water is very heavy. It isn't clean but there isn't any water in her village. Anna doesn't go to school. She can't read or write. She helps her mother in the house.
1. Where does Anna live?………………………………………..
2. What does she do after she gets up?………………………………………
3. What does she collect?…………………………….……….
4. Is the water clean?……………………………………
5. Can she write?……………………………………
X. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân trong các câu sau
1. I am fine, thank you.………………………………………………………………………………
2. They are black.………………………………………………………………………………
3. She is in the school yard.………………………………………………………………………………
4. I play soccer every afternoon.………………………………………………………………………………
5. They are doing their homework.……………………………………………………………………………
XI. Viết câu dùng từ gợi ý
1. I/ not want/ eat anything/ because/ not hungry………………………………………………………………
2. How much / beef / you / want? ………………………………………………………………………
3. Thuy / her friends / skip rope / now /………………………………………………………………………
4. Phong / go fishing / three times / week ……………………………………………………………………
5. There / be / a garden / behind / school /…………………………………………………………………
ENGLISH TEST 16
I.Rewrite each of the following sentences in such a way that it means exactly the same as the sentence
1. Ha’school bag is new and big.à Ha has ……………………………………..
3. Phuong has a sister, Lan.à Phuong………………………………..
4. No house on the street is bigger than this house.à This house……………………………………
5. How many apples does she want?à How many apples would…………………………..?
II. Make the question for the answer below.
3. ………………………………………………….…………………………..
There is some orange juice to drink after breakfast?
4………………………………………………..………………………………
Peter and Mary are both Canadian .
5. ………………………………………………………………………………
Her father is an achitect.
III. Using the cues to complete the sentences.
…………………………………….…………………………………………………………….…..
4.Ba / usually / play tennis / fall/ but/ sometimes/ sailing.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………….…
5.Mrs. Ngoc/ going/ buy/ some toys/ children?………………………………………………………………………
IV. Write a paragraph about 80-100 words about your daily activities.
Every morning, I get up ..............................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
V. Em hãy đọc đoạn hội thoại sau rồi trả chọn câu trả lời thích hợp A,B, C hoặc D cho câu hỏi bên
David: How do you like living in the big city?
Maria: There are many things that are better than living in the country!
David: Can you give me some examples?
Maria: Well, it certainly is more interesting than the country. There is so much more to do
and see!
David: Yes, but the city is more dangerous than the country.
Maria: That’s true. People in the city aren’t as open as those in the countryside.
David: I’m sure that the country is more relaxed, too.
Maria: Yes, the city is busier than the country. However, the country is much slower than
the city.
David: I think that’s a good thing!
Maria: Oh, I don’t. The country is so slow and boring! It’s much more boring than the city.
David: How about the cost of living? Is the country cheaper than the city?
Maria: Oh, yes. The city is more expensive than the country.
David: Life in the country is also much healthier than in the city.
Maria: Yes, it’s cleaner and less dangerous in the country. But, the city is so much more
exciting. It’s faster, crazier and more fun than the country.
David: I think YOU are crazy for moving to the city.
Maria: Well, I’m young now. Maybe when I’m married and have children I’ll move back to
the country.
Questions
1. Maria thinks life in the city is __________ life in the countryside.
A. cheaper than B. as cheap as C. more expensive than D. as expensive as
2. David says that the countryside is __________ the city.
A. less dangerous than B. more dangerous than C. as dangerous as D. as safe as
3. Maria says __________ when she is married and has children.
A. she will move to the city B. she will buy a house in the country
C. might leave the countryside D. she might move back to the country
4. According to the conversation, which of the following statements is TRUE?
A. The city is quieter than the country. B. The country is healthier than the city.
C. Maria thinks the country is more fun than the city. D. The country is more exciting than the city.
5. According to the conversation, which of the following statements is NOT TRUE?
A. The people in the countryside aren’t as open as the people in the city.
B. David thinks Maria is crazy for leaving the country.
C. Life in the country isn’t as hectic as life in the city. D. the country is slower than the city.
VI: Chän tõ mµ phÇn g¹ch ch©n cã c¸ch ph¸t ©m kh¸c víi c¸c tõ cßn l¹i
A. want B. basketball C. family D. camp 1. ………………...
A. foodstall B. bookshelf C. foot D. noodles 2. ………………...
A. who B. which C. what D. when 3. ………………...
A. brother B. mother C. thank D. weather 4. ………………...
A. engineer B. geography C. gymnast D. garden 5. ………………...
A. desks B. seasons C. lamps D. eats 6. ………………...
A. lemonade B. stereo C. hotel D. television 7. ………………...
A. coffee B. volleyball C. chocolate D. opposite 8. ………………...
A. round B. couch C. routine D. housework 9. ………………...
A. station B. question C. intersection D. destination 10. ……………...
VII: Chän ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®Ó hoµn thµnh c¸c c©u sau.
I like playing badminton very much. I ………………… play badminton in my free time.
A. want B. don’t C. never D. always
There are ………………… syllables in the word “supermarket”.
A. two B. three C. four D. five
Do you live in the country or in the city? ~ ………………….
A. Yes, I do B. I live in the city C. No, I don’t D. I live on the city
What would you like ………………… dinner?
A. for B. to C. in D. at
What’s the ………………… like in the summer? ~ It is usually hot.
A. food B. sea C. weather D. neighborhood
……………………………………? ~ We play badminton and swim.
A. What sports do you and your brother like? B. Which sports do you and your brother play?
C. When do you and your brother play sports? D. What are you and your brother doing?
How many ………………… do you want? ~ A dozen.
A. noodles B. cooking oil C. carrot D. eggs
Does Mrs. Vui ………………… to buy any tomatoes?
A. want B. wanting C. wants D. to want
………………… are these pens and pencils? ~ They are 25, 000 dong.
A. How old B. How C. How much D. How often
……………………………………? ~ Black. And it’s very long.
A. What color are her lips B. What color is her hair
C. What color are her teeth D. What color are her hair
VIII: Chia d¹ng ®óng cña ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc
My brother (21 – do) ………………… his homework in his room at present. He always (22 – do) ………………… it in the evening.
What (23 – be) ………………… there (24 – drink) ………………… for dinner?
Nam usually (25 – not play) ……………… sports, but sometimes, he (26 – fly) ………………… the kites.
What you (27 – do) ………………… this summer holiday? ~ We (28 – visit) ………………… President Ho Chi Minh’s Mausoleum.
Let’s (29 – help) ………………… Mom, Lan. You mustn’t (30 – eat) ………………… food in the classroom.
IX: §iÒn giíi tõ thÝch hîp vµo chç trèng nÕu cÇn. NÕu kh«ng cÇn th× ®iÒn q
I live (31) ………………… a small house (32) ………………… the countryside.
My house is (33) ………………… a bookstore and a toystore: the bookstore to the left and the toystore to the right.
Miss Mai wants a kilo ………………… (34) meat and a dozen (35) ………………… eggs.
Nga goes (36) ………………… school (37) ………………… foot every morning and she goes (38) ………………… home (39) ………………… four thirty in the afternoon.
Who do you usually play badminton (40) …………………?
X: Cho d¹ng ®óng cña tõ in hoa ®Ó hoµn thµnh c©u.
I’d like some bread. Let’s go to the (41) ………………… BAKE
My mother and my sister are (42) ………………. My mother (43) ………………
English at a primary school near my house. TEACH
Thai Binh has a lot of (45) …………… beaches as: Con Vanh, Diem Dien, … etc BEAUTY
You must be (46) ………………… when you cross the busy streets. CARE
My school library is on the (47) …………… floor. I go there (48) …………… a week. TWO
Why are you (49) ………………… late for school? USUAL
There are many (50) ………………… in the summer. ACT
XI: §iÒn “a / an / the / some / any” vµo chç trèng nÕu cÇn. NÕu kh«ng cÇn th× ®iÒn q
I am going to (51) ………………… supermarket. I want to buy half (52) ………………… kilo of beef.
There’s (53) ………………… orange and (54) ………………… apple pie on the kitchen table.
Are you hungry? Would you like (55) ………………… bread? ~ No, thanks. I’m not hungry. I don’t want (56) ………………… bread.
I like learning English best. It is my (57) ………………… favorite subject at school.
Are there (58) ………………… trees in front of your house? ~ Yes. And there are (59) ………………… flowers, too.
My sister usually goes to school at (60) ………………… quarter to seven. She is never late for school.
ENGLISH TEST 17
I: T×m vµ söa lçi sai trong mçi c©u sau.
1. My father doesn’t like coffee. He doesn’t never drink it.
Ba gets up at 6 o’clock and gets dressing.
Would you like some noodles? ~ Yes, I wouldn’t. I’m not hungry but I’m thirsty. I’d like a cold drink.
What are you doing when it’s cold?
Where is your classroom? ~ It’s on the nineth floor.
How do you say the word “businessman”? ~ B – U – S – I – N – E – S – S – M – A – N.
After getting up in the morning, Hoa washes her face, brushes her tooth and then has breakfast.
How many homework does Ba have every day? ~ He has a lot of homework.
How often does Mr. Ba go to Ha Noi? ~ Seldom, one a year.
Are you and Hoa in grade 6? ~ Yes. We are at class 6A.
II: T×m mét tõ thÝch hîp ®iÒn vµo mçi chç trèng trong ®o¹n v¨n sau
I get up at six o’clock every day. I brush my teeth, wash my face, (1) ………………… a shower and then have breakfast. My breakfast has bread, cheese, beefsteak (2) ………………… some milk. After morning classes, I have (3) ………………… with noodles, an apple and a glass of orange (4) …………………. In the afternoon, I have more three classes. I go home at five o’clock after playing sports with my school friends. I like (5) ………………… badminton very much. We also (6) ………………… aerobics three times a week. I have dinner (7) ………………… my family at half (8) ………………… six. Then I do my homework. Sometimes, I watch television or listen to music or play video (9) ………………… after finishing homework. I usually go to bed at ten o’clock. I never (10)………………… up too late at night.
III. Chän tõ cã phÇn g¹ch ch©n in nghiªng ph¸t ©m kh¸c:
board factory short floor
winter hospital business building
ahead breakfast great heavy
produce pollute collect volleyball
teachers thanks pupils farmers
flow throw yellow plow
look school book room
clothes oranges watches glasses
hour house help home
fall cat plan scrap
IV. Chän tõ hoÆc côm tõ trong ngoÆc thÝch hîp víi chç trèng trong c©u:
I’m going to the ________ now. I want to buy some bread(post office / drugstore / bakery / toys tore)
It is twenty–five past ________. (fifty / a quarter / four o’clock / eleven)
She doesn’t have ________ friends at school. (a / some / many/ much)
There is ________ rain in our country. (a lot / many / a few / a lot of)
My sister ________ and play volleyball. (can swims / cans swim / can swim / swim)
Mexico City has a population ________ 13.6 million. (of / on / in / to)
He wants _________ an engineer. (to be / being / be / is)
They would like some milk ________ dinner. (in / at / for / of)
It’s also ________ cleaner and nicer. (more / much / many / most)
Wai Man is from ______ . He speaks _______ .
(Chinese-China / China-Chinese / Chineses- China / Chinas-Chinese)
________ the three books, the green one is mine. (In / On / Of / To)
There are ________ syllables in the word “supermarket”. (two / three / four / five)
~ Do you live in the country or in the city?
~ ________ (Yes, I do / I live in the city / No, I don’t / I live on the city)
Look ________ that man. He is looking ________ Hoa, but she isn’t there. (for-at / at-for / at-at / in-for)
A glass of ________ , please. I never drink alcohol. (orange juice / whisky / larger / beer)
I hope the _________ can repair our car quickly. ( mechanic / reporter / architect / dentist)
What part of the country are you ________ ? (to / by / of / from)
Minh is the ________ student of the two boys (better / best / good / well)
Where is Lan? – She is down ________ the river. (in / next / by / on)
She’s doing ________ in the garden, just walking about. (anything / nothing / everything / something)
V. ViÕt d¹ng thÝch hîp cña ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc:
Look! The plane is flying towards the airport. It (land).
Your father (go) to work by bike every day?
My sister always wears nice clothes for work. Today she (wear) a blue jacket and shirt.
What you (do) this summer holiday? 5. We shouldn’t (throw) trash on the street.
(Not ask) him to lend. He doesn’t have any money 7. It usually (rain) a lot in June?
Lan with her mother (go) to the market at the moment.
There (be) a vase of flowers in the sitting room?
It’s a pity that she (not understand) what I am saying at the moment.
VI. Chän a; an; any; some thÝch hîp víi chç trèng trong mçi c©u:
I would like ______ dozen eggs. 2. They are planting ______ trees in the garden.
There aren’t _______ pictures in the album. 4. Would you like______ coffee?
There is _______ orange in the box. 6. Do you have _______ brothers or sisters?
There is ______ milk in the bottle. 8. Mrs. Brown doesn’t have _______ children
VII. S¾p xÕp c¸c tõ, côm tõ thµnh c©u cã nghÜa:
classroom/ desks / it/ is/ Mai’s/ has/ on/ floor/ fifth/ the/ twenty/and.
does/ your/ every/ what/ sister/ afternoon/ play?
you/ me/ to/ with/ would/ like/ shopping/ the/ help?
Mekong River/ starts/ the/ Tibet/ in/ flows/ into/ the/ Bien Dong/ and.
spring/ weather/ the/ in/ the/ warm/ is/ usually.
you/ going to/ what/ do/ summer/ this/ vacation/ are?
like/ I/ wouldn’t/ because/ bread/ not/ I’m/ hungry.
Mr./ Mrs. Thu/ travel/ work/ bus/ to/ and/ by/ every day/
VIII. Trong mçi c©u sau cã mét lçi sai. T×m vµ söa l¹i cho ®óng:
The fall is cool than the summer
How many homework does Ba have every day? He has a lot of homework
A lot of my friends play tennis but not much of them play soccer
My friend sometimes go sailing in the fall
How many childs are there in the room?
He brushes his teeth, takes a shower and gets dressing.
We are pollute the land, the rivers and the oceans.
Lam is a gymnast and she is not week.
IX. ViÕt d¹ng ®óng cña tõ in hoa ®Ó hoµn thµnh c©u:
Has your sister got a _____ ? She looks tired HEAD
This is my favorite chair. It’s so _____ COMFORT
Nobody in my class is _____ than Thuy GOOD
This tree has a lot of green _____ . LEAF
There are many _____ in the summer. ACT
Mr. Minh is always _____. BUSINESS
My friend is a great _____ MUSIC
His ambition is to be a ____ one day. MILLION
X. Dïng tõ gîi ý viÕt l¹i c©u sao cho nghÜa cña c©u kh«ng ®æi so víi c©u ®· cho:
What is the width of the Great Wall? àHow_______________________
It’s very cold. He can’t swim. àIt’s too_____________________
Tuan is the tallest boy in my class. àNo body ____________________
Farmers need more land, so they burn forests. àFarmer burn forests ___________
My sister cycles to the supermarket every day àMy sister goes _______________
Is there a garden in your school? à Does your __________________?
Mr. Minh has a son, Nam àMr. Minh is _________________
This house is small. àIt is ________________________
XI. Dùa vµo tõ gîi ý, viÕt c©u hái vµ c©u tr¶ lêi theo néi dung ®o¹n v¨n:
Mr. Hung is a farmer. He has some paddy fields and he produces a lot of rice. Near his house, he has a small field and he grows a few vegetables. He also has a few fruit trees. They produce a little fruit.
Mr. Hung has some animals. He has two buffalo. They plow the paddy fields and pull a cart. He has a few cows. They produce a little milk. He has some chickens. They produce a lot of eggs. He also has a dog and two cats.
81. What / Mr. Hung / do? 82. .....................................................
83. How / rice / Mr. Hung / produce? 84. .....................................................
85. How / kinds / animals / Mr. Hung / have? 86. .....................................................
87. His cows / plow / paddy fields / pull / a cart? 88. .....................................................
89. Where / his vegetable field? 90. .....................................................
ENGLISH TEST 18
I. T×m tõ thÝch hîp víi mçi chç trèng ®Ó hoµn thµnh ®o¹n v¨n sau:
John likes fishing. He ......(1)...... in the river near our house. ......(2)...... Sunday afternoon, when he ......(3)...... no work, he goes down to the river with a ......(4)...... of water and some sandwiches and fishes ......( 5)...... it is quite dark. There are always a few ......(6)...... people there. They love fishing, ......(7)...... , and they all sit there quietly for hours. ......(8)...... they catch some ......(9)......, sometimes they do not. I do not like that kind of sport ......(10)...... I am not very patient.
II: §äc ®o¹n v¨n vµ chän ®¸p ¸n ®óng cho mçi th«ng tin ë díi
Joanna lives in Oxford in England. She is tall and thin with brown hair and blue eyes. She is 11 years old and her birthday is on June 22nd. She loves swimming very much. In the summer, she goes swimming every afternoon. She sometimes plays tennis, but not always. In the winter, she likes watching television at home. She doesn’t want to go out in the cold weather.
Where does Joanna live?
A. In Oxford. B. In England. C. A & B are correct. D. A & B are incorrect.
What color is her hair?
A. Brown. B. Blue. C. Brown and blue. D. No information.
What is her favorite sport in the summer?
A. Playing tennis. B. Swimming. C. A & B D. Doing aerobics.
How old is she?
A. June 22nd. B. Eleventh C. June. D. Eleven.
Which of the following is NOT true?
A. Joanna doesn’t like going out when it’s cold. B. Joanna is tall and heavy.
C. Joanna enjoys going swimming when it is hot. D. Joanna’s hair is brown and her eyes are blue.
III. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với những từ còn lại.
IV. Chọn đáp án đúng nhất
1. She ………………. to the radio in the morning.
2. ………………. do you work? - I work at a school.
3. I’m going to the ……………….. now. I want to buy some bread.
4. Are there ................... stores on your street?
5. She doesn’t have ……………….. friends at school.
6. ………………… long or short?
7. ………………. you like a drink?
8. I need a large ………….. of toothpaste.
9. What about …………….. to Hue on Sunday?
10. My school …… three floors and my classroom is on the first floor.
11. There is ……soda in the can.
12. Hoa and I …............funny stories.
13. How….............kilos of meat do you want?
14. She wants …...........an English teacher.
15. John likes sports very much. He usually plays …...........after school.
16. I…..........in the morning.
17…….......does she go jogging? Once a week.
18. We have English on Tuesday and Saturday. We have it ................... a week.
19. They would like some milk .............................. dinner.
20. I’m tired. I’d like ................................... .
V. Choose the word having the underlined letters pronounced differently from the others.
VI. Choose the word or phrase of words which best completes each of the following sentences.
1. I live in the country. There is a rice paddy near…………….. house.
A. behind B. left C. in front D. right
3. It's seven thirty and Minh is late…………….. school.
A. to B. at C. for D. in
4. What do they often do when …………………. cold?
A. there’s B. it’s C. its D. they’re
5. Fall means_________ in British - English.
A. summer B. winter C. autumn D. spring
6. Nam ________ to school everyday.
A. go B. going C. goes D. went
7. How does he go to school? - > On ________
A. bus B. foot C. bike D. walk
8. Look! That boy ___________trash on the street.
A. leave B. leaves C.is leaving D. is going to leave
9. He's from Canada. He _______English.
A. speak B. speaks C. is speaking D. is going to speak
10. ______going to the museum?
A. Let's B. Why don't C. What about D. Do you want
VII. Find and correct the mistakes.
ENGLISH TEST 19
I. Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others
1. A. fall B. small C. wash D. want
2. A. blue B. tube C. full D. fruit
3. A. bread B. teacher C. eat D. read
4. A. rulers B. pens C stamps D. tables
5. A. benches B. dishes. C. clothes D. classes . 6. A. station B .nose C. eraser D. intersection
7. A. chicken B. children C. lunch D. school.
8. A. they B. thin C. with D. then
9. A. money B. some C. brother D. movie
10. A. skip B. swim C. minibus D. fried
II. Choose the word or phrase which best completes each sentence.
1. How about…………..a cup of tea?
A. drink B. drinking C. you drink D. do you
2.His ………..sport is soccer.
A. nice B. beautiful C. favorite D. interesting
3.……..your school ? – Yes, It is very beautiful.
A. Do you want B. Do you like C. Would you like D. How is
My father ……. …….to work by car.
A. goes often B. often goes C. go often D. is often
Nam wants ……..a doctor.
A. becoming B. become C. to become D. becomes
6. We have English on Monday and Friday. We have it ……………………a week.
A. twice B. two times C. once D. every
How ……….children do you have ?
A. long B. much C. many D. about
There isn’t …….. on your street?
A. no one B. many people C. anyone D. some one
- ……..do you go to school? – I go there on foot.
A. How B. By what C. How many D. How by
How many minutes are there in…………..hour?
A. an B. a C. these D. the
III Each sentence has a mistake. Find and correct it.
1. We play games often after school. ………………………………………………….
2. Let’s us go to the zoo tonight. ………………………………………………
3.What are the weather like in winter?………………………………………………..
4. It is often cold in the summer? ……………………………………………….
5.My brother never goes swiming.…………………………………………
6. Minh is going to the market with I ?………………………………………………
7.I often do my homeworks at night.…………………………………………………………..
8. Are they many students in your school?………………………………………………………………..
9. I need five hundreds grams of beef…………………………………………………………………………….
10. My father is a farmer. He works in a farm.…………………………………………………………………
IV. Give the correct forms of the verbs in brackets to complete the sentences below.
1. He usually (drive ) ……… his car to work, but he ( not, drive ) ………….. at the moment .
2. Where is your mom?- She( be) … . in kitchen. She (cook) … …. …….. dinner.
3. My close friend ( visit ) … …………………………..me next week.
4. Her children (ride) ………………… their bikes to school now.
5. Oh, no! It (rain) ................... We can’t go out . It always (rain) ............. a lot in summer.
6. - What ………your son usally (do ) ................in his free time?
- He usually (play) .................. volleyball and (watch ) ................. T.V.
7. - What ………...you ( do ) ……………………..at present? I(write)............. …………a letter to my grandparents in Vinh city.
8. He (not ,go)......................... to school on Sundays. 9. Look! Our teacher (arrive).................................here.
10. What (be) ………..there (eat ) ............................for dinner?
11. What … …..your mother (do) … ……….? - She (be) …….. a teacher.
12. We mustn’t ( go )………………………….straight when the traffic light is red.
V. Read the text and choose the best answer to complete each sentences below.
Americans usually (1) ______ up very early. They have breakfast between six (2)______ nine. They usually have bread or a (3)______ and a cup of tea or coffee for breakfast. Most people eat a quick (4)______ at twelve or twelve thirty. The big meal of the day (5)______ usually dinner. This is usually between (6)______ and seven o’clock in the evening. They usually have (7)______ , fish, vegetables and fruit for dinner. They often (8)_______ beer or wine, too.
1. A. have B. get C. eat D. sleep
2. A. at B. between C. to D. and
3. A. sandwiches B. sandwich C. rice D. orange
4. A. dinner B. lunch C. supper D. breakfast
5. A. is B. does C. are D. going
6. A. seven thirty B. nine C. eight D. six
7. A. meat B. dinner C. oil D. soap
8. A. cook B. drink C. buy D. eat
VI. Read the following passage and answer the questions
Marry is 21. She has fair hair and blue eyes. She has two brothers, William and Phillip but she doesn’t have any sisters. Her brothers have brown hair and brown eyes. One of her brother, Phillip, is married and has two children, so she is an aunt. Marry lives with her parents in an apartment, it has five rooms but it doesn’t have a garden. She has her own room in the apartment. In it she has a computer and a TV. She has a car but her parents don’t have one because they can’t drive.
VII. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning.
1. How old is she? What ……………………………………………………………………………...?
2. The bookstore is to the right of the toy store.The toy store is……………………………………........................?
3. How much is a bowl of noodles? How much does……………………………………………………………..?
4. Orange juice is her favorite drink. She ………………………………………………………………………
5. Is there a garden in your school?Does your …….……..………………………………………………………...?
6. Why don’t we help these old women? What about ………………………………………………………………
7. The girl is very beautiful.She is …………………………………………………..................
8. My sister often walks to school. My sister often ………………………………………………………………….
9. I want a bowl of noodles.I’d …………………………………………………………………….
10. That pencil belongs to Hoa.-> That’s……………………………
VIII. Give the correct form of the words in capital in brackets.
IX. Read the passage the choose the word or phrase the best fits each space
I don’t usually eat breakfast. I only have _______(1) of coffee. I don’t eat _______ (2) until about eleven o’clock. Then I have a biscuit and a glass of _______ (3) . For lunch I usually have a salad. That’s _______ (4) about two o’clock. I have _______(5) at half pass six in the afternoon. I’m a vegetarian, so I don’t eat _______(6) or fish. I eat cheese and eggs and things like that. I have a glass of water or fruit _______(7) with my meals.
At the weekends, I go to a _______(8) in the evenings. You can_______(9) vegetarian meals in a _______(10) restaurants now.
X. Read the passage and answer the questions.
There are four seasons in a year.They are spring, summer, fall and winter. In the spring, the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold but not very cold.There are many flowers in the spring. In the summer , the day is long and the night is short. People often go swimming in this season. The fall is the season of fruits. In the winter, it’s usually very cold The day is short and the night is long.
Answers:
It’s six o’clock in the evening. Many people are at home. They are having dinner. They are watching T.V. They are listening to music. But Mrs Lan is going to work. She’s a doctor and she works at night in the hospital. Today she’s late. The hospital is not in her neighborhood so she usually goes by car. Mrs Lan is in her car now. She’s driving fast. She should slow down but she must be at work by six thirty. A policeman stops her. “You are driving too fast!” he says. "You are going to have an accident". It’s six thirty. Mrs Lan is not at the hospital. She’s at the police station. Her car must stay there for fourteen days.
ENGLISH TEST 20
Bài I. Tìm từ mà phần gạch chân có cách phát âm khác với những từ còn lại
1. A. part B. take C. date D. favor
2. A. beds B. doors C. plays D. students
3. A. chorus B. school C. architect D. chair
4. A. thick B. thank C. though D. think
5. A. expect B. expand C. exam D. exercise
6. A. bought B. daughter C. cough D. sight
7. A. sure B. soup C. season D. small
8. A. switch B. stomach C. match D. catch
9. A. but B. bury C. nut D. young
10. A. study B. ready C. copy D. occupy
Bài II. Chọn đáp án thích hợp nhất trong ngoặc để hoàn thành câu
11. …… is your favorite place?
A. What B. When C. Where D. How
12. There are …… accidents on the roads nowadays.
A. many B. much C. a lot D. a little
13. This is a secret. You......... anyone
A. mustn’t be B. mustn’t tell C. mustn’t say D. speak
14. The roard signs are very ........... They tell us what we must do.
A. useful B. dangerous C. easy D. difficult
15. Throw the papers in the waste......... I don’t need them anymore
A. bag B. box C. basket D. 0
16. Let’s play a ........ now.
A. guitar B. games C. sports D. game
17. There ............ of stars in the sky.
A. is million B. are million C. are millions D. has millions
18. My girlfriend is a ..........
A. gymnastic B. gymnasium C. gymnasts D. gymnast
19. My son is really afraid ......... dogs.
A. for B. of C. with D. at
20. They want ........ to many different places in the country
A. travel B. traveling C. to travel D. traveled
Bài III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành đoạn văn sau
I am a student at Tran Phu school. I (21- be) in grade 6 now. But after vacation this summer I (22- be) in grade 7. Everyday I (23- go) to school and (24- do) the homework but today it’s Saturday. Tomorrow, I (25- not go) to school so I (26- not do) my homework now. I (27- watch) television. My father (28- say) “We (29- visit) our grandfather tomorrow”. I (30- love) my grandfather a lot and he (31- do). Tomorrow we (32- have) lunch with our grandfather.
Bài IV. Sử dụng từ gợi ý trong ngoặc viết lại những câu sau sao cho nghĩa của câu không đổi
33. Mrs Thu would like six oranges (DOZEN)
34. She needs half a kilo of beef. (GRAMS)
35. How much does an ice-cream cost? (IS)
36. No sudent in the class is taller than John. (TALLEST)
37. What about going fishing this Saturday? (DON'T)
38. Mr. and Mrs. Pike have daughter, Mary. (PARENTS)
39. They are flying to Ho Chi Minh City now. (TRAVELING)
40. There are about one thousand students in our school. (HAS)
41. My sister has a round face (IS)
42. Trang gets up at five forty-five every morning. (A QUARTER)
Bài V. Có một lỗi sai trong 4 phần được gạch chân ở mỗi câu tìm và chữa lại cho đúng
43. We live on a nice and clean house in the country.
A B C D
44. Hoa’s school have got twenty classrooms.
A B C D
45. It is very dangerously to drive too fast.
A B C D
46. Can you go to the store to buy some fruit to me?
A B C D
47. I would like buying a packet of tea and a tube of toothpaste.
A B C D
48. My classmates always have a picnic two a year.
A B C D
49. Mary is traveling by bus and visit a lot of intersting places.
A B C D
50. I think no city in the world are more beautiful than Paris.
A B C D
51. What is your sister do when it is cold?
A B C D
52. How long are you go to stay with your aunt and uncle?
A B C D
Bài VI. Dùng từ gợi ý viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh có nghĩa
53. My son / never/ dentist/ so / his/ teeth/ bad
………………………………………………………………………
54.They/ visit/ Yen Tu Pogoda/ way to Ha Noi/ next week.
………………………………………………………………………………
55. I/ do /homework/ moment/ so/ can not/ go/ you.
……………………………………………………………………………
56. John/ not/ have/ blue eyes/ but/ color/ eyes/ black.
………………………………………………………………………………
57. Mary/ always/ cycle/ school/ and/ never/ late.
……………………………………………………………………………
58. Peter/ from/ Great Britain/ and/ speak/ English.
……………………………………………………………………
59. There/ much/ noise/ many/ vehicles/ city.
………………………………………………………………………
60. It / too/ far/ us/ go/ Hai Phong/ bike.
…………………………………………………………………
61.When/ not/ need/ light/ you/ switch.
……………………………………………………………………………
62. Mark/ watch/ television/ or/ listen/ music/ after/ school?
……………………………………………………………………………………
Bài VII. Đặt câu hỏi cho từ được gạch chân ở những câu sau
63. We shouldn't walk because it is too far. -> ……………………………
64. They are going to stay there for a week. -> ……………………………………
65. Peter has three meals a day. -> ……………………………………
66. My mother is going to visit her friend this Sunday.…………………………………………………………………
67. His teacher is very young and nice. ->…………………………………….
68. We smell the noodles at the store. -> …………………………………
69. Her roommates are from Mexico. ->…………………………………………
70. No. She doesn't have Literature on Monday. ->……………………………….
71. My father goes jogging three times a week. ->……………………………………………………………...
72. My brother is 170 cm tall. ->………………………………………………………………
Bµi VIII. §äc kü ®o¹n v¨n sau và chän mét ®¸p ¸n ®óng trong sè A, B, C hoÆc D
I live in a house near the sea. It is ...(73)... old house, about 100 years old and...(74)... very small. There are two bed rooms upstairs...(75)... no bathroom. The bathroom is downstairs ...(76)... the kitchen and there is a living room where there is a lovely old fire place. There is a garden...(77)... the house. The garden...(78)... down to the beach and in spring and summer...(79)... flowers every where. I like alone...(80)... my dog, Rack, but we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with ...(81)...
I love my house for... (82)... reasons the garden, the flowers in summer, the fee in winter, but the best thing is the view from my bedroom window.
BÀI IX. Write a short paragraph (about 100 words ) about Mr Long, using cue words
I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it has the similar meaning to the first.
1. This school is big and modern. -> It …………………
2. She goes to school on foot.-> She…………………………..
3. There are four rooms in my house.-> My house …………………………..
4. I go to school at six thirty -> I go to school ……………………….
5. She likes noodles.-> Her favorite …………………………….
6. The movie theater is in front of the hotel.-> The hotel ……………………………….
2/ Write a paragraph about Jane using the given cues.
Jane / gymnast . She/ pretty. She/ tall /thin. She /light /but she / not/week. She /oval /lovely face. She /long /black /hair /brown eyes. She/ small mouth. Her teeth /small / white . Everyone /love her because she/ always help/ others.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc
Oh, no! It (rain) ................... We can’t play tennis at the moment.
What your son (have) ................ for breakfast? They (drink) ............. some orange juice now.
She can (speak)............. English. He (eat) ............... a lot of meat?
My mother (give)......... me a new bike next week.
He (not go)................. often to the movies on Sunday nights.
Where Mai (be) ........... now?. Look! She (come)..................
What is there (drink) ............for dinner?
IV. Cho dạng đúng của từ trong ngoặc
V. Tìm Một từ điền vào mỗi chỗ trống để hoàn thành đoạn văn sau.
There are (1)................. seasons in North of Vietnam. I like the spring and (2) ............ most. In the spring, it is warm and there are many kinds of (3) .............. blowing. I live in the countryside so the air is very fresh in the spring. The view looks like a beautiful picture. In the summer, it is very (4)............. My friends and I usually (5)............... swimming and (6) ................. our kites. Sometimes we (7) ............... fishing. I don't like the (8) .................. because the (9).................... is very cold and there is a lot of cold wind. I like living in the (10)......................
VI. Mỗi câu sau đây có một lỗi, hãy tìm và sửa cho đúng
VII. Viết lại các câu sau sao cho ý nghĩa không đổi bắt đầu với từ đã cho:
1. The bookstore is to the left of his house. His house ……………………………………………………….
2. The building is tall. It’s .....…………………………………................................………………….
3. How much meat do you want?How much meat would …………………………...…………………….....
4. This box has twenty packets of tea. There ………………………………………..………………………..
5. What is the price of the flowers?How …………………………………………..…………………………
6. Mr. Kien has a daughter. Her name is Lan. Mr. Kien is ..................................... ...............................………
7. Does your school have over eight hundred students?Are……………………....………………………..
8. My house is behind the hotel. The hotel …………………................................………….…………
9. We usually ride to school.We usually go........................................................................................................
10. She likes orange juice best.Her favorite ......................................................................................................
QuestionI:Chọn và khoanh tròn từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác so với các từ cùng hàng
6. A. through B. author C. clothes D. thumb
7. A. middle B. mile C.kind D.time
8. A.school B.scout C. sew D. sure
9. A. everything B.tooth C. theater D., they
10. A. marbles B. classes C. teaches D.changes.
Question III. Chọn đáp án đúng nhất
1. ______ trash over there.
A. Don’t throw B. Not throw C. Throw D. Can’t throw
2. There is _____ oil in the bottle. We should buy some more.
A. little B. a little C. few D. a few
3. ______ fruit does your father produce?
A. How much B. How many C. How long D. How often
4. What would you like to do at the weekend?
A. I like to do a lot B. I can’t do it C. I’d like to do D. I don’t like the weekend
5. What about ______ a cup of coffee ?
A. A have B. having C. you have D. do you have
6. Are there ................... stores on your street?
7. 10. How many floors .......................... in your school?
Question IV. Đoạn văn sau đây có 10 lỗi sai, em hãy gạch chân các lỗi sai
1.Tuan and his brother (not watch)…TV at the moment. They (be)…asleep.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
2. My father always (come)….home late. He (finish)…work at 5 o’clock.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
3. I (not understand)…this sentence. What this word (mean)…?
……………………………………………………………………………………….
4. Right now I (look)…around the classroom. Minh (write)…in his book.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
5. Lien’s friend (have)…a new bike but he (not like)…it very much.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
6. Where your children ( be) ...? - They’re upstairs. They (play) ...video games.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
7. What you ( do) ... now? - I (unload) ... the vegetables.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
8. Nam (work) .... in the garden at the moment?
……………………………………………………………………………………….
QUESTION VI- Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân
She walks to school veryday.……………………………………………………………………?
My sister works in Sydney, Australia.……………………………………………………………………?
We are having bread and milk for breakfast.……………………………………………………………………?
There are 10 boys and 19 girls in our class.……………………………………………………………………?
Thu is reading a book.……………………………………………………………………?
QUESTION VII –Dựa vào thông tin trong nhật ký của Ann để hoàn thành đoạn hôi thoại sau: ( 20 điểm)
Mary: What (1)…………………………………….next week, Ann?
Ann: I’m very busy indeed. On Monday (2)…………………………………………..….
Mary:Are you? Do you go to language class every Monday?
Ann: Yes, I do
Mary:What’s (3)……………………………………………………..…….evening?
Ann: I’m staying at home to study (4)…………………………………….…..
Mary: (5)…………………………………………free on Wednesday night?
Ann: No, I’m not. I always have (6)……………………………..……..Wednesdays.
Mary:Do you ever stay at home and (7)………………………………………..….?
Ann: Yes, I’m doing that on Thursday. But on Friday, I’m not (8) …………………… I’m going (9)………………………………with Sarah.
Mary: Surely you are staying at home on the weekend.
Ann: Well, On Saturday I’m (10)…………………..…..but on Sunday I’m taking a rest.
Question VIII: Viết lại các câu sau giữ nguyên nghĩa so với câu gốc
1. Lan’s hair is long. -> Lan …………….…………………………………………………………….
2. Nam rides his bike to school everyday. -> Nam goes ……………………………………………………………
3. Let’s go swimming. -> What about ………………………………………………………..?
4. My house is behind the post office. -> The post office ……………………………………………………….
5. She likes drinking milk. -> Milk is …………………………………………………………………….
6. What’s the height of the Mount Everest? -> How ……………………………………………………………….?
7. This boy is strong and tall. -> He is ………………………………………………………………..
8. My room is smaller than your room.-> Your room is …………………………………………………………….
9. Mr. Hung drives very carefully.-> Mr Hung is ……………………………………………………………………
10. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms?-> Are …………………………………………………………….?
IX. Sắp xếp những từ sau thành câu hoàn chỉnh
house/ a/ Minh/ lake/ a/ lives/ in/ near.
………………………………………………………………………
yard/ front/ school/There/ big/ of/ is/ our/ in/ a.
………………………………………………………………………
many/ right/ the/ museum/ Are/ flowers/ the/ there/ to/ of/?
………………………………………………………………………
next/ photocopy/ What/ store/ there/ the/ is/ to /?
………………………………………………………………………
hospital/ father/ in/ the/ city/ My/ a/ works/ in.
………………………………………………………………………
there/ family/ many/ in/ are/ How/ Linh’s/ people/ ?
………………………………………………………………………
his/ friend/ in/ family/ My/ Hanoi/ doesn’t/ with/ live.
………………………………………………………………………
brushes/ six/ gets/ her/ o’clock/ Hoa/ at/ up/ teeth/ and.
………………………………………………………………………
on/ floor/ classroom/ the/ is/ Our/ first.
………………………………………………………………………
Minh’s/ six/ There/ in/ rooms/ house/ are.
……………………………………………………………………
X. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần bị gạch chân ở mỗi câu.
1. She is cooking dinner in the kitchen.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
2. I’d like some milk and vegetables.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
3. Miss. Nga is teaching English at a secondary school.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
4. Nam never flies a kite.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
5. I have Math and Literature on Monday and Thursday.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
6. He goes to the movies once a week.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
7. My sister is in grade 6.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
8. Mai always has dinner at seven o’clock.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
9. My brother wants a glass of lemon juice.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
10. Linh has milk and eggs for her breakfast.
…………………………………………………………………………………………
XI: Chän c©u ®óng tõ nh÷ng tõ bÞ x¸o trén
1. dinner / when / get/ home / we / have / let’s
A. Let’s have home when we get dinner. B. Let’s have dinner get when we home.
C. Let’s have dinner when we get home. D. Let’s have get dinner when we home.
how / do / Jack / sports / Tom / and / often / play?
A. How often do Jack and Tom play sports? B. How do Jack and Tom play sports often?
C. How often Jack and Tom do play sports? D. How do Jack often and Tom play sports?
day / James / homework / every / his / does.
A. James does every day his homework. B. James every day does his homework.
C. James does his homework every day. D. James does every his day homework.
famous / reading / I / people / about / like / books.
A. I like reading about people famous books. B. I like reading books about famous people.
C. I like reading books about people famous. D. I like reading about people books famous.
5. short / girl / hair / tall / with / black / a / is.
A. She is a girl tall with short black hair. B. She is a tall girl with black short hair.
C. She is a short girl with tall black hair. D. She is a tall girl with short black hair.
XII: ViÕt l¹i c¸c c©u sau b¾t ®Çu b»ng tõ ®· cho sao cho nghÜa cña c©u kh«ng ®æi
1. Shall we go camping in Con Vanh Beach this Sunday?
2. What is the price of a bottle of cooking oil?
3. Is the police station is behind the post office?
4. My father is driving his car to Ha Noi.
5. Nam’s father’ car is white.
6. How much beef do you want?
7. There are three floors in my new house.
I cycle to school every day.
What’s your brother’s job? ~ A doctor.
10. Phong has a sister. Her name is Nhung.
I. Choose the word or phrase of words which best completes each of the following sentences
0. We shouldn’t _____ trash on the street .
A. throwing B. to throw C. throws D. throw
01. Lemonade, apple juice, soda and ______ are cold drinks.
A. beans B. noodles C. vegetables D. iced tea
02. We have English on Tuesday and on Saturday. We have it _____ a week .
A. once B. twice C. two times D. three times
03. Ngoc and Yen often do aerobic in ____ free time .
A. your B. his C. her D. their
04. Mai doesn’t like playing soccer. She ____ plays soccer .
A. always B. usually C. never D. often
05. He wants ____ an engineer.
A. to be B. being C. be D. is
06. They would like some milk _____ dinner.
A. in B. at C. for D. of
07. Minh often goes _____ in the mountain on the weekend.
A. walking B. walks C. walk D. to walk
08. My father is _____ man.
A. a old B. an old C. not young D. not very young
09. I’m tired . I’d like ______ .
A. sit down B. sitting down C. to sit down D. to sitting down
10. Do you have any toothpaste? I’d like a large _____ .
A. tube B. roll C. bar D. tin
II. Complete the following sentences with an appropriate form of the word in bracket .
01. There are four ______ in my house . ( bookshelf )
02. The photocopy store is between the _____ and the drugstore . ( bake )
03. Is your brother an _____ ? ( act )
04. Mai’s sister is a _____ . ( sing )
05. We must be _____ when we cross the road . ( care )
06. This tree has a lot of green _____ . ( leaf )
07. Is his father a ______ . ( business )
08. I’m Vietnamese. What’s your ______ ? ( nation )
09. Air _____ is a big problem in many cities in the world . ( pollute )
10. Yoko is from Japan . She is ______ . ( Japan )
III. Read the passage and choose
My name is Petty and this is my husband, Phil. We both work in offices in London. We have breakfast at half past seven. We don’t have a big breakfast. We usually have bread, coffee and orange juice. For lunch we usually have a salad or soup and sandwich. That’s at about 1.30
We usually have dinner at half past seven in the evening. It is a big meal of the day and we have meat or fish with vegetables and potatoes or rice. We have orange juice with the milk. On Saturday we often go to a restaurant for dinner at about eight o’clock.
1/ Petty and her husband work in
A/offices B/factories C/ hospitals D/ clinics
2/Petty and Phil have
A/a big breakfast B/ a light breakfast C/ breakfast with meat D/ breakfast with eggs
3/ What do they have for lunch?
A/ salad and sandwich B /salad and soup C /fish and soup D/ sandwich and fish
4/What do they drink for dinner?
A/iced tea B/ iced coffee C/ soda D/ orange juice
5/ What time do they usually have dinner?
A/6.30 B/7.15 C /7.30 . D/ 8.00
6/ Where do they have dinner on Saturday evenings?
A/at home B/at a hotel C /at their friend’s house D/ at a restaurant
IV. Fill each of the numbered blanks in the passage . Use only one word for each space
listen Mondays teach have my
movie on lunch usually small
I live in a …(1)…. house in Hanoi. I ….(2)……..English at a school there. I usually ….(3)…….. breakfast at seven o’clock in the morning and I have ……..(4)…. ……at twelve o’clock in the canteen of the school. I teach ……(5)……students in the morning. I teach them dialogues ..(6)…. Wednesdays and Fridays. On …….. ….(7)… I teach them grammar. In the evening I …8)…. stay at home and …(9)… to the radio. I sometimes go to the ……(10)…. .I always go to bed at ten o’clock
V. Complete the passage and answer the questions
winter are night In
but cold seasons are go
There are four (1) ……. in a year. They …(2)……. spring, summer, fall and ..…(3)… .In the spring, the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold …(4)….not very cold .There …(5)……..many flowers in the spring. ……(6)….. the summer, the day is long and the night is short .People often ..(7)…….swimming in this season. The fall is the season of fruits. In the winter, it’s usually very ……(8)…… . The day is short and the ………(9)………is long .
1. How many seasons are there in a year?...............................................................................
2. What are they?......................................................................................
3. Is it usually warm in the spring?...............................................................................
4. What are there in the spring?....................................................................................
5. What do people often do in the summer?..........................................................................
6. Is the day long or short in the summer?............................................................................
VI. Read the passage and check T/F
Hello! My name is Phong. I’m twelve years old and I’m in grade 6. My school is in the country. It’s a small school. My school has two floors and sixteen classrooms . My classroom is on the first floor. There are thirty five students in my class. Every morning I get up at six o’clock. I get dressed, brush my teeth and wash my face. I have breakfast at six twenty and go to school at six forty.
8. Phong’s school is small
9. Phong brushes his teeth at 6.20
10. He goes to school at 6.40
VII. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it has the similar meaning to the first
1.This school is big .->It ……………………………………………………………………………………………. .
2. She goes to school on foot .->She…………………………………………………………………………………………
3. There are four rooms in my house.->My house ……………………………………………………………………… .
4. I go to school at six thirty >I go to school ……………………….……………………………………………..
5.She likes noodles.->Her favorite ………………………………………………………………………
6. The movie theater is in front of the hotel .->The hotel …………………………………………………………
VIII. Putting the words in the correct order to make the meaningful sentences.
IX.Write a paragraph about Jane using the given cues
Jane / gymnast .She/pretty.She/ tall /thin .She /light /but she / not/week.She /oval /lovely face .She /long /black /hair /brown eyes .She/ small mouth .Her teeth /small / white .Everyone /love her because she/ always help/ others .
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
I. Pick out the word whose underlined and bold part is pronounced differently from that of the other words
1. A.fish B. like C. nine D. rice
2. A. apple B. cabbage C. take D. matter
3. A. brown B. round C. how D. nose
4. A. takes B. yards C. starts D. books
5. A. hotel B. those C. hospital D. cold
6. A. end B. help C. ahead D. eat
II. Complete sentences using the words in the blankets
1. There …………………five people in Nga’s family. ( am / have / is / are ).
2. ……….…………….beef do you want? ( How old / How many /How much/ What)
- I want 2 kilos of beef.
3. My father……..……………….to work by car. ( go / travels / drive / live)
4. The hospital is ………..…………….…the river. ( next to / in / on / under)
5. My mother is not big. She is…………..………....( big / small / fine / game)
6. They………….……….…dinner at the moment. ( is having / are having/ have / has)
7. ………….…..does she live? – On Nguyen Trai street. ( Where / What / How / Who)
8. My sisters ………………….….….teeth every day. ( brush / play / read/ brushes)
III. Use the correct form of the verbs in the blankets
VI. Read and choose the best answers
Today is Sunday, Mrs.Lien (1)………………….to the market. She goes (2)…….…..motorbike. She (3)……………………many things. First, she wants (4)……………. kilo of fish and five hundred grams of beef. She(5)………………like eggs, so she doesn’t buy eggs. Then, she wants (6)……………………….vegetables. She needs four cans of peas, (7)……………….of toothpaste. She goes home (8)………………ten o’clock.
1. A. go B. play C. going D. goes
2. A. on B. by C. to D. at
3. A. want B. like C. wants D. don’t want
4. A. some B. any C. an D. a
5. A. not B. don’t C. doesn’t D. isn’t
6. A. some B. any C. an D. a
7. A. a bar B. a tube C. a box D. a can
8. A. at B. on C. in D. to
VII. Read and choose the best answers
This is Thuan. He is eleven years old. He is in grade 6. His family has four people, his parents, his sister and Thuan. They live in a small house near the Lam river. Thuan gets up at five o’clock. He has breakfast at six fifteen. He goes to school at half past six. The school is not near his house, so he goes by bike. His classes start at seven and end at eleven fifteen. He goes home at twelve o’clock. He has lunch at twelve ten. He likes meat and vegetables. He doesn’t like fish. In the afternoon, he does his homework and then he plays soccer with Minh, his friend.
VIII. Make questions
IX. Arrange the words or phrases to make full sentences
1. people/ are/ How / in / family / many/ there/ his.
-> …………………………………………………………………….?
2. and / round / full / has / a / lips / face / Hoa.
-> …………………………………………………………………….
3. by/ he / school / bus / goes / to
-> …………………………………………………………………….
4. hungry / We / not /are /
-> …………………………………………………………………….
5. Mr. Quang / what / do / does.
-> …………………………………………………………………….?
6. music / not / to / Nga / listen / does /
-> …………………………………………………………………….
7. is/ She / playing/ soccer/
-> …………………………………………………………………….
8. bananas / How / does/ many / want / he
-> …………………………………………………………………….?
X. You are going to have a summer vacation. Write a short paragraph (about 80-100 words) to say about your plan. The questios bellow may help you.
Which places are you going to visit ? ( first? then? next? after that? and finally?)
Where are you going to stay?
How long are you goig to stay?
What are you going to do do there?
........................................................
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
I. Choose the word having the underlined letters pronounced differently from the other
II. Choose the best answer to fill each blank
It’s twelve o’clock, Nam. Let’s……..home.
A. go B. to go C. going D. goes
Tuan and I……..badminton in the yard.
A. playing B. is playing C. are playing D. am playing
This sign says “stop!”. We ……..go straight ahead.
A. can B. don’t can C. must D. must not
They are going to New York……..plane.
A. in B. by C. with D. writes
Nam is ……..something on his book.
A. writing B. written C. wrote D. writes
Are there……..stores on your street?
A. a B. an C. any D. the
My sister and I……..television in the living room now.
A. am watching B. are watching C. is watching D. watching
……..do you go to school? – I go there on foot.
A. how B. by what C. how many D. how by
“Does Tom play volleyball?” - “No, …..”
A. she not plays B. she don’t C. she isn’t D. she doesn’t
How many floors …….in your school?
A. there are B. there has C. are there D. have there
11 The city is noisy, but the country is ………….
a. silent b. quiet c. peace d. busy
12 In my bedroom, there are ..................... pictures on the wall.
a. a b. any c. much d. some
13My father is tall, but my brother is ………….
a. tall b. taller c. tallest d. the tallest
14 Mom: Would you ……. noodles? Yes, please.
a. want b. like c. has dhave
15. Ba’s house is near my house. He is my ……………
a. brother b. classmate c. neighbor d. friend
16 I often help my brother ............. his homework.
a. of b. for c. with d. from
17 Anna is talking ................... Annie.
a. to b. with c. of d. on
18. They ……… go out at weekend. They stay at home.
a. always b. usually c. sometimes d. never
19. Is there ………….. else you want?
a. a b. an c. anything d. something
20. Does Mrs. Van ………….. one kilo of sugar?
a. need b. needs c. to need d. needing
III.Supply a suitable preposition to complete the sentence.
1…..(1)…..summer I play tennis…. (2)…the evening.
2.We always go… (3)…..the city center ….(4)….our own car.
3.I’d like to stay….. (5)……home tonight .Is there anything interesting…. (6)…TV?
4.John is often late …..(7)…..school but I am always early.
5.I live only a few yard …..(8)….the bus stop.
6.Let’s listen…….(9)…….some music….(10)…the radio.
IV Fill in each blank with the suitable given word
There are four (1)…… in a year. (2)….. are spring, summer, fall and winter. In the (3)……., the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold (4)…. not very cold. There are (5)…. flowers in the spring. In the summer, the day is long and the night is (6)…. People often (7)… swimming in this season. The fall is the season (8)… fruits. In the (9)…, it is usually very cold. The day is short and the (10)…. is long.
V.Give the correct form of the verb
1.Tuan and his brother (not watch)………,,,…TV at the moment. They (be)………asleep.
2. look! The plane (fly) ............................ toward to the airport. It (land) ............................
3.I (not understand)………………………this sentence. What this word (mean)……
4.Right now I (look)……..…..around the classroom. Minh (write)…………..…in her book.
5.Lien’s friend (have)…………..a new bike but he (not like)…………..it very much.
VI. read and answer questions
My name is Nam. I stay with my friend, my brother and my sister in a small house. My friend’s name is Thang. He is tall and strong. He plays volleyball. My brother is a doctor. His name is Tuan. He is handsome. He is tall but thin. He works in a hospital in Ha noi. My sister is Mai. She is young and nice. She has long dark hair, brown eyes, and an oval face. She is now a student at Nguyen Trai school. She is in grade 6.
1. What’s the writer’s name? ………………………………………………
2. Who is Tuan? ………………………………………………………….
3. Is Thang strong or weak? …………………………………………………..
4. What color is Mai’s hair? …………………………………………………
5. Who has brown eyes? ……………………………………………………..
VII. Complete these sentences using the words given
1. I/ not want/ go out/ night. -> ………………………………………………..
2. The weather / always/ cold/ winter-> ………………………………………
3. Mekong river/ long/ than/ Red river.-> ……………………………………
4. There/ rice paddy/ left/ my house -. ……………………………………….
5. there/ many/ tree/ your village?-> ………………………………………..
6. Long/ tall/ brother/ not. -> ……………………………………………..
7. your school/ big/ small? -> ……………………………………………
8. there/ some tree/ opposite/ hotel -> ………………………………………….....
9. my sister/ like/ read/ book/ I /not /like.-> …………………………………………
10. We/ stop/ when/ light/ red. -> …………………………………………….
VIII.Find the mistakes and correct them.
1.Mr Hien isn’t live in a house in the country.
A B C D
2.The Browns are traveling to Ho Chi Minh City in train.
A B C D
3.There aren’t a trees to the left of Lan’s house.
A B C D
4.That’s my sister over there. She stands near the window.
A B C D
5.Do you know how many teachers does your school have?
A B C D
6.He wants any books on that shelf.
A B C D
7 How many teachers there are in your school?
A B C D
8 They no get up at 6 o’clock.
A B C D
9. Her garden is big. It’s a garden big.
A B C D
10.Sorry. You can't speak to Jim now. He's have a bath.
A B C D
IX. Tìm 1 từ thích hợp điền vào chỗ trống.
Singapore is an island city of about three million people. It's a beautiful (1) .................... with lots of parks and open spaces. It's also a very (2) ............................ city.
Most of the people (3) ............................. in high rise flats in different parts of the island. The business district is very modern with (4) ....................... of high new office buildings. Singapore also has some nice older sections. In China town, there (5) ............................ rows of old shop houses. The Government buildings in Singapore are very beautiful (6)............................. date from the colonial days.
Singapore is famous (7)....................... its shops and restaurants. There are many good shopping centers. Most of the (8) .................... are duty free. Singapore's restaurants (9) ................. Chinese, Indian, Malay and European food, and the (10) ....................... are quite reasonable.
X. Haõy cho daïng duùng cuûa caùc tính töø ñaõ cho trong ngoaëc ñeå hoaøn thaønh ñoaïn vaên sau, theo ví du.
Example: 1: best
Dave and I are having the (1-good) ________ holiday of our lives! We are in Barbados, one of the (2- lovely ) ________ islands in the Caribean. Although it is much (3- small)______ than Jamaica, there seems to be ( 4- much)________ to do than in Jamaica. Moreover, the people here seem to be (5-friendly) ________ than those on the other islands. We are staying in the ( 6- mordern)_________ hotel I have ever seen. It’s large and cool, and many people think it is the (7 –good) _________ hotel on the island. It’s far (8- comfortable) _________ than any of the other hotels, and it’s even (9-big)____ than the world famous Belton Hotel. The (10- near) ________ beach is (11-little)_________ than a hundred metres away, and so we can go swimming a lot. It’s really good, and I do wish you were here.
XI. Rewrite these sentences with the same meaning
1. Mr Binh is going to England by plane. (FLYING)…………………………………………………………………..
2. The stadium is behind the park. (FRONT) ………………………………………………………
3. Mrs Khanh has a daughter, Nguyet. (MOTHER)………………………………………………………………..
4. Are there five rooms in Nhung’s house? (HAVE)…………………………………………………………………..
5. My father rides his motorbike to work every day. (BY)…………………………………………………………..
XII. Give the correct form of the word
There are four……………….in my house (BOOKSHELF).
The photocopy is between the ……………….and the drugstore (BAKE).
Is your brother an…………………? (ACT).
Mai’s sister is a…………… ……(SING).
We must be ……………… …when we cross the road (CARE).
This tree has a lot of green …………… ……(LEAF).
Is your father a……………… …(BUSINESS).
I’m Vietnamese. What’s your……………… …?(NATION).
Air ……………… …is a big problem in many cities in the world (POLLUTE).
Yoko is from Japan. She is ……………… …(JAPAN).
XIII- Rewrite these sentences that it means the same as the sentence printed before it.
1. My room is smaller than your room.Your room is…………………………………………………………
2. Mr. Hung drives very carefully. Mr. Hung is ..................................................................
3. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms? Are …………………………………………?
4. Does your father cycle to work?>Does your father get .......................?
5. How much does a box of chocolates cost? >What ...........................................................?
6. Nam likes tea. >Nam’s favorite .......................
7. The Mekong River is longer than the Red River.The Red River is …………………………………………
8. How much is a bowl of noodles?How much ………………………………………..?
9. What is the height of that building?How ...............................................
10. What is the price of a cake and an orange?How much …………………………………………..?
XIV. Fill in the blank with one suitable word
This (1)…… …….… Smith’s room. You can see, (2).................. room is not very large. (3)…
are two chairs, a table, a bed, a wardrobe (4)…………………….. a bookshelf in his room. The
table is near (5) ………….. window. There is (6) ............. ink- pot, some books and (7) …………
English- Vietnamese dictionary on the table. The bed is on the right. There are also some books and newspapers on the bed. The wardrope is opposite the bed. Smith has many clothes. (8) ………. clothes are all in the wardrobe. The bookshelf is (9)…….. the wall. There are many (10)………….…. on it.
ENGLISH TEST 26
I. Chọn 1 từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại.
II. Chọn phương án đúng nhất điền vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành các câu sa
1. Nam usually goes ……….. after school.
A. to fishing B. home C. the cinema D. house
5. How many floors …………. in your school?
A. there are B. there has C. are there D. have there
6. I usually go to school …………. bike, but today I am going to school ………foot.
A. by / by B. on / on C. by / on D. on / by
7. Are there …………. stores on your street?
A. a B. an C. any D. the
8. …………..do you get there? – We walk, of course.
A. Why B. What C. How by D. How
9. ………….do you work? - I work at a school.
A. What B. Where C. When D. How
10. The opposite of “weak” is …………….
A. thin B. small C. strong D. heavy
11. I’m going to the …………….now. I want to buy some bread.
A. post office B. drugstore C. bakery D. toystore
12. ………….long or short?
A. Does Mai have hair B. Is Mai’s hair
C. Does Mai’s hair have D. Is Mai of hair
13. Don’t be late ………….. your school.
A. on B. at C. to D. for
14. What ………… are her eyes? - They are black.
A. subject B. color C. time D. class
15. My sister is ………….. me.
A. tall than B. taller than C. than tall D. than taller
16. I do not go to school …………. Sundays.
A. on B. in C. at D. for
17. John likes sports very much. He usually plays ………… after school.
A. games and geography B. soccer and literature
C. volleyball and soccer D. volleyball and simming
18.My grandfather is …............. man.
A. a old B. an old C. not young D. not very young
19. We go to school at …………. in the morning.
A. a quarter to seven B. seven to a quarter
C. seven quarter D. a quarter seven to
20. My father gets up at 7.00 and eats ……………..
A. a big breakfast B. the big breakfast C. big breakfast D. a breakfast big
III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc
Mai (not / do) _________ her homework every evening.
She (have) ___________ breakfast at 6.10.
Look ! Linh (come)___________.
Every evening, my father (read) _____________ newspapers.
We (not/ listen) ___________ to the radio after lunch.
Lan and Nga (play) _______ chess in the afternoon?
Where (your children/ be)_____? They’re upstairs. -They (play) _______video games.
What you (do)_______ now? - I (unload)_________ the vegetables.
Nam ( work)________ the garden at the moment?
Our school ( have)________ a small garden. There( be)______ many flowers in it.
11.My father watch) __________TV in the living room. He often ( watch) …… TV in the evening.
IV. Mỗi câu dưới đây có MỘT lỗi sai, em hãy tìm và sửa lỗi sai ấy
1. She and he goes to work on foot . 1. ....................................
2. Mai and Nam don’t go to school in Sundays. 2. ..................................
3. Mr. Linh always have dinner at seven o’clock in the evening. 3. ....................................
4. He comes here with bicycle. 4. .....................................
5. When is your classroom?- On the second floor. 5....................................
V- Đọc kỹ đoạn văn sau đây rôi trả lời các câu hỏi
Linda is a vegetarian so she doesn’t eat meat. She doesn’t have a big breakfast every morning. She usually has
a slide of bread and a glass of milk. She has lunch at the office at about 11.30. She has only rice with vegetables for lunch. At weekends, she often goes to a Chinese restaurant because there is a lot of delicious food for vegetarians.
* Questions:
1. Why doesn’t Linda eat meat?..............................................................................................................................
2. What does Linda usually have for breakfast?
..............................................................................................................................................
3. What does she have for lunch?..................................................................................................................................
.4. Where does she have lunch?.................................................................................................................
5. Why does she often go to a Chinese restaurant at weekends?
..............................................................................................................................................
VI. Sử dụng từ loại đúng của các từ cho sẵn trong ngoặc để hoàn thành câu
There is a …………… next to my house. (bake)
She is a …………… of English. (teach)
Peter ……………… a very big truck. (driver)
4. There are four……………………in my house. (room)
5. Mai's sister is a …………… ……..…………… (work)
VII. Sử dụng các từ gợi ý để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh
1. Minh / live / brother / apartment / town.
..............................................................................................................................................
2. Mrs. Lan / and / children / travel / London / plane.
..............................................................................................................................................
3. There / be / any flowers / your / school / yard ?
..............................................................................................................................................
4. He / not ride / home / but / go / taxi.
..............................................................................................................................................
5. Sister / have / bike / and / cycle / work / everyday.
..............................................................................................................................................
VIII. Viết lại các câu sau theo gợi ý cho sẵn sao cho nghĩa của câu mới tương tự như câu đã cho
1. Does your school have twenty classrooms? Are ………………………………………………………………….
2. Phong has a sister, Lan. Lan is …………………………………………………………………………………..
3. My mother often drives to work. My mother often goes …………………………………………………………
5. Miss White’s face is oval. It is small.Miss White………………………………………………………………….
6. The bookstore is to the right of the restaurant.The restaurant is……………………………………………………
7. He gets up at five fifteen. He …………………………………………………………………..…………………..
8. How many oranges do you want? How many oranges would………………………………………………………
9. Tom travels to work by car every morning.Tom…………………………………………………………………..
10. Carol doesn’t live far from her office.Carol lives…………………………………………………………………..
IX. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân trong các câu sau
Thuy goes to school by bus.……………………………………………………………………………………….
I am in grade 6.………………………………………………………………………………………….
There are four people in his family.……………………………………………………………………………….
Her eyes are brown.………………………………………………………………………………………….
It is cool and nice in the fall in my country.……………………………………………………………………….
They are going to school.………………………………………………………………………………………….
Mrs. Trang feels very tired.……………………………………………………………………………………
Those are armchairs.………………………………………………………………………………………….
An ice – cream is 4,000 dong.…………………………………………………………………………………..
Marie speaks French.…………………………………………………………………………………………...
X. Sắp xếp lại các từ bị sáo trộng thành câu có nghĩa (10 điểm)
1. house / a / Minh /lake / lives / in / near / a.
………………………………………………………………………………………...
2. a / plays / badminton / Paul / week / twice.
………………………………………………………………………………………...
3. like / the / weather / fall/ What / is / the / in?
………………………………………………………………………………………...
4. building / tallest / in / This / my city / the / is .
………………………………………………………………………………………...
5. good / the/ there /Let’s / and / time / beach / go / have / to / a.
………………………………………………………………………………………...
6. small / thin / sister / white / and / His / lips / teeth / has.
………………………………………………………………………………………...
7. do / go / When / you/ often/ swimming ?
………………………………………………………………………………………...
8. camping / often / do / How / you / go?
………………………………………………………………………………………...
9. stay / grandparents / vacation / are / with / next / we / to / our / going / summer.
………………………………………………………………………………………...
10. the / mother / in / My / house / are / father /and .
………………………………………………………………………………………...
ENGLISH TEST 27
I. Pick out the word whose underlined part in pronounced differently from that of the other words.
II. Choose the best answer
1. There are...................eggs in the fridge.
A. a lot B. a few C. a little D. little
2. What do you do .............................the weekend.
A. on B. in C to D. for
3. I am going .........Ha Long bay
A. visiting B. visit C. visited D. to visit
4. There isn’t _______milk in the bottle.
A. an B. a C. any D. some
5. How much is a _________of toothpaste.
A. can B. bar C. tube D. box
6. What about ______table-tennis?
A. to play B. playing C. plays D. play
7. Fall means ……………..in British-English .
A. summer B. winter C. autumn D. spring
8. What is her _____________? _ She is Australian.
A. language B. nationality C. population D. country
9. They are going _________vacation in London.
A. in B. on C. at D. for
10. ________languages can you speak?
A. When B. How C. How much D. Which
11. The Great Wall of China is the world’s _____structure.
A. long B. longer C. the longest D. longest
12. Ho Chi Minh has a ___________of 3.5 million.
A. city B. capital C. population D. country
13. I am Mary. I am __________ Great Britain.
A. to B. from C. at D. on
14. ______are you going to stay? _ In a hotel.
A. Which B. Where C. When D. What
15. Tomatoes, lettuce and potatoes are ………………
A. fruits B. vegetables C. drinks D. flowers
16. There is an intersection ahead. You must______ .
A. slow down B. go fast C. stop D. go ahead
17. There isn’t any water in the bottle. I am going to take ______.
A. many B. an C. any D. some
18. A. What is the matter with you? – B: ______
A. I go by bike B. I’m heavy C. I like chicken D. I’m tired
19. A: Would you like a glass of lemon juice? – B: ______
A. No, I’m not B. No, I don’t like C. No, thanks D. No. It’s too hot.
20. PETRONAS Twin Towers is the…………. building in the world.
A. tall B. taller C. tallest D. the tallest
21. Mai needs ……………………chocolates.
A. a bar of B. a packet of C. a box of D. a bottle of
22. He ……………………his bicycle at the moment.
A. rides B. is riding C. ride D. to ride
23. Phanxipang is the ……………………mountain in Viet nam.
A. high B. higher C. highest D. the highest
24……………………is the weather like ?
A. How B. What C. Who D. How much
25.My house is as ……………………as Hoa’s house.
A. smaller B. small C. biggest D. bigger
26.We ……………………waste food and feed it to pigs.
A. damage B. collect C. leave D. throw
27.Chi is……………………girl in her class.
A. more beautiful B. the most beautiful C. beautiful D. a most beautiful
28.I’m going ……………………the Ngoc Son Temple tomorrow
A. see B. sees C. to see D.seeing
29.What ……………………you ……………………to do tomorrow?
A. does / go B.is / going C.are / going D. do / go
30. We shouldn’t ………… our environment.
A. destroying B. to destroy C. destroys D. destroy
31. He often ________ he ________ the kites when he isn’t busy?
A. does / flies B. does / fly C. does / play D. does / play
32. Why don’t we ________ to the movies? ~ That’s a good idea.
A. go B. to go C. going D. to going
33. Some people can speak many ________
A. countries B. nationalities C. languages D. speeches
34. There are four ________ in a year: spring, summer, fall and winter.
A. activities B. pastimes C. weathers D. seasons
35. Can I help you? ~ ________ please. I need a kilo of beef.
A. Yes B. Sorry C. Can D. No
36. Mr Thanh is a policeman. He has a ……………….job
A. fast B. careful C. difficult D. bad
37. Her sister has an…………face and long black …………
A. round - hairs B. long - hairs C. oval -hair D. oval - hairs
38. What are ………? …………..are his shoulders
A. those-These B. those-Those C. this-This D. those-This
39. How many oranges, Mom? ……… dozen, please
A. A half of B. Half a C. A half D. Half
40.You ……… eat too much meat. It isn’t good for your health.
A. should B. shouldn’t C. not D. don’t want
III. Supply the correct verb tense/ form of the verbs in the brackets.
1. Mrs Thu (do) …………… the housework every day. => ………………………………….
2. My brother (listen) ………………. to music now. => …………………………………….
3. They (visit)……………. Da Lat this summer vacation. => ………………………………….
4. Long is thirsty. He’d like (drink)………….. some water. => ………………………………...
5. Now they ( play ) …………soccer. => ………………………………….
6. He ( not go ) ………….fishing in the winter. => ………………………………….
7. You usually ( jog) ………in the morning? – Yes, I do. => ……………………………...
8. This summer vacation, my parents ( visit)……..to Hue. => ………………………………….
9. What about ( go) ……….to Nha Trang? => ………………………………….
10. We mustn’t (drive) fast on the street. => …………………………………..
IV. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets to complete each sentence.
1. It is very …………………………………….. in the city. NOISE
2. Her …………………….. are small and white. TOOTH
3. This is my favorite chair. It’s so ………………… . COMFORT
4. There is a ………………………. next to my house. BAKE
5. She is a ……………………. of English. TEACH
7. Long goes ……………….. at the weekend. SAIL
8. Their house is on the ………………… floor of the room. FIVE
10. Do you ……………………… play video games? USUAL
V. Read the passage carefully and then answer the following questions.
My name is Petty and this is my husband, Phil. We both work in offices in London. We have breakfast at half past seven. We don’t have a big breakfast. We usually have bread, coffee and orange juice.
For lunch we usually have a salad or soup and sandwich. That’s at about 1.30.
We usually have dinner at half past seven in the evening. It is a big meal of the day and we have meat or fish with vegetables and potatoes or rice. We have orange juice with the milk. On Saturday evenings we go to a restaurant for dinner at about eight o’clock.
1. Who is Petty’s husband?................................................................ …………………………………….
2. What do they have for lunch?………………………………………………………………………………
3. What time do they usually have dinner?……………………………………………………………………………….
4. What do they drink for dinner……………………………………………………………………………………..
5. Where do they have dinner on Saturday evenings……………………………………………………………………
6. Is dinner a big meal for Petty and her husband?..............................................................................................................
VI. Choose the suitable word for each blank in the following passage
London has a (1) ……….. of 6.7 million. London is a famous city. Tourists come from all over the world to (2) ……… its historic buildings, theaters, museums, and its many shops. You can also see and hear the famous (3) ………., Big Ben. Like many big cities, London has problems with traffic and (4) ……….. There are too many cars on the (5) ………..
The (6) ……….. thing about London is the parks. There are (7) ……….. in the city center. But my children’s favorite place is Harleys. It is the biggest toyshop in the (8) ………..
VII. Rewrite the following sentences so that the second sentence means the same as the first one
1. What about eating some rice?--> Let’s ..........................................................................................................................
2. Her eyes are brown.--> She has .................................................................................................................................
3. What drink do you like?--> What is ..............................................................................................................................
4. Our school has 12 classrooms.-> There are ...................................................................................................................
5. Let’s go to the park.→ What about ………………………………………………………………………………?
6. How about watching Television?→ Why don’t you ……………………………………………………………….?
7. . Why don’t we go to the movies? → What ……………………………………………………………………….?
8. What’s the weather like in the spring? →How ………………………………………………………………?
9. How about visiting our friends? →Why..............................................................................................................................?
10. How’s the weather this morning? → What ...........................................................................................................................?
VIII. Correct the mistakes in the following sentences
There are an books. =>
This are benches. =>
What time it is? =>
She is ride her bike. =>
There aren’t some tall trees behind my house. =>
My father watching TV at the moment. =>
Chi is beautiful. Her tooth are small and white.=>
I like drink apple juice. It’s my favorite drink. =>
I’m very full. I’d like a bowl of noodles, Mom. =>
There are four season in a year in Viet Nam. =>
IX. Write the sentences with the cue words.
X. Rearrange the following words to make a complete sentences
1. I’d / am / so / like / noodles / I / hungry / some.
=>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
2. Skipping / her / and / younger / like / winter / Mai / sister / in.
=>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
3. Vietnamese / is / Vietnam / He / and / speak / He / from =>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
4. language / you / often / French / ? / Which / do / speak / English / or
=>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
5. like / what / the / is / weather/ in / winter /the /?=>……………………………………………………………………
6. often / Peter / to / school / goes / 6:30 / at=>…………………………………………………………………………
7. often / at / dinner / I / o’clock / have / seven. =>….……………………………………………………..
8. bigger / Ho Chi Minh City / which / or / Ha Noi / is? =>….……………………………………………………………………………………………..
9. don’t / Pagoda / go / why / to / we / Huong?=>………………………………………………………………………..
10. listens / usually / in / to / free / Lan / her / music / time. =>….……………………………………………………………………………………………...
ENGLISH TEST 28
I. Chọn một đáp án đúng nhất.
1. …………… sports do you play?
a. How b. Who c. Which d. What’s
2. My mother wants a good pair of shoes because she often goes ………….
a. jogging b. fishing c. sailing d. running
3. He often …………….. his kite when he’s not busy.
a. does b. plays c. goes d. flies
4. Why don’t we go to the movies?
a. Because I like it b. Good idea c. Yes, we do d. I don’t think so
5. Some people can speak many …………………
a. countries b. nationalities c. languages d. speeches.
6. People are …………. many forests because they need more land.
a. destroying b. producing c. growing d. polluting
7. There is ……….. oil in this bottle. We should buy some more.
a. a few b. few c. little d. a little
8. Can I help you? - …………., please. I need a kilo of beef.
a. Sorry b. Yes c. Can d. No
9. Minh …………… likes fish and beef.
a. isn’t b. don’t c. doesn’t d. never
10. He goes to work six days a week. He ……. goes to work.
a. always b. usually c. often d. never
II. Tìm một từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với từ còn lại.
1. a. citadel b. vacation c. destination d. lemonade
2. a. teachers b. doctors c. students d. workers
3. a. accident b. soccer c. clinic d. camera
4. a. mounth b. weather c. thick d. throw
5. a. language b. engineer c. sausage d. jogging
III. Viết lại câu sau sao cho nghĩa không đổi.
1. Lan’s hair is long. -> Lan …………….…………..
2. Nam rides his bike to school everyday. -> Nam goes …………………..
3. Are there four people in your family? -> Does ………………….……?
4. Nobody in our class is happier than Nga. -> Nga …………..……..………
5. Let’s go swimming. -> What about ………………..?
6. My house is behind the post office. -> The post office …………….
7. She likes drinking milk. -> Milk is …………………….
8. Ba has a sister, Lan. -> Ba ………………………….
9. What’s the height of the Mount Everest? -> How ……………………….?
10. This boy is strong. -> He is ……………………….
IV. Cho dạng đúng của từ trong ngoặc.
1. There are lots of (beauty) beaches in Viet Nam. …………..
2. Is Mr.Ha a (business) ? ……………….
3. She’s from Viet nam. What’s her (nation)? ………………….
4. Air (pollute) is a big problem in the big cities…………………..
5. In the (neighbor) , there is a hospital and a factory…………………..
V. Điền một giới từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống nếu cần.
1. A few people are …………. the mountain and they are ……… danger.
2. I have to stay..…late because I don’t finish ……. my homework.
3. My father always goes to work ………… his own car.
4. Our school starts ……….. six forty five to eleven o’clock.
5. The beef is on the table …….. the eggs and the fish.
VI. Chia động từ trong ngoặc cho phù hợp thì.
VII. Điền vào mỗi chỗ trống một từ cho thích hợp.
Dear Mai
I am visiting Ha Long Bay with my family ...(1)… June 12th to 20th. …(2)… you have a double room with a shower for these days? How …(3)… is the room? We would like …(4)… room facing the sea if it is possible. We …(5)… eat meat but we …(6)… all other kinds of food.
We are arriving …(7)… Ha Long Bay …(8)… about six o’clock on Monday evening. We plan to leave the hotel …(9)…Sunday morning.
I …(10)… forward to hearing from you soon.
Love
Nga.
VIII. §iÒn ®óng d¹ng so s¸nh cña tÝnh tõ trong ngoÆc.
1. Which is the (big) city in Viet Nam ? ……………
2. Spring is (warm) than Fall. But Summer is the (hot) season of a year. …………
3. Hoa is the (good) student in our class. …………
4. The Nile River is the (long) river in the world. ……………
5. The city is (noisy) than the country. ………………
IX. Viết một đoạn văn ngắn nói về thời tiết ở quê em và những việc mà em thường làm vào các mùa đó .
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………..………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Part 1: Chọn một từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại.
A. citadel B. vacation C. destination D. lemonade
A. beach B. read C. bean D. ahead
A. accident B. soccer C. clinic D. camera
A. visit B. season C. sausage D. museum
A. thigh B. high C. nine D. sandwich
Part 1: Chọn một từ không cùng loại với các từ khác trong nhóm.
A. television B. radio C. stereo D. table
A. soccer B. teacher C. worker D. driver
A. occasionally B. always C. second D. sometimes
A. sausage B. packet C. lettuce D. beef
A. load B. dangerous C. difficult D. heavy
Part 2: Chọn đáp án đúng nhất cho mỗi câu sau.
My sister ……………………. her homework every day.
A. does B. is C. are D. do
There is an intersection ahead. We……………………. .
A. must not slow down. B. must slow down. C. must go fast. D. cannot go straight.
How…………………….packets of candy would you like?
A. many B. much C. often D. about
At the zoo, they see a man going into the enclosure. He is going to ……………..the lion.
A. work B. feed C. talk D. sail
Mai goes to school …………………….Monday…………………….Friday.
A. from / on B. on / on C. in / in D. from / to
There is a ……………………..behind my classroom.
A. big flower garden B. flower big garden C. garden big flower D. big garden flower
Nam is going to stay…………..Hue…………….his uncle and aunt this summer vaction.
A. at / in B. on / with C. in / with D. with / in
Nam usually goes to school ……………………. foot because he lives near his school.
A. from B. with C. on D. about
Would you like something to drink, Mary?
A. Sorry B. No.Thank you C. Yes, you would D. Why
How…………………….oil do you want? - A bottle, please. And ……………. butter.
A. much/some B. many/any C. much/any D. many/some
Listen! Who……………………. in the next room?
A. is going to sing B. sings C. does sing D. is singing
…………………….walk to the park? - That’s a good idea!
A. What do we B. Would you like to C. Why don’t we D. Are we going to
Fifteen plus nineteen equal …………………….
A. eighteen B. thirteen C. thirty D. thirty four
March is the ……………………month of the year.
A. first B. second C. third D. fifth
Mekong is …………………… river in Vietnam.
A. long B. longer C. longest D. the longest
Part 3: Cho dạng đúng của các động từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành những câu sau.
Her father often (watch) ………………………………… news on television every evening.
How many classes (Hoa / have) ……………………………………….today?
Look! The children (wait) ……………………………………………for the bus over there.
Nga (not visit) …………………………………………………..Hue next week.
…………………… (be / there) any milk in the fridge? – Yes, we have some.
Part 4: Đặt câu hỏi cho từ hoặc cụm từ gạch chân
Nam goes to school 6 days a week.=> ........................................................................................................................
My mother is cooking in the kitchen.=> .............................................................................................................
I am going to stay in Ha Noi for a week.=> ..............................................................................................................
That shirt costs 100 000 dong.=> ......................................................................................................................
Miss Lien’s hair is dark.=> ....................................................................................................................
Part 5: Đọc đoạn văn sau và trả lời câu hỏi.
Ba is a student at Quang Trung School. Every morning, Ba gets up at six o’clock. He washes his face and brushes his teeth. At 6.30 he eats his breakfast then he goes to school. At eleven thirty, he goes home. It’s twelve o’clock now and he is having lunch. This afternoon, he is going to play soccer. He is going to do his homework tonight.
What does Ba do?=> . .............................................................................................................
What time does Ba get up every morning?=> ..........................................................................................................
Does Ba go to school in the morning?=> .............................................................................................................
What is Ba doing at twelve o’clock?=> ..................................................................................................
What is Ba going to do in the evening? => ...........................................................................................................
Part 6: Điền một từ thích hợp vào mỗi chỗ trống trong đoạn văn sau.
My sister’s name is Nga. She lives in Ha Noi. She (1) …………………… Literature at a school there. She goes to work every day. She has two (2) ……………………off a week: Saturday and Sunday. She has a bike but she never cycles to work because it’s very far (3) …………………… her house to her school. She goes by bus. The school starts at half past seven in the (4) ………………… and finishes at four o’clock in the afternoon. After work she usually plays badminton or goes swimming. She comes back home at seven o’clock, and has dinner. After dinner, she listens to music or watches TV. She (5) ……………………plays volleyball, but she likes watching volleyball matches on TV. She goes to bed at eleven o’clock.
Part 7: Chọn các câu trong khung sau để hoàn thành bài hội thoại một cách hợp lý, có một câu không dùng đến.
Ba: Good morning, Hoa. This is my new friend. His name is Quang.
Hoa: Nice to meet you, Quang!
Quang: (1)………………………………………………………….……….
Hoa: Where are you from, Quang?
Quang: (2)………………………………………………………………….
Hoa: (3)………………………………………………….……………….
Quang: There is a shop, a cinema and a market near my house. It is very noisy.
Hoa: (4)………………………………………………………………….
Quang: Yes, it is. And my classroom is on the fouth floor.
Hoa: (5)………………………………………………….……………….
Ba: It’s 7.00 and we have to come in. Good bye.
Hoa: Good bye. See you later.
Part 8: Hoàn thành câu thứ hai sao cho câu có cùng nghĩa với câu đã cho.
Let’s walk to school!=> Why................................................................................................................................?
Her nose is small and straight.=> She ..................................................................................................................
How old is your mother?=> What ........................................................................................................................?
Miss Nga goes to Ha Noi by plane today.=> Miss Nga ........................................................................................
No house in this street is older than my house.
=> My house ...............................................................................................................................................................
Part 9: Dùng từ gợi ý viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh để hoàn thành bức thư sau.
Dear Lien,
Thank you for your letter you sent me last week.
I / be / in / country / uncle / aunt.=> .................................................................................................................
They / live / small / house / near / paddy field.
=> ................................................................................................................................................................................
There / big / yard / flower garden / front / house.
=> ................................................................................................................................................................................
left / house / there / be / well.=> .....................................................................................................................
Behind / house / there / be / mountains / tall trees.
=> ................................................................................................................................................................................
Is it beautiful? I will send you a photo of it with the letter.
Part 10: Điền một từ thích hợp vào mỗi chỗ trống trong lá thư sau.
Dear Alice ,
Today is the first day of the school term. I have just got my new timetable. The first lesson (1)______ English . This lesson begins (2)______ nine o’clock and finishes at ten (3)_______ ten. The next lesson is Geography and then we have a break . The break lasts (4)______ twenty to eleven (5)_______ five to eleven . The two lessons (6)_______ the break are Spanish and Maths .
Tomorrow we have Physics (7)_______ the break and then History and English (8) _______ . Thusday we have my favourite subject (9)_______ ten fifty-five and twelve thirty-five. The (10)______ twenty lessons each week but they all take place (11)_______ the morning. We are all very tired by lunchtime . Love ,
Lala
Part 11: Cho dạng đúng của các từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành những câu sau.
Dave and I are having the (1-good) ________ holiday of our lives ! We are in Barbados , one of the (2- lovely ) ________ islands in the Caribean . Although it is much (3- small)______ than Jamaica , there seems to be ( 4- much)________ to do than in Jamaica . Moreover , the people here seem to be (5-friendly) ________ than those on the other islands . We are staying in the ( 6- mordern)_________ hotel I have ever seen . It’s large and cool , and many people think it is the (7 –good) _________ hotel on the island . It’s far (8- comfortable) _________ than any of the other hotels , and it’s even (9-big)____ than the world famous Belton Hotel . The (10- near) ________ beach is (11-little)_________ than a hundred metres away , and so we can go swimming a lot . It’s really good , and I do wish you were here .
ENGLISH TEST 30
I. Read the passage carefully and then answer the following questions.
Our visitors like doing many things . On a typical day they have breakfast in the hotel restaurant , an English breakfast of eggs , bacon , tea , and toast . After breakfast they visit the Houses of Parliament and Buckingham Palace and go shopping in Harrods . They come back to the hotel at four o’clock and have tea and relax . Then in the evening they go to the theatre .
We work long hours. I work from six o’clock in the morning till three in the afternoon , and Isabel works from six in the evening till one in the morning, but we love our work . We like meeting people of all nationalities .
0. Jack’s wife is Isabel . T
1. Jack’s wife is Tippit F
2. A lot of foreign visitors come to the hotel. _______
3. Both Jack and Isabel speak French and German . _______
4. Both Isabel and Jack want to learn Japanese. _______
5. The visitors have breakfast in bed in the hotel . _______
6. They visit the Houses of Parliament in the morning _______
7. They like shopping in Buckingham Palace _______
8. They have tea in the hotel. _______
9. They relax in the evening . _______
10. Jack and Isabel don’t like their work . _______
11. They work all day . _______
II Fill in each blank with the suitable given word
For many young people sport is a popular part of school life and (1)____ in one of the school teams and playing in matches is very important . (2)_____ someone is in a team it means a lot of extra practice and often spending a Saturday or Sunday away (3)______ home , as many matches are played then.
It (4)______ also involve travelling to other towns to play against other school teams and then (5)_____ on after the match for a meal or a drink . Sometimes parents , friends or other students will travel with the team to support (6)_____ own side .
When a school team wins a match it is the whole school feeling proud , (7)______ only the players . It can also mean that a school (8)_______ well-known for being good at certain sports and pupils from that school may end up playing (9)_______ national and international teams so that the school has some (10)______ names associated with it .
III Fill in each blank with one suitable word
There are two long (1)______ in VietNam. The Red river is 1,200 kms long. It (2)______ in China and flows to the Gulf (3)____ Tonkin.
The (4)______ river is longer than the Red river . It starts in Tibet and flows to the Bien Dong .
The River Amazon is the (5)_______river in the world . It is 6,750 kilometres long . It starts in Peru and flows to the Atlantic Ocean .
Everest is the tallest (6)_______ in the world . It is 8,863 metres (7)____ Vietnam has (8)_______ mountains . The Truong Son is the (9)______ range of mountains . (10)_______ Vietnam mountains are smaller than Everest .
IV. Fill in each blank with the suitable given word
clean are lots live and
for sell prices city goods
Singapore is an island city of about three million people. It's a beautiful (1) ........... with lots of parks and open spaces. It's also a very (2) ................. city.
Most of the people (3) ................ in high rise flats in different parts of the island. The business district is very modern
with (4) ........... of high new office buildings. Singapore also has some nice older sections. In China town, there (5) ................. rows of old shop houses. The Government buildings in Singapore are very beautiful (6)................. date from the colonial days.
Singapore is famous (7).......... its shops and restaurants. There are many good shopping centers. Most of the (8) .......... are duty free. Singapore's restaurants (9) ........ Chinese, Indian, Malay and European food, and the (10) ............ are quite reasonable.
V. Choose the best answer.
1. My father is..................... man.
A. a old B. an old C. not young D. not very young
2. I’m tired. I’d like..................... .
A. sit down B. sitting down C. to sit down D. to sitting down
3. Do you have any toothpaste? I’d like a large ..................... .
A. tin B. roll C. bar D. tube
4. What is the ............of that river?
A. long B. wide C. length D. heavy
5. Bangkok is ..................... capital of Thailand.
A. a B. one C. X D. the
6. There are ..................... girls in his class.
A. not B. no C. none D. any
7. ..................... she plays the piano!
A. How beautiful B. How beautifully C. What good D. What well
8. Which word has the final sound /s/:
A. bananas B. carrots C. apples D. guavas
9. I don’t want much sugar in coffee. Just ....................., please.
A. little B. a little C. few D. a few
10. The weather is ..................... today than yesterday.
A. much better B. very better C. too better D. so better
11. ______ trash over there.
A. Don’t throw B. Not throw C. Throw D. Can’t throw
12. There is _____ oil in the bottle . We should buy some more .
A. little B. a little C. few D. a few
13. ______ fruit does your father produce?
A. How much B. How many C. How long D. How often
14. What would you like to do at the weekend?
A. I like to do a lot B. I can’t do it C. I’d like to do D. I don’t like the weekend
15. What about ______ a cup of coffee?
A. A have B. having C. you have D. do you have
16. The weather often ______ quickly. It is difficult to forecast .
A. change B. changes C. is changing D. is going to change
17. When it becomes hot , people often fell ______
A. hungry B. thirsty C. happy D. worried
18. My brother wants a good pair of shoes because he often goes ______
A. jogging B. running C. swimming D. sailing
19 . None of these trains stop at Ramsey. They _____ stop at Ramsey .
A. sometimes B. usually C. never D. rarely
20.The sign says “No smoking “ . You ______ smoke .
A. can B. are not C. must not D. must
21. Do you like pop music?
A. I would B. Yes, a lot C. No, I like it D. Yes , we are
22.Let’s go to the concert at New College.
A. All right B. You’re going C. We go D. Goodbye
23 . I’m playing table tennis. _______ you like table tennis?
A.Have B .Is C. Are D. Do
24 . There is an English examination ______ Friday, 11th December .
A. at B. in C. to D. on
25 .______ do the buses run? - Every twenty minutes .
A. How far B. What time C. How often D. How much
26. What time _____ back ?
A. is she coming B. comes she C. she does come D. does she comes
27. The students have got ______ news about their exams .
A. many B. some C. a D. a few
28 . The boy looks a little thin, ______ he is strong.
A. and B. for C. or D. but
29. Mary and _______ would like to join the English Club speaking .
A. me B. my C. mine D. I
30 . The clothes are _______ cleaner than the others .
A. as B. very C. so D. much
VI. Rearrange the sentences to make a dialogue.
Mr. Hung: (1)…………………………………children?
Mrs. Nga: They’re in their room.
Mr. Hung: (2) …………………………………………….television?
Mrs. Nga: No. They are in bed.
Mr. Hung: (3)…………………………………………………….?
Mrs. Nga: Reading? No, they aren’t. They are asleep.
Mr. Hung: (4)……………………………………………………..?
Mrs. Nga: Hoang? He’s writing a postcard and watching TV at the same time.
Mr. Hung: (5)……………………………………………………..?
Mrs. Nga: He’s watching a movie.
VIII. Complete the dialogue with the cues given.
Salesgirl: Good / Can I …..(1)……………………………..?
Nam: Yes / I’d / rice / meat. (2)
Salesgirl: How much / want? (3)
Nam: Two kilos / rice / half / kilo (4)
Salesgirl: Is / anything else ? (5)
Nam: Yes / 2 bottles / milk / 6 apples (6)
Salesgirl: OK. Here / are (7)
Nam: How? (8)
Salesgirl: Fifty thousand dong.
Nam: This/ one hundred dong (9)
Salesgirl: Here/ change (10)
Nam: Thank you.
IX. Fill in each gap with a QUESTION WORD.
1………………is the weather like in Viet Nam in the summer?
2………………sausage do you want?_2 kilos please.
3………………oranges are there in the fridge? _There are five.
4………………do you usually do on Sunday?
5………………does David always go in the morning?
6………………do you travel to work everyday? _By bus, of course.
7………………is it? _It’s five past eight.
8………………is her hair? _It’s yellow.
9………………does he feel? _Tired and thirsty.
10……………..don’t we go swimming? _Yes, that’s a good idea.
VI. Fill in each gap with a word given.
bring do have help play see stay take visit watch
1.What are you and your family going to………………………..this weekend?
2.We’re going to……………the museum next Saturday
3.Is Mr. Minh going to ………….badminton?
4.She’s going to……………with her uncle in the country
5.I’m going to…….a new film with my friend
6.We are going to………..dinner with them
7.Are you going to……………….Mom do the housework?
8.Van and Hiep are going to……………..a football match
9.Nam’s going to…………some photos
10.Tuan and his brother are going to……………..some food and drinks
VII. Fill in each gap with a word given.
I live in a small house in Hanoi. I ________(1) English at a school _____(2). I usually ___________(3) breakfast at seven in the morning and I have ___________(4) at twelve o’clock in the canteen of the school. I teach ___________(5) students in the morning. I teach them dialogues _______________(6) Wednesdays and Fridays. On _________(7) I teach them grammar. In the evening I ___________(8) stay at home and ___________(9) to the radio. I sometimes go to the ___________(10) theater. I always go to bed at ten o’clock.
VIII. Which word has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others?
1. A. window B. flow C. how D. show
2. A. hungry B. thirsty C. finally D. recycle
3. A. mouth B. weather C. thick D. throw
4. A. language B. engineer C. sausage D. jogging
5. A. ground B. should C. about D. mountain
IX. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses.
What is the (high)……………of that mountain? – About 2000 meters.
How many (child)……………..do you have, Mr. Nam?
Lan is the (small)……………………of the three girls.
Jane is the (young)………………of the two girls.
There are ten (bookshelf)…………………….in the library.
The country is (quiet)…………….than the city.
Which color do you like (good)…………….?
We must (take) ………..an umbrella. It (rain)……………..
Nga doesn’t like (China)………………..food.
The weather is becoming (cold)………………
We must be (care)........................... when we cross the road.
This tree has a lot of green (leaf)....................................
Is your father a (business).............................?
I’m Vietnamese. What’s your (nation)......................................?
Air (pollute)......................... is a big problem in many cities in the world.
The photocopy is between the (bake)..........................and the drugstore.
Is your brother an (act).........................................?
Mai's sister is a (sing).......................................
Yoko is from Japan. She is (Japan)................................
She is (beautiful)……………………than her sister.
X. Rewrite sentences as directed.
30 ĐỀ ÔN LUYỆN HSG TIẾNG ANH LỚP 6
ENGLISH TEST 01
I. Chän tõ cã c¸ch ph¸t ©m kh¸c víi nh÷ng tõ cßn l¹i
1, A. ground B. should C. about D .mountain
2. A. tables B. noses C. boxes D. changes
3. A. son B. sugar C. soup D. sing
4. A. brush B. museum C. lunch D. drugstore
5. A. play B. says C. day D. stay
6. A. orange B. cabbage C. lemonade D. sausage
7. A. chest B. lunch C. bench D. school
8. A. noodles B. shoulders C. packets D. tomatoes
9. A. clown B. down C. own D. town
10.A. intersection B. eraser C. bookstore D. history
II. Chän tõ cã träng ©m nhÊn kh¸c víi c¸c tõ cßn l¹i.
1. A. beautiful B. vegetable C. breakfast D. apartment
2. A. toothpaste B. sandwich C. cartoon D. chocolate
3. A. aerobic B. activity C. badminton D. basketball
4. A. visit . unload C. receive D.correct
5. A. police B. gymnast C. teacher D. farmer
6. A. different B. dangerous C. difficult D. delicious
III. S¾p xÕp c¸c tõ s¸o trén thµnh c©u hoµn chØnh cã nghÜa
1. Lunch / a / grandfather / after / always / sleep / has.
…………………………………….…………………………………
2. famous / reading / I / people / about / like / books.
………………………………………………………………………….…
3. to work / she / how / travel / does / morning / every?
………………………………………………………………………….…
4. practice / you / every day / should / speaking / English.
………………………………………………………………………….…
5. listen/ she's/ and/ going/ to/ pop music/ book/ read/ to/ a.
………………………………………………………………………….…
IV. ViÕt l¹i c©u cho nghÜa kh«ng thay ®æi
1. That book belongs to Nam. ->That is………………………………………………………………….……
2.What is the age of Peter ?-> How ……………………………………………………………………… ?
3.No one in our class is taller than Nam .-> Nam is the ………………………………………………………
4. Mr. Hung drives very carefully.->Mr. Hung is ...............................................................................................
5. Does your father cycle to work?->Does your father get ..............................................................................?
6.Why don’t we go to the movies tonight?-> What about…………………………………..………………..?
7. She doesn’t have classes on Sunday .-> She never…………………………..…………………………….
8. How wide is BaDinh square->What.............................................................................................................?
10 Reading is more boring than watching TV->Watching Tv is more...............................................................
V. Chän ®¸p ¸n ®óng nhÊt trong c¸c ®¸p ¸n A, B, C, hoÆc D.
1. My father is ........ man.
A. a old B. an old C. not young D. not very young
2. What was the matter with him? He …….. a toothache
A. to have B. have C. has D. had
3. Do you have any toothpaste? I’d like a large ...................
A. tin B. roll C. bar D. tube
4. What ..... does Peter study at school? - He has Maths, English, Art….
A. objects B. subjects C. food D. drink
5. Bangkok is ............. capital of Thailand.
A. a B. one C. X D. the
6. There are ................. girls in his class.
A. not B. no C. none D. any
7. ......... she plays the piano!
A. How beautiful B. How beautifully C. What good D. What well
8. On .... we often go out.
A. nights of Saturday B. Saturday nights C. Saturday’s nights D. none is correct
9. I don’t want much sugar in coffee. Just ........., please.
A. little B. a little C. few D. a few
10. The weather is ..................... today than yesterday.
A. much better B. very better C. too better D. so better
11. A. Always they do their homework. B. They always do their homework.
C. They do their homework always. D. They always do their homeworks.
12. Why do you like Music? Because I like …..
A. to read B. to draw C. to write D. to sing
13. It’s very hot. Why ...... go swimming?
A. not we B. not C. don’t we D. Both B & C are correct
14. At an intersection, you ....... slow down.
A. can B. should C. must D. have
15. Which word has the final sound /s/:
A. bananas B. carrots C. apples D. guavas
16. Don’t move. You have a .............. leg.
A. break B. breaking C. broke D. broken
17. If there aren’t any trash cans, we should put it in a bag and ..................... .
A. take it to our home B. take it to home C. take it home D. take it back our house
18. Make sure ........... is no traffic.
A. they B. it C. there D. some
19. Let’s eat here. The ............. seems very good.
A. list B. paper C. programme D. menu
20. Don’t ..................... electricity.
A. save B. waste C. use D. leave
VI. §Æt cau hái cho tõ g¹ch dưới.
1.He often does his homework in the evening.
………………………………………………………………………….…
2.She is practicing the piano
………………………………………………………………………….…
3.I usually play soccer after school
………………………………………………………………………….…
4.We are going to stay there for a week.
………………………………………………………………………….…
5.Minh goes swimming with his friends
………………………………………………………………………….…
6.I wait for my friends everyday.
………………………………………………………………………….…
7.The children are in the library.
………………………………………………………………………….…
8.He has math on Monday and Thursday.
………………………………………………………………………….…
9.She buys some milk at the store
………………………………………………………………………….…
10.It is 2kilometers from my house to the market.
………………………………………………………………………….…
VII. Cho d¹ng ®óng cña ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc.
1.He (do) ............................. our work now. But he will go with you when he (finish) ………..it.
2.On my way home I often (meet) ………. many children who (go) ………….to school.
3.The sun (rise) …………… in the east and (set) ………………… in the west.
4. Mary (not work) ……………………today because it's Sunday.
5. My father and I (visit) …………………….Ha Long Bay this summer vacation.
6. You mustn’t (eat) ………………..food in the classroom.
7. Let’s (help)…………….. mom, Lan. She (clean)……………… the floor.
8. Look! The plane (fly) ………………..towards the airport. It (land) ……………………..
9. Why we (not/ go)…………………………………….. to Ha Long Bay this summer?
10.What(be) …………….there ( eat)…………………………………
VIII. Cho d¹ng ®óng cña tõ in hoa:
2.She sent her best wishes for my future…… .(HAPPY) ………………………..
3. The ……………of this tree are very green and beautiful. ( LEAF ) ………………………..
4. Mr Pike lives on the ……………floor of this building . ( NINE) ………………………..
5.The coffee is too……….for me to drink. ( HEAT ) …………………………
6. Who is the............................person in the world? (rich) .....................................
7. What is the...................mountain in the world? (HIGH) ………………………
8. He is a famous football................................ (PLAY). …………………….
9. They are ........................... to their teacher (TALK). ……………………..
10. English is an ....................and important subject.(INTEREST) ………………………
IX. T×m- g¹ch ch©n lçi sai vµ söa l¹i cho ®óng.
1. That's my aunt over there. She stands near the window…………………………………..
2. Sorry, you can't speak to Jenny. She's have a bath. ……………………………………
3. Nam likes read books in the library …………………………………..
4. What time does Thu has science class? ……………………………………..
5. Nam's grandparents lives in the old house with his uncle and aunts………………………………
6.She has a little friends in the city. …………………………………….
7.How many time a week do you wash your clothes? ……………………………………….
8.What is the long of this river ? …………………………………………
X. §iÒn giíi tõ thicchs hîp vµo chç trèng.
1. There is a big tree.........................my garden.
2. Wait....................me.......................the school-gate, please.
3. Her birthday is..................August the third. She always gets a lot of presents .................her birthday.
4. I want to stay.........................home this evening. What's.......................TV?
5. New Year's Day is...............................January 1st.
6. He's not very good.......................repairing things.
7. We often have two days off ....................... weekends.
XI. §äc ®o¹n v¨n vµ lµm theo híng dÉn.
The Vietnamese students take part in different after – school activities. Some students plays sports. They often play soccer, table tennis or badminton. Sometimes they go swimming pools . Some students like music and movies. They often practice musical instruments in the school music room.They join in the school theater group and usually rehearse plays.Some are members of the stamp collector ‘s club. They often get together and talk about their stamps. A few students stay at home and play video games or computer games. Most of them enjoy their activities after school hours
1. Chän True (T) or False (F):
a. The Vietnamese students take part in different activities…………………
b. All the students plays sports. ……………….
c. They never go swimming in the pool. ……………….
d. Some students like movies. ………………..
2. Tr¶ lêi c©u hái:
a. How often do you rehearse plays?
………………………………………………………………………….…
b. What do the members of the stamps collector’s club often do?
………………………………………………………………………….…
c. Do Vietnamese students enjoy their activities?
………………………………………………………………………….…
d. Do you often go to the movies after school?
………………………………………………………………………….…
XII. ViÕt mét ®o¹n v¨n ng¾n vÒ trêng cña b¹n ( 8-10 c©u )
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
ENGLISH TEST 02
I. Tìm từ không cùng nhóm với từ còn lại.
1. a. Wednesday b. everyday c. Friday d. Thursday
2. a. third b. two c. twelve d. thirty
3. a. history b. English c. literature d. timetable
4. a.finish b. read c. watch d. soccer
5. a. evening b. morning c. homework d. afternoon
II. Chọn đáp án đúng cho mỗi câu sau.
1. …………… sports do you play?
a. How b. Who c. Which d. What’s
2. My mother wants a good pair of shoes because she often goes ………….
a. jogging b. fishing c. sailing d. running
3. He often …………….. his kite when he’s not busy.
a. does b. plays c. goes d. flies
4. How ......................... kilos of beef does she want?
a. many b. much c. any d. about
5. “Is that your father?” - “Yes, .........................”
a. it is b. that is c. he is d. it’s
6. “Would you like some noodles, Lan?” - “No, .........................I’m full. Thanks.”
a. I wouldn’t b. I don’t c. I’m not d. I don’t like
7. There is …………………….. oil in this bottle. We should buy some more.
a. a few b. few c. little d. a little
8. Can I help you? - …………., please. I need a kilo of beef.
a. Sorry b. Yes c. Can d. No
9. Minh …………… likes fish and beef.
a. isn’t b. don’t c. doesn’t d. never
10. He goes to work six days a week. He ………………..…. goes to work.
a. always b. usually c. often d. never
11. ............................ are you going to spend your summer vacation?
a. Where b. Which c. What d. Who
12. Let’s ................................. some photos.
a. to take b. takes c. taking d. take
13. Why don’t we go to the cinema tonight?
a. Because we don’t like film b. That’s a good idea
c. You are right d. Thank you very much
14. We are going to stay..................................... my uncle’s house.
a. in b. at c. with d. on
15 ....................................to go for a walk?
a. How about b. Would you like c. Why don’t d. Let’s
16. “How ..................... oranges would you like” - “A dozen, please. And ..................... tea.”
a. much, some b. many, any c. much, any d. many, some
17. I don’t like vegetables but my sister .........................
a. do b. likes c. does d. would like
18. Ba ………….lunch at school.
a. does b. has c. have d. eat
19.What time……….classes start ?
a. do b. does c. it d. are
20.Lan’s brother…………..volleyball now.
a. playing b. plays c. is playing d
III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc.
1. What they (do) .............tonight? - They (listen)................. to music on the radio.
2. Your brother (can, swim)............. ? - Yes, he can. He (swim)............. very well.
3. He (be)…….......... tired and he’d like (sit)……........ down.
4. Hoa (not do)............. her homework in the afternoon. She (do)............. it in the evening.
5. Look! The plane (fly)..................... towards the airport. It (land).........................
IV. Điền giới từ thích hợp cho mỗi câu sau.
1. I live (1) ………………… a small house (2) ………………… the countryside.
2. My house is (3) ………………… a bookstore and a toystore: the bookstore to the left and the toys tore to the right.
3 .Miss Mai wants a kilo ……………… (4) meat and a dozen (5) …………… eggs.
4.Nga goes (6) …………… school (7) ……………foot every morning and she goes (8) ………… home (9) ……… four thirty in the afternoon.
5. Who do you usually play badminton (10) …………………?
V. Cho dạng đúng của từ ttrong ngoặc.
1. There are lots of (beauty) ……………………beaches in Viet Nam.
2. Is Mr.Ha a (business) ……………………………………………..?
3. September is the (nine)......................................... month of the year.
4. My father goes (jog)..............................................every morning.
5. She has small white (tooth) ……………………......................... .
VI. Tìm và sửa lỗi sai.
My brother are working in the city.
Mr Minh rides his bike to work at the moment.
I don’t have some oranges, but I have some bananas.
How many homework does Lien have everyday?
What would you like buying at the canteen?
I go to Ha Long tomorrow.
The children play games usually in the afternoon.
It’s often cold in the summer.
How many season are there in a year?
We need eight hundred gram of meat.
VII. Em hãy điền một từ thích hợp để hoàn thành lá thư sau.
Dear Mai,
I am visiting Ha Long Bay with my family ...................… June 12th to 20th……………… you have a double room with a shower for these days? How ………..… is the room? We would like ….…….…… room facing the sea if it is possible. We …… eat meat but we ……………… all other kinds of food. We are arriving ………… Ha Long Bay …………..… about six o’clock on Monday evening. We plan to leave the hotel ……………Sunday morning.
I …………..… forward to hearing from you soon.
Love
Nga.
VIII. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân.
1. You can go to the supermarket to buy beef ..........................................................................................
2. Lan goes to school with her friends. ........................................................................................................
3. They go to the zoo every weekend..................................................................................................................
4. I’d like some beef...................................................................................................................
5. She is going to stay there for two days. ..............................................................................................
6. My daughters do aerobics every morning............................................................................
7. This bar of soap is 8000 dong..................................................................................................................
8. His pencils are brown.......................................................................................................
9. Lan is going to live in China...........................................................................................................
10. They are going to paint their house..........................................................................................................
11. We want two English books...................................................................................................................
IX. Sắp xếp các câu sau thành đoạn hội thoại hợp lí.
- Thanks. How much are they?
- Can I help you?
- How many oranges do you want?
- I’d like some oranges.
- Half a dozen, please .
- Yes. I’d like a bottle of cooking oil.
- Is there anything else?
- Here you are.
- Ten thousand dong. ………Thank you.
ENGLISH TEST 03
Question I: Choose the word which is pronounced differently from the others.
| 1. | A. chemistry | B. chair | C. couch | D. children |
| 2. | A. student | B. bus | C. duty | D. unit |
| 3. | A. house | B. about | C. country | D. our |
| 4. | A. clothes | B. watches | C. benches | D. classes |
| 5. | A. clock | B. come | C. class | D. city |
| 1. A. teacher | B. brother | C. farmer | D. doctor |
| 2. A. watches | B. brushes | C. teaches | D. goes |
| 3. A. meat | B. fish | C. beef | D. tea |
| 4. A. knee | B. gray | C. nose | D. toe |
| 5. A. have | B. eat | C. is | D. play |
1. ……………..straight across the road.
A. Don’t run B. Not run C. No run D. Can’t run
2. I learn music………………. : on Mondays and Fridays.
A. two times a week B. once a week
C. one a week D. twice a week
3. Which month is ……………? May or June.
A. hottest B. hotter C. more hot D. hot than
4. She doesn’t have ………..friends at school.
A. a B. some C. many D. much
5. Why don’t we go camping? ………… a good idea.
A. Let’s B. That’s C. It D. With
6. There are five …………. in one hand.
A. fingers B. arms C. toes D. feet
7. We……….. stop when the light is red.
A. can’t B. can C. mustn’t D. must
8. What is your favourite food?
A. I favourite chicken B. My favourite food chicken
C. Chicken favourite me D. I like chicken best.
9. Linda ……… her hair every day.
A. washes B. wash C. clean D. cleans
10 .How many minutes are there in………… hour?
A. a B. an C. the D. these
11. Does Mrs. Mai go to school _______ car? - Yes, she does.
A. on B. in C. by D. of
12. Is he good __________ Physics and Math?
A. for B. at C. on D. in
13. I can’t speak French but my brother __________.
A. can B. can’t C. does D. doesn’t
14. My mother always wants me __________ the piano well.
A. to play B. playing C. play D. to playing
15. Who _____________ you English?
A. teach B. does teach C. do teach D. teaches
Question IV. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets
1. Where is your mother? – She is in the kitchen. She ______(cook) the dinner.
2. Your mother ______ (go) to school by bus every day?
3. Don’t talk so loudly, please! My son_______(sleep) in the next room.
4. She _______(not be) hungry and she _______(not want) any rice.
5. Look! The plane (fly) ............................ toward to the airport. It(land)..........................
6. Take these medicines and you ( feel ) ……………….. better then, Ha .
7. I …………..(have) a birthday party tomorrow evening. Would you like ………..(come)?
Question V. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in brackets (10p).
| 1. Don’t make a fire here. It’s very ….. …….. | DANGER | →.............................. |
| 2. There are a lot of _______ mountains in our country. | BEAUTY | →.............................. |
| 3. My neighborhood is _______ for good and cheap restaurants. | FAME | →.............................. |
| 4. I need two _______ for cooking the dinner. | KNIFE | →.............................. |
| My parents are______. They usually work in the factory | WORK | →.............................. |
| 6. The children like _______ weather | SUN | →.............................. |
| 7. Let him do it_______. | HE | →.............................. |
| 8. We don’t like going in his car as he is a________ driver. | CARE | →.............................. |
| 9. Mary likes attending the English _______ contests. | SPEAK | →.............................. |
| 10. What does your father do? - He is a _______. | POLICE | →.............................. |
1. A. lamp B. table C. family D. bag
2. A. copy B. post C. body D. orange
3. A. weak B. head C. heavy D. breakfast
4. A. bean B. please C. near D. read
5. A. foot B. toothpaste C. floor D. look
Question V. Each of the following sentences has one mistake. Identify and correct the mistakes
1. Ba often does his homeworks in the evening.
2. They aren’t go to bed at 9 o’clock.
3.That’s my sister over there. She stands near the window.
4. Her garden is big. It’s a garden big.
5. He’s waiting to the bus at the moment.
6. My father never have lunch at home.
7. We need eight hundred gram of beef.
8. Do you know how many teachers does your school have?
9. How long are you going to staying in Vietnam?
10. Would you like any sugar? – Yes , please.
Question VI.Choose the best option (a,b,c or d) to complete the passage.
It’s Sunday morning . The Browns are sitting in (1)……… living room. They are talking (2)…….. the dinner this evening. David likes beef and Susan does ,too. He says that beef (3)……..good for children. Their father, Mr. Brown , prefer chicken to beef . He asks his wife to buy (4)…….. for him. Helen , their youngest daughter doesn’t want any meat .She would (5)……….. cakes and sweets. Mrs. Brown doesn’t like beef . She doesn’t like chicken, either. She likes fish, vegetables and fruit. She says that fish and vegetables (6)…………. good for old men and every body (7)………. to eat fruit.
At last they decide to go out (8)…….dinner (9)………..Mrs. Brown says that she can’t cook so(10)…………food for every body in the family.
1.A. the B.a C.an D. to
2. A. with B. for C. about D. to
3.A . are B. has C. does D. is
4. A. little B. some C. any D. none
5. A. like B. likes C.have D. has
6. A. is B. have C.are D. do
7. A. need B. needs C. are D. have
8. A. to B.of C. with D. for
9. A. because B. but C. so D. and
10. A. many B. little C. much D. lots of
Question VII: Fill in the blank of the following passage with ONE suitable word
I _______(1) in a house near the sea. It is_______ (2) old house, about 100 _______(3) old and it's very small. _______(4) are two bed rooms upstairs but no bathroom. The bathroom iis down stairs, next to the kitchen and there _______(5) a living room where there is a lovely old fire place. There is a _______(6) in front of the house. The garden _______(7) down to the beach and in Spring and Summer there are flowers every where. I like alone _______(8) my dog, Rack, but we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with me.
I love my house for many _______(9): the garden, the flowers in Summer, the fire in Winter, but the best thing is the view _______ (10) my bedroom window.
.Question VIII.Rewrite each of the following sentences in such a way that it means exactly the same as
1. Huong’school bag is new.
ð Huong has ………………………………………………………………………………..…..
2. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms?
ð Are……………………………………………………………………………………………?
3. Phuong has a brother ,Nam.
ð Phuong………………………………………………………………………………………
4. No house on the street is older than this house.
ð This house…………………………………………………………………………….………
5. How many apples does she want?
ð How many apples would……………………………………………………………………..?
6. Learning how to use a computer is very easy
ð It is …………. …………………………………………….…………….……………………
7. He drives very carefully
ð He is ..…………………………………………….……………………………………………
8. Why don’t we listen to music tonight?
ð How about …………………………………………….……………………………..………
9. How much is this dictionary ?ð What ...........................................................................................
10.It’s often hot in the summer.ð It’s never......................................................................................................................
Question IX. Rearrange the words given into the meaning sentences
1. yard/ front/ school/There/ big/ of/ is/ our/ in/ a.
......................................................................................................................................................
2. many/ right/ the/ museum/ Are/ flowers/ the/ there/ to/ of/?
......................................................................................................................................................
3. next/ photocopy/ What/ store/ there/ the/ is/ to /?
......................................................................................................................................................
4. hospital/ father/ in/ the/ city/ My/ a/ works/ in.
......................................................................................................................................................
5. there/ family/ many/ in/ are/ How/ Linh’s/ people/ ?
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
Question X. Using the cues to complete the sentences.
- Lan/ Ly/ go/ bookstore/ buy/ books/ now.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………...
3. Many / plants/ animals/ danger/ because /we /destroying /them.
…………………………………….……………………………………………………………
4. There/ peas/ but / not/ potatoes.
→............................................................................................................................................
5.She/ like /dozen/ eggs/ vegetables.
→..........................................................................................................................................
ENGLISH TEST 04
I. Choose the best options to complete the sentences.
1. ..………………. your teacher?- Yes, she is very kind.
A. Do you like B. Do you want C. Would you like D. How is
2. My father is……………………..man.
A. a old B. an old C. not young D. not very young
3. I need some tea. Please give me a……………… of tea.
A. bottle B. bar C. tube D. packet
4. We are waiting……………... a bus.
A. to B. of C.for D. at
5. Is there any……………….in the bottle?- Yes, there is some.
A. peas B.carrots C.milk D.beans
6. Does your brother………………..any games?- No, he doesn’t.
A. play B. plays C. playing D. to play
7. I don’t like vegetables but my sister……………………
A. do B. likes C. does D. would like
8. Would you like some biscuits, Lan?-No,……………..I’m full.
A. I wouldn’t B. I don’t C. thanks D. I don’t like
9. How do they want ………………to work?- By minibus.
A. to go B. to travel C. to walk D. Both a and b
10. …………………………….tonight?- Nothing.
A.What are you do B. What do you do
C. What are you going to do D. Both a and b
11. ………………….go to the zoo?- That’s a good idea!
A. What do we B. Would we like to C.Why don’t we D.Are we going to
12. We need …………… water.
A. blue B. fresh C. green D. red
13. …………………are you going to stay with?- My sister and my brother.
A. Who B. Where C. How D. How long
14. There are four seasons …………a year……………are they?
A. in/Which B. at/What C. in/What D. on/Which
15. The opposite of “weak” is………………..
A. strong B.thin C. heavy D. small
16. My grandparents are old, they don’t like……………..because it’s very cold.
A. summer B. fall C. spring D. winter
17. He usually goes swimming once………………………..
A. the week B. a week C. all weeks D. in the week
18. The room of my parents is small. “The room of my parents” means:
A. my room’s parents B. my parents’s room
C. my parents’ room D. my room’parent
19. How…………..oranges would you like?- Six, please. And …………..tea.
A. much/some B. many/any C. much/any D. many/some
20. Does Mary like …………….?- Yes, she goes jogging every morning.
A. jog B. to jog C. jogs D. jogging
21. The children are playing………………..the garden.
A. in B. on C. under D. at
22. Don’t be late ……… your school!
A. in B. for C. at D. on
23. We go there by car and they go…………foot.
A. on B. by C. to D. with
24. How much is a bowl of noodles?-……………..five thousand five hundred dong.
A. They are B. It is C. It has D. There is
25. He is…………….English at a big school.
A. teach B. teaches C. teacher D. teaching
26. I want a ……………..of orange juice.
A. can B. box C. tube D. bar
27. I’d like some meat, please. How much……………………………?
A. do you like B. do you want C. you’d like D. you need
28. They are going to stay ……………….their grandparents in the country.
A. in B. to C. at D. with
29. It’s a lovely day! Let’s……………….to the beach.
A. go B. to go C. going D. we go
30. Listen! ………………to your sister?
A.Who is going to talk B. Who talks
C.Who does talk D .Who is talking
II. Put the words into the correct word forms
31. It’s very …………… in the city. (noise)
32. There is a …………… next to my house. (bake)
33. She is a …………… of English. (teach)
34. I brush my …………… twice a day. (tooth)
35. Long goes …………… at the weekend. (fish)
36. Their house is on the …………… floor of the building. (two)
37. Hanoi is …………… than Thai Binh (big)
38. Do you …………… play video games?. (usual)
39. This is the …………… house in my village. (beautiful)
40. Peter is a taxi…………………………. (drive)
- III. Put the verbs into the correct verb forms
- 41. I (be) ………………………………… at school at the weekend.
- 42. Where (be)……………………………. your children?
- 43. Look! The girl ( come)……………………………..............
- 44. My life is so boring. I just (watch)………………….TV every night.
- 45. ………the children (skip)……………….......... in the yard now?
- 46. ………… he……….. (like) milk or tea?
- 47. Where is Nam?- He(watch)…………………… TV in his room at the moment.
- 48. I often go to school by bicycle but today I ……………….. (go) to school by bus
- 49. My best friend (write)………………………… me a letter every week.
- 50. I (not, like)…………………………….. coffee very much
51. I like watching TV. There are a good film on TV tonight.
A B C D
52. What is he often do when it’s hot?
A B C D
53. How much rooms are there in the new house?
A B C D
54. I’m very thirsty. I like some apple juice.
A B C D
55. How many children does your sister has?
A B C D
ENGLISH TEST 05
- I. Fill in the blanks with the suitable words:
- Mr.Bao is (1)………………. teacher at a big school. He is young, tall and thin. He is not weak. He is (2)…… He (3)…………….… morning exercises everyday. He lives (4)………………… a small house in Ha Noi. The school isn’t near (5)…………………… house, so he travels to work (6)……………… bus and he often (7)………….… his house at 7 o’clock. He works from Monday to Friday. On Thursdays and Sundays, he (8)… free time. (9)…………….… Sundays, he gets up at 8 o’clock, then he sits in the kitchen to have (10)……………… After that, he plays soccer. It’s his favorite sport. He goes to bed at ten o’clock.
- 11. ®…………………….. Miss Lien live in a small house in Hanoi.
- 12. ®……… ……………. She teaches English of a school there.
- 13. ®…………………….. She usually is breakfast at seven in the morning.
- 14. ®……………………. She eats lunch at twelve o’clock in the canteen of the school.
- 15. ®……… ……………. She teaches his students in the morning.
- 16. ®……… …………… She teaches them dialogue in Wednesday and Friday.
- 17. ®……… …………… On Mondays, she teaches it grammar.
- 18. ®……… …………... In the evening, she usually stay at home.
- 19. ®…………………….. Sometimes, she listens books.
- 20. ®………… ………… She always go to bed at ten o’clock.
| 1. | A. chemistry | B. chair | C. couch | D. children |
| 2. | A. student | B. bus | C. duty | D. unit |
| 3. | A. house | B. about | C. country | D. our |
| 4. | A. clothes | B. watches | C. benches | D. classes |
| 5. | A. clock | B. come | C. class | D. city |
7. A. change B. Christmas C. school D. chemistry
8. A. car B. city C. cook D. cake
9. A. flower B. town C. know D. brown
IV: Fill in the blank of the following passage with ONE suitable word :
I _______(1) in a house near the sea. It is_______ (2) old house, about 100 _______(3) old and it's very small. _______(4) are two bed rooms upstairs but no bathroom. The bathroom iis down stairs, next to the kitchen and there _______(5) a living room where there is a lovely old fire place. There is a _______(6) in front of the house. The garden _______(7) down to the beach and in Spring and Summer there are flowers every where. I like alone _______(8) my dog, Rack, but we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with me.
I love my house for many _______(9): the garden, the flowers in Summer, the fire in Winter, but the best thing is the view _______ (10) my bedroom window.
V. Rewrite each of the following sentences in such a way that it means exactly the same
1. Huong’school bag is new.ð Huong has ………………………………………………..…..
2. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms?ð Are…………………………………………………………?
3. Phuong has a brother, Nam.ð Phuong………………………………………………………………
4. No house on the street is older than this house.ð This house……………………………………………….………
5. How many apples does she want?ð How many apples would………………………………..?
6. Learning how to use a computer is very easyð It is ………………………….…………….……………………
7. He drives very carefullyð He is ..………….……………………………………………
8. Why don’t we listen to music tonight?ð How about ……………….……………………………..………
9. How much is this dictionary?ð What ............................................................................................................................
10.It’s often hot in the summer.ð It’s never...............................................................................................
VI. Rearrange the words given into the meaning sentences
1. yard/ front/ school/There/ big/ of/ is/ our/ in/ a.
......................................................................................................................................................
2. many/ right/ the/ museum/ Are/ flowers/ the/ there/ to/ of/?
......................................................................................................................................................
3. next/ photocopy/ What/ store/ there/ the/ is/ to /?
......................................................................................................................................................
4. hospital/ father/ in/ the/ city/ My/ a/ works/ in.
......................................................................................................................................................
5. there/ family/ many/ in/ are/ How/ Linh’s/ people/ ?
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
VII. Choose the best answer.
1. There are five …………. in one hand.
A. fingers B. arms C. toes D. feet
2. How..............................kilos of beef does she want?
A. many B. much C. often D. about
3. His father is waiting ..............................a bus.
A. to B. for C. of D. at
4. The room of my parents is small. “The room of my parents” means:
A. my room’s parents B. my parents’s room
C. my parents’ room D. my room’ parents
5. How.......................oranges would you like? - Six please. And ....................... tea.
A. much/some B. many/any C. much/any D. many/some
6. We go there by car and they go..................... foot.
A. on B. by C. to D. with
7. Listen! Who................................... to your sister?
A. is going to talk B. talks C. does talk D. is talking
8. .....................................go to the zoo? - That’s a good idea!
A. What do we B. Would you like C. Why don’t we D. Are we going to
9. Fall means ..............................in British English.
A. summer B. winter C. spring D. autumn
10. Don't forget to buy five .............. of bread!
A. bottles B. loaves C. cans D. bars
11. They buy some fruit but ............. vegetables.
A. some B. any C. little D. no
12. It's seven thirty and Minh is late ................ school.
A. for B. at C. to D. in
13. Lan combs her ............ every morning.
A. face B. nose C. hair D. mouth
14. There is a ............... water in the bottle.
A. much B. lot C. little D. few
15. Is there .............. else you want?
A. a B. an C. some D. anything
16. My sister and I ............................. television in the living - room now.
A. am watching B. are watching C. is watching D. watching
VIII. What do you say in these situations?
1. What do you say when you want to know the way to the post office?- "................"
2. What do you say when you want to go out? - "........................................................"
3. What do you say when you want to know the price of a book? - ".........................."
4. What do you say when you want to know the time now? - "..................................."
5. What do you say when you want to know the weather today? - "............................"
6. What do you say when you want to invite your friend home for dinner? - "..........."
7. What do you say when you want to borrow your friend's ruler? - "........................"
8. What do you say when you want to know your friend's phone number? - "............"
9. What do you say when you want to help someone? - "..........................................."
10. What do you say when you want to know the distance between Ha Noi and Da Nang? - "......................................................................................................................."
IX. Supply the correct form of the word in capital.
| 1. My birthday is on the ................................ of September. 2. There are four ..................................... in my bedroom. 3. The ........................language of Vietnam is Vietnamese. 4. In my ......................, there is a supermarket, a hotel and a park. 5. There are a lot of interesting............................ in the summer. 6. Viet Nam has plenty of ...................................... beaches. 7. Mount Everest is the ............................. mountain in the world. 8. Lan’s mother goes ................................... twice a week. 9. My parents work at a Secondary School. They are ...... of English. 10. I go to visit my grandparents ..................... a month. 11. He is a …………… person, so he sometimes has accidents. 12. He is ……………………in learning English. 13. They are good ............................................................... 14. He often plays sports. He is very .................................. 15. My classroom is on the ...... ……………….floor. 16.Has your sister got a .................. ? She looks tired. 17. This is my favorite chair. It’s so .......... 18. Nobody in my class is ......................than Thuy 19. This tree has a lot of green .................... . 20. His ambition is to be a ..................... one day. | TWENTY BOOKSHELF NATION NEIGHBOR ACT BEAUTY HIGH SHOP TEACH ONE CARE INTEREST STUDY SPORT THREE HEAD COMFORT GOOD LEAF MILLION |
ENGLISH TEST 06
I. Pick out the word whose underlined part in pronounced differently from
| 1. | A. | beach | B. | seat | C. | meat | D. | great |
| 2. | A. | boots | B. | floor | C. | toothpaste | D. | food |
| 3. | A. | idea | B. | year | C. | wear | D. | near |
| 4. | A. | camp | B. | plan | C. | plane | D. | badminton |
| 5. | A. | maps | B. | beds | C. | rooms | D. | taxis |
| 6. | A. | full | B. | summer | C. | sunny | D. | Sunday |
| 7. | A. | orange | B. | hot | C. | hobby | D. | nose |
| 8. | A. | sometimes | B. | washes | C. | benches | D. | couches |
| 9. | A. | ride | B. | night | C. | river | D. | tired |
| 10. | A. | teeth | B. | tree | C. | between | D. | engineer |
1. There are...................eggs in the fridge.
A. a lot B. a few C. a little D. little
2. What do you do .............................the weekend.
A. on B. in C to D. for
3. I am going .........Ha Long bay
A. visiting B. visit C. visited D. to visit
4. There isn’t _______milk in the bottle.
A. an B. a C. any D. some
5. How much is a _________of toothpaste.
A. can B. bar C. tube D. box
6. What about ______table-tennis?
A. to play B. playing C. plays D. play
7. Fall means ……………..in British-English.
A. summer B. winter C. autumn D. spring
8. What is her _____________? _ She is Australian.
A. language B. nationality C. population D. country
9. They are going _________vacation in London.
A. in B. on C. at D. for
10. ________languages can you speak?
A. When B. How C. How much D. Which
11. The Great Wall of China is the world’s _____structure.
A. long B. longer C. the longest D. longest
12. Ho Chi Minh has a ___________of 3.5 million.
A. city B. capital C. population D. country
13. I am Mary. I am __________ Great Britain.
A. to B. from C. at D. on
14. ______are you going to stay? _ In a hotel.
A. Which B. Where C. When D. What
15. Tomatoes, lettuce and potatoes are ………………
A. fruits B. vegetables C. drinks D. flowers
16. There is an intersection ahead. You must______ .
A. slow down B. go fast C. stop D. go ahead
17. There isn’t any water in the bottle. I am going to take ______.
A. many B. an C. any D. some
18. A. What is the matter with you? – B: ______
A. I go by bike B. I’m heavy C. I like chicken D. I’m tired
19. A: Would you like a glass of lemon juice? – B: ______
A. No, I’m not B. No, I don’t like C. No, thanks D. No. It’s too hot.
20. PETRONAS Twin Towers is the…………. building in the world.
A. tall B. taller C. tallest D. the tallest
21. Mai needs ……………………chocolates.
A. a bar of B. a packet of C. a box of D. a bottle of
22. He ……………………his bicycle at the moment.
A. rides B. is riding C. ride D. to ride
23. Phanxipang is the ……………………mountain in Viet nam.
A. high B. higher C. highest D. the highest
24……………………is the weather like?
A. How B. What C. Who D. How much
25.My house is as ……………………as Hoa’s house.
A. smaller B. small C. biggest D. bigger
26.We ……………………waste food and feed it to pigs.
A. damage B. collect C. leave D. throw
27.Chi is……………………girl in her class.
A. more beautiful B. the most beautiful C. beautiful D. a most beautiful
28.I’m going ……………………the Ngoc Son Temple tomorrow
A. see B. sees C. to see D.seeing
29.What ……………………you ……………………to do tomorrow?
A. does / go B.is / going C.are / going D. do / go
30. We shouldn’t ………… our environment.
A. destroying B. to destroy C. destroys D. destroy
31. He often ________ he ________ the kites when he isn’t busy?
A. does / flies B. does / fly C. does / play D. does / play
32. Why don’t we ________ to the movies? ~ That’s a good idea.
A. go B. to go C. going D. to going
33. Some people can speak many ________
A. countries B. nationalities C. languages D. speeches
34. There are four ________ in a year: spring, summer, fall and winter.
A. activities B. pastimes C. weathers D. seasons
35. Can I help you? ~ ________ please. I need a kilo of beef.
A. Yes B. Sorry C. Can D. No
36. Mr Thanh is a policeman. He has a ……………….job
A. fast B. careful C. difficult D. bad
37. Her sister has an…………face and long black …………
A. round - hairs B. long - hairs C. oval -hair D. oval - hairs
38. What are ………? …………..are his shoulders
A. those-These B. those-Those C. this-This D. those-This
39. How many oranges, Mom? ……… dozen, please
A. A half of B. Half a C. A half D. Half
40.You ……… eat too much meat. It isn’t good for your health.
A. should B. shouldn’t C. not D. don’t want
III. Supply the correct verb tense/ form of the verbs in the brackets.
1. Mrs Thu (do) …………… the housework every day. => ………………………………….
2. My brother (listen) ………………. to music now. => …………………………………….
3. They (visit)……………. Da Lat this summer vacation. => ………………………………….
4. Long is thirsty. He’d like (drink)………….. some water. => ………………………………...
5. Now they ( play ) …………soccer. => ………………………………….
6. He ( not go ) ………….fishing in the winter. => ………………………………….
7. You usually ( jog) ………in the morning? – Yes, I do. => ……………………………...
8. This summer vacation, my parents ( visit)……..to Hue. => ………………………………….
9. What about ( go) ……….to Nha Trang? => ………………………………….
10. We mustn’t (drive) fast on the street. => …………………………………..
IV. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets to complete each sentence.
1. It is very …………………………………….. in the city. NOISE
3. This is my favorite chair. It’s so ………………… . COMFORT
4. There is a ………………………. next to my house. BAKE
5. She is a ……………………. of English. TEACH
6. I brush my ……………….. twice a day. TOOTH
7. Long goes ……………….. at the weekend. SAIL
8. Their house is on the ………………… floor of the room. FIVE
9. Bac Giang is ………………………… than Ha Noi. SMALL
10. Do you ……………………… play video games? USUAL
V. Read the passage carefully and then answer the following questions.
My name is Petty and this is my husband, Phil. We both work in offices in London. We have breakfast at half past seven. We don’t have a big breakfast. We usually have bread, coffee and orange juice.
For lunch we usually have a salad or soup and sandwich. That’s at about 1.30.
We usually have dinner at half past seven in the evening. It is a big meal of the day and we have meat or fish with vegetables and potatoes or rice. We have orange juice with the milk. On Saturday evenings we go to a restaurant for dinner at about eight o’clock.
1. Who is Petty’s husband?.................................................................................... …………………………………….
2. What do they have for lunch?…………………………………………………………………………………………
3. What time do they usually have dinner?……………………………………………………………………………….
4. What do they drink for dinner?……………………………………………………………………………………..
5. Where do they have dinner on Saturday evenings?……………………………………………………………………
6. Is dinner a big meal for Petty and her husband?.............................................................................................................
VI. Choose the suitable word for each blank in the following passage
| pollution | best | world | visit |
| five | population | streets | clock |
The (6) ……….. thing about London is the parks. There are (7) ……….. in the city center. But my children’s favorite place is Harleys. It is the biggest toyshop in the (8) ………..
VII. Rewrite the following sentences so that the second sentence means the same as the first one
1. What about eating some rice?--> Let’s .................................................................................................
2. Her eyes are brown.--> She has .................................................................................................................................
3. What drink do you like?--> What is ...............................................................................................................................
4. Our school has 12 classrooms.--> There are .................................................................................................................
5. Let’s go to the park.→ What about ………………………………………………………………………………?
6. How about watching Television?→ Why don’t you ……………………………………………………………….?
7. . Why don’t we go to the movies? → What ………………………………………………………………………….?
8. What’s the weather like in the spring? →How ………………………………………………………………………?
9. How about visiting our friends? →Why..............................................................................................................................?
10. How’s the weather this morning? → What ............................................................................................................?
VIII. Correct the mistakes in the following sentences
There are an books. =>
This are benches. =>
What time it is? =>
She is ride her bike. =>
There aren’t some tall trees behind my house. =>
My father watching TV at the moment. =>
Chi is beautiful. Her tooth are small and white=>
I like drink apple juice. It’s my favorite drink. =>
I’m very full. I’d like a bowl of noodles, Mom. =>
There are four season in a year in Viet Nam. =>
IX. Write the sentences with the cue words.
- I/ going to / visit Ha Long Bay/ summer vacation.=>…………................................. …………………………
- It/ cool/ fall.=>…………....................................................................……………………………
- Where / you/ from?=>…………...................................................................…………………………….
- Ho Chi Minh City / big/ Ha Noi.=>………….....................................……………………………..
- Mexico City / big city/ world.=>…………..............................................................…………………………….
- The Nile River/ long river/ world.=>…….............................................................…...........................................
- We / going to / visit / Hue / next week.=> ……………………………………………………………………….
- Hoa / often / go fishing / on Sundays.=> ………………………………………………………………………
- It / hot / summer.=> …………………………………………………………………………….
- There / be / a lot of / rivers and mountains / my country.=>……………………………………………………
1. I’d / am / so / like / noodles / I / hungry / some.=>…………………………………………………………………
2. Skipping / her / and / younger / like / winter / Mai / sister / in.
=>……………………………………………………………………………………………
3. Vietnamese / is / Vietnam / He / and / speak / He / from =>……………………………………………………………………………………………
4. language / you / often / French / ? / Which / do / speak / English / or
=>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
5. like / what / the / is / weather/ in / winter /the / ?
=>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
6. often / Peter / to / school / goes / 6:30 / at
=>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
7. often / at / dinner / I / o’clock / have / seven. =>….…………………………………………………………………………………………..
8. bigger / Ho Chi Minh City / which / or / Ha Noi / is? =>….……………………………………………………………………………………………..
9. don’t / Pagoda / go / why / to / we / Huong? =>….……………………………………………………………………………………………..
10. listens / usually / in / to / free / Lan / her / music / time. =>….……………………………………………………………………………………………...
ENGLISH TEST 07
I. Fill in each gap with a suitable word given.
I live in a house near the sea. It is ...(1)... old house, about 100 years old and...(2)... very small. There are two bedrooms upstairs...(3)... no bathroom. The bathroom is downstairs ... (4)... the kitchen and there is a living room where there is a lovely old fire place. There is a garden...(5)... the house. The garden...(6)... down to the beach and in spring and summer...(7)... flowers every where. I live alone...(8)... my dog, Rack, but we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with...(9)...
I love my house for... (10)... reasons: the garden, the flowers in summer, the fee in winter, but the best thing is the view from my bedroom window.
| 1 | A. a | B. an | C. the | D. any |
| 2 | A. It's | B. It | C. there's | D. They're |
| 3 | A. and | B. or | C. but | D. too |
| 4 | A. between | B. next | C. near to | D. next to |
| 5 | A. in front | B. front of | C. of front in | D. in front of |
| 6 | A. go | B. going | C. goes | D. in goes |
| 7 | A. there are | B. they are | C. there are | D. those are |
| 8 | A. for | B. of | C. on | D. with |
| 9 | A. me | B. I | C. my | D. I'm |
| 10 | A. a | B. any | C. many | D. a lot |
Mr. Tuan is…………(1) engineer in a big factory. He lives in a small apartment…………(2) the fifth floor of a building in Ho Chi Minh City. The factory is (3)……… near his house, so he goes to work by bus. He ……….(4) home at 7 o’clock to arrive to work at 7.45. …………(5) is Saturday morning now, and Mr. Tuan is…………..(6) home, in bed. On Saturdays he………..(7) up at a quarter to seven. Then he sits in the living room and………..(8) breakfast. On Saturday afternoons he………….(9) tennis or goes swimming. On Saturday evenings, he (10)………. stay at home, he usually goes out.
III. Rearrange the words to make meaningful sentences.
1. stay / grandparents / vacation / are / with / next / we / to / our / going / summer/.
………………………………………………………………………......................
2. in / the / Nile River / the / longest / the / is / world / river /.
………………………………………………………………………………………
3. good / the / there / let’s / and / time / beach / go / have / to / a /.
……………………………………………………………………………………...
4. small / thin / sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has /.
....................................................................................................................................
5. "No parking" / here /, so / sign / mustn’t / says / park / this / we/ .
...................................................................................................................................
6. happy / always / John / home / feels / when / he / comes / .
...................................................................................................................................
7. sister / home / rides/ and / my/ at / has/ and / lunch/ twelve / a / to / quarter/ .
..................................................................................................................................
8. usually / notebook / cheaper / dictionary / a / a / is / than / .
...................................................................................................................................
9. isn't / water / much / bottle / there / the / in / .
...................................................................................................................................
10. still / more / hungry / need / some / I / and / am / rice / I / .
....................................................................................................................................
IV. Rewrite sentences as directed so that the meaning stay the same.
1. Is there a colorful picture in your room?Has ……………………………………...……..................?
2. How much is a bowl of noodles?How much does .......................................................................................
3. Let's go out for a walk.Why ....................................................................?
4. I like beef and vegetables best.Beef ..........................................................................
5. That pencil belongs to Hoa.Hoa is……………………………..................................................................
6. What is the age of this building?. How ..................................................................... ?
7. The Mekong river is longer than the Red river.The red river ………………………...................................
8. I spend two hours a day doing my homework.It......................................................................
9. No one in my class is as beautiful as Hoa.Hoa..................................................................
10. How heavy is that big bag? How much.............................................................
V Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently
31. a.lamp b.table c.family d.bag
32. a.copy b.post c.body d.orange
33. a.weak b.head c.heavy d.breakfast
34. a.bean b.please c.near d.read
35. a.skip b.swim c.fried d.milk
VI. Choose the best options to complete the statements.
1.……………….your teacher?- Yes, she is very beautiful.
a.Do you like b.Do you want c.Would you like d.How is
2.How………………kilos of beef does she want?
a.many b.much c.often d.about
3.I need some tea. Please give me a……………… of tea.
a.bottle b.bar c.tube d.packet
4. His father is waiting……………... a bus.
a.to b.of c.for d.at
5.Is there any……………….in the bottle?- Yes, there is some.
a.peas b.carrots c.sugar d.beans
6.Does your brother………………..any games?- No, he doesn’t.
a.play b.plays c.playing d.to play
7.I don’t like vegetables but my sister……………………
a.do b.likes c.does d.would like
8.Would you like some apples, Lan?-No,……………..I’m full.Thanks!
a.I wouldn’t b. I don’t c. I’m not d.I don’t like
9.How do they want ………………to work?- By minibus.
a.to go b.to travel c.to walk d. Both a and b
10…………………………….tonight?- Nothing.
a.What are you doing b.What do you do
c.What are you going to do d. Both a and b
11.My grandparents are old, they don’t like……………..because it’s very cold.
a.summer b.fall c.spring d.winter
12. He usually goes swimming once………………………..
a.the week b.a week c.all weeks d.in the week
13.The room of my parents is small. “The room of my parents” means:
a.my room’s parents b.my parents’s room
c.my parents’ room d.my room’parent
14.How…………..oranges would you like?- Six, please. And …………..tea.
a.much/some b.many/any c.much/any d.many/some
15. Does Mary like …………….?- Yes, she goes jogging every morning.
a.jog b.to jog c.jogs d.jogging
16. The children are playing………………..the garden.
a.in b.on c.under d.at
17. They often eat……………….ice-cream after dinner.
a.some b.any c.a d.an
18.We go there by car and they go…………foot.
a.on b.by c.to d.with
19.How much is a bowl of noodles?-……………..five thousand five hundred dong.
a.They are b.It is c.It has d.There is
20.He is…………….English at a big school.
a.teach b.teaches c.teacher d.teaching
21.I want a ……………..of orange juice.
a.can b.box c.tube d.bar
22. I’d like some meat, please. How much……………………………?
a.do you like b.do you want c.you’d like d.you need
23. They are going to stay ……………….their grandparents in the country.
a.in b.to c.at d.with
24. It’s a lovely day! Let’s……………….to the beach.
a.go b.to go c.going d.we go
25.Listen! ………………to your sister?
a.Who is going to talk b.Who talks
c.Who does talk d.Who is talking
26. ………………….go to the zoo?- That’s a good idea!
a. What do we b. Would we like to c.Why don’t we d.Are we going to
27.The weather is……………………today.
a.blue b.nice c.green d.red
28. …………………are you going to stay with?- My sister and my brother.
a.Who b.Where c.How d.How long
29.There are four seasons …………a year……………are they?
a.in/Which b.at/What c.in/What d.on/Which
30.Which cinema…………………………………?
a.do you want to go to b.do you want to go it
c.you want to go d.do you want to go
VII/ Choose the word or the phrase that are not correct
31.I like watching TV.There are a good film on TV tonight.
A B C D
32. What is he often do when it’s hot?
A B C D
33.How much rooms are there in the new house?
A B C D
34. I’m very thirsty. I like some apple juice.
A B C D
35. How many childs does your sister have?
A B C D
ENGLISH TEST 08
I/ Find the word which is not the same with the others in a group.
1. a.bed b.window c.table d.chair
2. a.oranges b.apples c.bananas d.flowers
3. a.day b.week c.month d.holiday
4. a.summer b.fall c.winter d.fly
5. a.leg b.foot c.finger d.toe
II /Read the passage carefully then write T for true statements and F for false statements.
Minh and her friends are going to camp for four days in SAPA.Vui is going to bring a tent and some food. Lan is going to bring a ball to play volleyball. Ly is going to bring her camera to take some photos. Nga and Mai are going to bring some drinks. They take some orange juice. They don’t take iced tea because it’s cold. They also take some food. Their favorite food is chicken, lettuces and tomatoes. Vui’s mother helped them to arrange food and drink for their camping.They are going to stay in a small hotel.They leave their house at 6 o’clock.
Statements | True | False |
| 6.Minh and her friends are going to camp for four days. | ||
| 7.Lan is going to bring a basket to play volleyball. | ||
| 8.Nga and Mai don’t take iced tea because it’s cool. | ||
| 9.Vui’s mother helped them to arrange food and drink. | ||
| 10.They go to SAPA at 6 o’clock. |
11. She is cooking meal in the kitchen.=>……………………………………………………………………………
12. I’d like some milk and vegetables.=>………………………………………………………………………………
13. Miss Nga is teaching English at a secondary school.=>……………………………………………………………
14.Nam never flies a kite.=>…………………………………………………………………………………
15. I have Math and Literature on Monday and Thursday.=>……………………………………………………………
16. He goes to the cinema once a week.=>……………………………………………………………………………
17. My sister is in grade 6.=>…………………………………………………………………………………………
18. Mai always has dinner at seven o’clock.=>…………………………………………………………………………
19. My brother wants a glass of lemon juice.=>………………………………………………………………………
20. Linh has milk and eggs for her breakfast.=>………………………………………………………………………
IV/ Viết lại câu với nghĩa không đổi
21. What time does she go to work?=>When ...........................
22. She likes noodles.=>Her favorite………………………………………………
23. What is the price of these apples?=> How much……………………………………………………………
24. The car is blue.=> It is………………………………………………………………
25.It’s often hot in the summer. => It’s never………………………………………………………………………
- V. Chia hình thức đúng của các động từ trong ngoặc.
- 26. I (be) …………………………………at school at the weekend
- 27.Where(be)……………………………. your children ?
- 28. Look! The girl ( come)……………………………..............
- 29.My life is so boring. I just (watch)………………….TV every night.
- 30. The children (play)……………….......................badminton in the yard now.
- 31.We(see) …………………………………the movies tonight.
- 32.Where is Nam?- He(watch)……………………TV in his room at the moment.
- 33.What…………………..she(do)……………………..this weekend?
- 34.My best friend (write)……………………………to me every week.
- 35.I (stay)……………………………........there for two days when I come there.
Hien and Hoa are students. They live in Viet Nam. There are four seasons in a year in their country. They are spring, summer, fall and winter. In the spring, the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold, but not very cold. There are many flowers in this season. After spring, it is the summer. In the summer, the days are long and the nights are short. They often go on vacation in the summer. Fall is nice season. The weather is often cool. In the winter, it is usually very cold. The days are short and the nights are long. They always wear warm clothes in the winter.
Questions:
36.How many seasons are there in their country? What are they?
=>………………………………………………………………………………………………
37.What is the weather like in the spring?=>………………………………………………………………
38.What do they often do in the summer?=>………………………………………………………………………
39.Are the days long or short in the winter?=>……………………………………………………………………
40. What do they always wear in the winter?=>………………………………………………………………
- VI/ Dùng từ gợi ý cho sẵn để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh.
- 41. They/ often / go / park.=>…………………………………………………………………………………
- 42.What / weather / like / spring ?=>……………………………………………………………………………………
- 43. When / hot / I / swimming.=>……………………………………………………………………………
- 44. My father / visit / Ha Noi / this summer vacation.=>…………………………………………………………………
- 45. How / much / a fried rice?=>…………………………………………………………………………
- 46. How/ your father / go / work?=>………………………………………………………………………
- 47. What time / you / go to bed?=>……………………………………………………………………………
- 48. It / hot / Viet Nam / April?=>………………………………………………………………………
- 49. When / you / go out / your friends?=>……………………………………………………………………
- 50. How often / you / ride / bike?=>………………………………………………………………………
- VII / Điền từ thích hợp vào ô trống để hoàn thành đoạn văn sau(
- Mr.Bao is(1)……………teacher at a big school. He is young, tall and thin. He is not weak. He is(2)………………. He (3)……………..morning exercises everyday. He lives (4)……………….a small house in Ha Noi. The school isn’t near (5)…………….house, so he travels to work(6)…………..bus and he often(7)…………his house at 7 o’clock. He works from Monday to Friday. On Thursdays and Sundays, he(8)…………free time.(9)…………Sundays, he gets up at 8 o’clock, then he sits in the kitchen to have(10)……………… After that, he plays his favorite sports. He goes to bed at ten c’clock.
| 1. | A. invitation | B. intersection | C. station | D. question |
| 2. | A. lives | B. misses | C. languages | D. watches |
| 3. | A. down | B. brown | C. town | D. show |
| 4. | A. between | B. behind | C. bakery | D. geography |
| 5. | A. thank | B. thin | C. mother | D. tooth |
| 6. | A. year | B. repeat | C. meat | D. teacher |
| 7. | A. weather | B. idea | C. winter | D. movies |
| 8. | A. morning | B. number | C. routine | D. ruler |
| 9. | A. dangerous | B. accident | C. telephone | D. engineer |
| 10. | A. favorite | B. banana | C. tomato | D. potato |
11. How often do you do morning exercises in the summer?
| A. I like it | B. I play soccer | C. Yes, I do | D. I sometimes do |
| A. on | B. to | C. at | D. in |
| A. sun | B. sunny | C. rainy | D. rain |
| A. don’t | B. never | C. doesn’t | D. isn’t |
| A. How long - For | B. How far - For | C. How long - At | D. How long - From |
| A. How | B. How far | C. How long | D. How often |
| A. You are well | B. Because I don’t like animals |
| C. That’s a good idea | D. Thanks a lot |
| A. How | B. How much | C. How many | D. How often |
| A. happy | B. hungry | C. worried | D. thirsty |
| A. change | B. changes | C. is changing | D. is going to change |
| A. speeches | B. countries | C. languages | D. nationalities |
| A. do / do | B. does / do | C. do / does | D. does / does |
| A. sailing | B. swimming | C. jogging | D. fishing |
ENGLISH TEST 09
Câu 1: Chọn một từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại.
| A. citadel | B. vacation | C. destination | D. lemonade |
| A. beach | B. read | C. bean | D. ahead |
| A. bike | B. high | C. nine | D. sandwich |
| A.now | B. how | C. down | D. window |
| A.lead | B. great | C.seat | D. eat |
| A.so | B. go | C. who | D. piano |
| A. door | B. zoo | C. foot | D. soon |
| A. books | B. pencils | C. rulers | D. bags |
| A. does | B. watches | C. finishes | D. brushes |
| A. son | B. come | C. home | D. mother |
11. My sister ……………………. her homework every day.
A. does B. is C. are D. do
12.There is an intersection ahead. We……………………. .
A. must not slow down. B. must slow down.
C. must go fast. D. cannot go straight.
13. Does Mrs. Van ……..…….. one kilo of sugar.
A. need B. needs C. to need D. needing
14. There is a ……………………..behind my classroom.
A. big flower garden B. flower big garden C. garden big flower D. big garden flower
15. Mexico City is .................. city in the world.
A. biger B. big C. bigger D. the biggest
16.......................... trash over there.
A. Don’t throw B. Not throw C. Throw D. Can’t throw
17. Nam lives ________ a market
A. near B. on C. between D. at
18. Do you like pop music?
A. I would B. Yes, a lot C. No, I like it D. Yes, we are
19. I’m playing table tennis. .......................you like table tennis ?
A. Have B .Is C. Are D. Do
20. The students have got ..................... news about their exams .
A. many B. some C. a D. a few
21 . The boy looks a little thin, ................... he is strong.
A. and B. for C. or D. but
22. Mary and ................... would like to join the English Club speaking.
A. me B. my C. mine D. I
23. How...........apples are there ?
A. much B. more C. may D. many
24. There aren’t......pictures on the wall.
A. any B. some C. a D. an
25. How much rice .......your mother...............?
A. do - need B. does - needs C. do - needs D. does - need
Câu 3. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc:
- 26. ………the children (skip)……………….......... in the yard now?
- 27. My best friend (write)………………………… a letter to me every week.
- 28. I (not, like)……………………………..coffee very much
30. Look! The children (wait) …………………………for the bus over there.
31. Nga (not visit) …………………………………………………..Hue next week.
32. …………………… (be/ there) any milk in the fridge? – Yes, we have some.
33. Let's ( do) ................................. our work now.
34. What about (help)........................... the street children?.
35. Can we (play) … ………..soccer on the streets?
Câu 4. Cho dạng đúng của từ in đậm:
36. Her father is a................................ FARM
37. His ……………….are small and long. FOOT
38. Near my house there is a market. It’s very …………………… NOISE
39. Her ………………..are in the yard. They are playing soccer. CHILD
40. There are many………………………….on the street. TREE
41. There is a………………………rice paddy near my house. BEAUTY
42. In the ……………..... , there is a museum, a factory and a stadium. NEIGHBOR
43. The photocopy is between the ……………….and the drugstore. BAKE
44. Minh is ..... ........................... at English than I am. good
45. I go to visit my grandparents .........................a month. ONE
Câu 5. Mỗi câu có MỘT lỗi sai, gạch chân chỗ sai và sửa lại:
46. She lives in 12 Le Hong Phong street. .......................................................
47. What does the weather like today? .......................................................
48. What do Ba do when it is hot? ............................. ........................
49. There is trees and flowers in front of my yard.....................................................
50. Nga goes to school six day a week. .....................................................
51. How much rooms are there in the new house?.......................................................
52. I’m very thirty. I would like some apple juice..................................................
53. They no get up at 6 o’clock. ......................................................
54. We go to the library in Monday afternoon......................................................
55. What is the higher mountain in the world?......................................................
Câu 6: Đọc đoạn văn, sau đó trả lời câu hỏi :
My name is Nguyen Minh Trung. I’m a new student in class 6A. I’m from Da Nang and my family still lives there. In Ho Chi Minh City, I live with my grandparents at 21/3B Nguyen Trai street. My new school is not far from our house – about one kilometer, so I go to school by bike. There are a lot of students in my new school. But I don’t have any friends. I’m unhappy. I miss my parents, my sisters and my friends in Da nang.
56. Which grade is Trung in?..............................................................................................................................
57. Is he a new student? .....................................................................................................................................
58. Where is he from? ........................................................................................................................................
59. How far is it from his house to school? ........................................................................................................
60. What's his address? ....................................................................................................................................
Câu 7. Điền từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống:
I have a very close friend. Her name is Mai. She is eleven years old and she is in (61)........................ six. She(62)........................ speak English. She has English (63)..........................Tuesday, Thursday and Friday. She can also (64)......................... the piano. In her room,(65)............................... is a piano and some books. Every day she gets up at six. She (66).............................. breakfast at six thirty and goes to school at a (67).............................. to seven. She has her (68)................................ from seven o’clock to eleven thirty. Then she(69)............................... home and has lunch at twelve o’clock. It’s three o’clock in the afternoon now and Nga is in her room. She (70)...........................doing her homework.
Câu 8: Đặt câu hỏi cho từ hoặc cụm từ gạch chân
71. She is cooking meal in the kitchen.=>……………………………………………………………………
72. I’d like some milk and vegetables.=>……………………………………………………………………
73. Nam is doing his homework.=>…………………………………………………………………………
74. Nam never flies a kite.=>………………………………………………………………………………
75. We often go to school by bicycles.=>………………………………………………………………………
76. Her eyes are brown=>………………………………………………………………………………
77. My sister is in grade 6.=>………………………………………………………………………………
78. Mai is tired and hungry=>………………………………………………………………………………
79. My brother wants a glass of lemon juice.=>………………………………………………………………
80. Linh has milk and eggs for her breakfast.=>……………………………………………………………
Câu 9: Hoàn thành câu thứ hai sao cho câu có cùng nghĩa với câu đã cho.
81. Let’s walk to school!=> Why.....................................................................................................................?
82. My father usually drives to work.=> My father usually goes………………………….……………………………
83. There are four people in her family=> Her family………………………………………………………………..
84. The girl is beautiful.=> She is.....................................................................................................
85. No house in this street is older than my house.=> My house .......................................................................................
86. The bookstore is to the right of the museum =>The museum………………………………………………
87. We have English class at 7.15.> Our English class……………………………………..
88. How much is a kilo of beef?=> How much does…………………………………………………………
89. What time does she go to work?=> When…………………………………………………………………
90. She likes noodles best.=> Her favorite………………………………………………………..
Câu 10. Dùng từ gợi ý để hoàn thành câu :
91. Quang / brother / walk / movie theater / moment.
=> ………………………….…………………………………………………..
- 92. Ba / usually / play volleyball / fall / but / sometimes / sailing.
- => ………………………….…………………………………………..
- 93. Mrs. Baker / going / buy / some apples / children?
- => ………………………….…………………………………………………..
=>………………………………………………………………………………
95. What / there / front / your house ?
=>………………………………………………………………………………
- 96. They/ often / go / park.=>………………………………………………………………………………
- 97. What / weather / like / spring ?=>………………………………………………………………………
- 98. When / hot / I / swimming.=>………………………………………………………………………………
- 99. My father / visit / Ha Noi / this summer vacation.=>………………………………………………………
- 100. How / much / a fried rice ?=>……………………………………………………………………………
ENGLISH TEST 10
I. Fill in the blanks with the correct prepositions.
1. I usually go to school by bicycle but today I am going……………….……foot.
2. Is there a flower garden ……………….…… front of your house? - Yes, there is.
3. My mother wants a sandwich and a glass ……………….……orange juice.
4. What would you like……………….……dinner? - I’d like some noodles.
5. The plane flies……………….…….mountains, rivers and towns.
6. What are they doing at the moment? - They are listening……………….……the tape.
7. Elizabeth and Charls are ……………….……England. They speak English.
II. Write the correct form of the words given in capital letters:
1. My school is the …………………..one in Thanh Oai District. (OLD)
2. All of us are are very good ………………….. (STUDY)
3. In our school library, there are four ………………….. (BOOKSHELF)
4. Hung visits his grandparents …………………..a week. (ONE)
5. My house is on the …………………..floor of that tall building. (NINE)
6. Nobody in my class is …………………..than Trang. (GOOD)
III. Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets:
1. Look! The plane is flying towards the airport. It (land) ……………….……
2. Ha’s father (drive) ……………….……his car to the garage at the moment.
3. How your sister (go) ……………….……to school every day? - By motorbike, of course.
4. Mr. Tung is a teacher and he (not have).……………….……classes in the afternoon.
5. You mustn’t (eat) ……………….……food in this canteen.
6. The Nile River (flow) ……………….……to the Mediterranean Sea.
7. Mrs. Thuy is cleaning the windows and doors. Let’s (help) ……………….……her.
IV. Read and circle the best option
Everyone (1)……………….…… oranges. They are quite sweet and juicy. They are in sections so (2)……………….…… is very easy to eat them. Some oranges (3)……………….…… not have seeds. Some (4)……………….…… thick skins and some have thin skins. The orange tree is beautiful. It has a lot of (5)……………….……. leaves. The small white flowers smell very sweet. (6)……………….…… orange tree has a lot of flowers and fruit at the same (7)……………….…… . "Orange" is both a fruit (8)……………….…… a colour. The (9)……………….…… of orange is so beautiful that in English we use the name of the fruit (10)……………….…… the colour.
| 1. | A. love | B. to love | C. loves | D. loving |
| 2. | A. they | B. it | C. oranges | D. its |
| 3. | A. do | B. does | C. is | D. are |
| 4. | A. have | B. wear | C. put | D. take |
| 5. | A. yellow | B. green | C. red | D. blue |
| 6. | A. A | B. An | C. Some | D. Ø |
| 7. | A. morning | B. afternoon | C. evening | D. time |
| 8. | A. but | B. or | C. and | D. with |
| 9. | A. colour | B. seed | C. tree | D. leaf |
| 10. | A. to | B. at | C. from | D. for |
V. There is a mistake in each line of the following passage. Find and correct it:
| Eg: 0. The students is singing a song in their classroom. | 0/ are |
| Peter and Bill are brothers. Peter is twelve and Bill is ten. They live with their parents and their dog in a small towns in the south of England. | 1. |
| They do not look like each other. Peter is tall and dark and Bill is short and fair. They also like difference things. Peter likes sports but he is not | 2. |
| interested in school. He hates Mathematics and History and he never remembers the numbers. Bill likes to goes to school very much. He is | 3. |
| quite good at learn English, he reads and writes a lot. Bill can draw very well, too. But he never plays sports. | 4. |
| He spends most of his time indoors reading or drawing. He wants to be a writer or a artist in the future. | 5. |
My eldest brother, Tuyen is (1).……………….…… engineer in a big company. He lives in a small apartment on (2).……………….…… third floor of a building in Ha Noi. The company is far from his house, so he always goes to work (3).……………….…… bus. He leaves home at seven o’clock to get to work (4).……………….…… 7.45 a.m. It is Saturday morning now, and he is at home, in bed. (5).……………….……Saturdays he often gets up at a quarter to seven in the (6).……………….…….,then he sits in the living room and (7).……………….…… breakfast. On Saturday afternoons, he usually plays tennis or (8).……………….…… swimming with some (9).……………….…… his friends. On Saturday evenings, he doesn’t stay at (10).……………….…… , he usually goes out.
VII. Rearrange the words to make meaningful sentences.
1. stay / grandparents / am / with / this / I / to / my / going / weekend./
-> ………..………………………………………………………………………......................
2. out? / do/ want/ you/ when/ what/ you/ to/ say/ go/
-> ………..………………………………………………………………………......................
3. often/ brother/ his/ listens/ in/ to/ time./ my/music/ free
-> ………..………………………………………………………………………......................
4. I/ to/ to/ every/ city/ buy/ go/ books/ Sunday morning./ the
-> ………..………………………………………………………………………......................
5. good / the / there./ let’s / and / time / mountain / go / have / to / a /
-> ………..………………………………………………………………………......................
VIII. Complete the second sentence, using the word given in brackets so that it has a similar
1. What about singing and dancing? -> Why don’t………………………………………………………….…..?
2. Noone in our school is stronger than me.-> I……..…………………………………..……………….......................
3. What’s your brother’s height?-> How ……………………….…………………………….……………………….?
4. His teacher always drives to work.-> His teacher always goes………………………………………………….
5. Peter is 1.80 meters tall. Linda is 1.70 meters tall-> Linda……………………………….…………..……..………
IX. Write a composition (about 80 words) to tell about your school:
(don’t show your name, your school or your village):
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
X. Using the cues to complete the sentences.
- Lan/ Ly/ go/ bookstore/ buy/ books/ now.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………...
3. Many / plants/ animals/ danger/ because /we /destroying /them.
…………………………………….……………………………………………………………
4. There/ peas/ but / not/ potatoes.
→............................................................................................................................................
5.She/ like /dozen/ eggs/ vegetables.
→...........................................................................................................................................
ENGLISH TEST 11
I. Make questions for the underlined words:
1. She is cooking meal in the kitchen.=>………………………………………………………………………………
2. I’d like some milk and vegetables.=>………………………………………………………………………………
3. I am doing my homework.=>………………………………………………………………………………………
4. Nam never flies a kite.=>………………………………………………………………………………………
5. We often go to school by bicycles.=>……………………………………………………………………………
6. Her eyes are brown=>………………………………………………………………………………………
7. My sister is in grade 6.=>………………………………………………………………………………………
8. Mai is tired and hungry=>………………………………………………………………………………………
9. My brother wants a glass of lemon juice.=>…………………………………………………………………………
10. Linh has milk and eggs for her breakfast.=>…………………………………………………………………………
II. Rewrite the sentences with the same meaning:
1. What time does she go to work?=> When……………………………………………………………
2. She likes noodles.=> Her favorite…………………………………………………………..
3. What is the price of these apples?=> How much…………………………………………………………
4. The car is blue.=> It is…………………………………………………………………………
5. It’s often hot in the summer. => It’s never ……………………………………………………………
- III. Use the words given to make the meaningful sentences:
- 6. They/ often / go / park.=>………………………………………………………………………………………
- 7. What / weather / like / spring ?=>…………………………………………………………………………………
- 8. When / hot / I / swimming.=>………………………………………………………………………………………
- 9. My father / visit / Ha Noi / this summer vacation.
- =>………………………………………………………………………………………
- 10. How / much / a fried rice?=>………………………………………………………………………………
1.A. these B. thank C. those D. there
2. A. pencils B. rulers C. books D. boards
3. A. classroom B. school C. afternoon D. book
4. A. class B. father C. man D. family
5. A. goes B. nurses C. watches D. boxes
6. A. home B. come C. open D. cold
7. A. opens B. gets C. likes D. speaks
8. A. lunch B. watch C. teacher D. architect
9. A. city B. family C. fifteen D. telephone
10. A. number B. plum C. put D. but
V. Chän vµ khoanh trßn phÇn tr¶ lêi ®óng cho mçi c©u sau.
1.Tom and Peter are classmates and Mary is …………..friend
A. his B. her C. their D. our
2. What’s his brother’s name? …………..Nam.
A. His name B. He’s C. His brother name’s D. She
3. How many ……….are there in the living-room? There’s only one…………
A. couch/ couches B. couches/ couches C. couches/ couch D. couch/ couch
4. What ………..your parents …..after dinner?
A. do / do B. does / do C. do / does D. does / does
5. Are you and Lan students? Yes, ………
A. we are B. they are C. you are D. I am
6. My brother and ………….are at home.
A. Me B. my C. mine D. I
7. …………… are Hoa’s pens.
A. This B.That C.These D. There
8. ……………. is your baby sister? She’s fine.
A. How much B. How C. How old D. How many
9. He …………….to school on Sundays.
A. not goes B. don’t go C. doesn’t go D. no goes
10. Are these couches? No, ………… aren’t.
A. they B. there C. these D. it
ENGLISH TEST 12
I. Chọn 1 từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại.
1. A hats B pens C cats D books
2. A bus B museum C drug D lunch
3. A heavy B leave C head D ready
4. A fly B hungry C usually D early
5. A brother B these C thank D that
6. A door B book C look D cook
7. A read B teacher C near D eat
8. A face B small C grade D late
9. A twice B swim C skip D picnic
10. A arm B charm C farm D warm
II. §iền 1 mạo từ a, an hoặc the vào chỗ trống các câu không cần giói từ thì để nguyên
I’d like (1)…………… dozen eggs, pleased.
Math is my favorite (2)…………… subject.
We live in (3)…………… apartment in town.
I want to travel all over (4)…………… world.
His father sometimes goes to (5)…………… work (6)…………… foot.
Can I have (7)…………… apple?
(8)…………… People don’t like him because he is selfish.
Nam is (9)…………… artist. He has (10)…………… studio.
III. Viết lại câu sao cho nghĩa không đổi
My school has over 25 classrooms.
| There my school. |
| Miss White |
| Jane |
| favorite |
| He ………………………….. past |
| I a day. |
| job? |
| What about |
| The restaurant is |
| Carol lives |
Miss Lien live in a small house on Hanoi. She teaches English at a school there. She usually is breakfast in seven in the morning and she has dinner at twelve o’clock in the canteen of the school. She teaches his students in the morning. She teaches them dialogue on Wednesday to Friday. On Mondays, she teach them grammar. In the evening, she usually stay at home and listens books. She sometimes goes to the movies theater. She always go to bed at ten o’clock.
V. Tìm 1 từ thích hợp điền vào chỗ trống
I have a very close friend. Her name is Nga. She is twelve years old (1) …………… she is in grade six. She (2) …………… speak English. She has English (3) …………… Tuesday and Friday. She can also (4) …………… the piano. In her room, (5) …………… is a piano and some books. Everyday she gets up at six. She (6) …………… breakfast at 6.30 and goes to school at a (7) …………… to seven. She has her (8) …………… from seven o’clock to eleven thirty. Then she (9) …………… home and has lunch at twelve o’clock. It’s three o’clock in the afternoon now. Nga is in her room. She is (10) …………… the piano.
VI. Sắp xếp lại các từ bị sáo trộng thành câu có nghĩa
1. house / a / Minh /lake / lives / in / near / a.
……………………………………………………………………………………………
2. a / plays / badminton / Paul / week / twice.
……………………………………………………………………………………………
3. like / the / weather / fall/ what / is / the / in?
……………………………………………………………………………………………
4. building / tallest / in / this / my city / the / is .
……………………………………………………………………………………………
5. good / the/ there /let’s / and/ time / beach / go / have / to / a.
……………………………………………………………………………………………
6. small / thin / sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has.
…………………………………………………………………………………………….
7. hot / go / when / I/ go swimming / it / is.
…………………………………………………………………………………………….
8. camping / often / do / how / you / go?
…………………………………………………………………………………………….
9. stay / grandparents / vacation / are / with / next / we / to / we / to / our / going / summer.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
10. in / the / Nile River / the / longest / the / is / world.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
VII.S¾p xÕp c¸c tõ x¸o trén thµnh c©u hoµn chØnh.
live / on / in / not / aunt / does / small / Hung Vuong Street / house / a/ my.
…………………………………………………………………………..……………………
these / notebooks / their / new / are ?
…………………………………………………………..……………………………………
there / wall / picture / is / in / a / your / the / on / living-room?
…………………………………………………………………………..……………………
city / it / in / is / house / house / a / the / is / big / Lan’s / and.
……………………………………………………………………………...………………...
years / a / Mrs. Nga/ teacher / and / thirty-two / old / she / is / is.
…………………………………………………………………..……………………………
VIII. T×m lçi sai, gạch ch©n vµ söa l¹i cho ®óng trong c¸c c©u sau.
1.There are two benchs in my room. ……………………
2.Mr Hien isn’t lives in a house in the country. ……………………
3.My mother is fourty years old. ……………………
4. What color are her eyes? It’s blue. ……………………
5.Our classroom is on the three floor. ……………………
6. She often plays football in hers free time. ……………………
7. Hoa house is in the country. ……………………
8. Our school is big. They have four floors. ……………………
9. I go to school every mornings with my friends. ……………………
10. There is a hospital new near our school. ……………………
IX. ChuyÓn sang sè nhiÒu c¸c c©u sau.
1. What’s this ? It’s a bench.…………………………………………………………………………………………..
2. Is that her knife? ……………………………………………………………………………………………..
3. This woman has a child. …………………………………………………………………………………………..
4. The policeman is in his room.………………………………………………………………………………………..
5. Does he has a white tooth? …………………………………………………………………………………….
X. §Æt c©u hái cho phÇn g¹ch ch©n.
1. Mai is not very well today...................................................................................................................................?
2. The man in the car is our new teacher............................................................................................................................?
3. There is a board on the wall...................................................................................................................................?
4. My sister lives on Le Qui Don Street.....................................................................................................................?
5. No. She is a nurse..................................................................................................................................?
6. My brother gets up at a quarter to six............................................................................................................................?
7. Her mother is a teacher..................................................................................................................................?
8. There is a lamp by the telephone.
.................................................................................................................................?
9. Nam goes to school with his friends.
………………………………………………………………………………………………?
10. Tuan does his homework in the evening.
……………………………………………………………………………..……………….?
ENGLISH TEST 13
I. Sö dông tõ gîi ý viÕt thµnh c©u hoµn chØnh.
1. That / your teacher ? No. This / my / teacher.
……………………………………………………………………………………………....
2.There / many books / bookshelf?
……………………………………………………………………………….………………
3. How / your brother? He / one.
………………………………………………………………………………..………………
4.This / not / my pen // It / her pen.
……………………………………………………………………………….……………
5. What / these ? They / ink-pot.
……………………………………………………………………………………………..
6. Minh/ live/ brother/ apartment/ city.
……………………………………………………………………………………………….
7. Mrs. Lan/ and/ children/ travel/ London/ plane.
……………………………………………………………………………………………….
8. Sister/ have/ bike/ and/ cycle/ work/ everyday.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
9. Where / the dogs? They / yard.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
10. brother / homework / dinner / evening?
………………………………………………………………………………………………
II. Dïng tõ gîi ý ë ®Çu c©u viÕt l¹i c¸c c©u sau sao cho nghÜa kh«ng thay ®æi.
How old are your parents? What…………………………………………………………………………………?
How many classroom are there in your family?How many…………………………….…………...?
What are these people?What are ………………………………………………………………………...…...?
Mrs. Xuan has a son, Duc. Mrs Xuan……………………………………………………………………………...
His family has four people.There are ……………………………………………………………………………..
Mr. and Mrs. Minh has a daughter, Lan.Mr. and Mrs. Minh………………………………………………………
My mother goes to work at seven thirty.My mother goes to work………………………………………………
Mai’s books are new.Mai ……………………………………………………………………………………
The lamp is in front of the stereo.The stereo …………………………………………………………………….
III. §äc ®o¹n v¨n sau ræi ®iÒn tõ thÝch hîp vµo chç trèng.
I have a little sister. (1)………….. name is Daisy. She (2)………………. to school six days a week. On (3)………………..days she has lunch (4)……………. school, but (5)………………… weekend she has lunch at home. She often has bread and a glass of milk (6)……………. breakfast. She likes milk very much. She drinks ( 7)………….. for every meal. After dinner, she often listens to music, then she (8)……………… her homework. Sometimes she watches television but she (9)……………like to watch it very much. She goes to (10)……….. at eleven o’clock.
IV.Write a short paragraph (about 80-100 words) about your family
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
ENGLISH TEST 14
I. Choose the word which is pronounced differently from the others.
1. A. clothes B. watches C. benches D. classes
2. A. read B. teacher C. eat D. ahead
3. A. books B. pens C. rulers D. erasers
4. A. kite B. twice C . swim D. pastimes
5. A. full B. tube C. blue D. fruit
6. A. thin B. thick C. thanks D .with
7. A. doors B. dogs C. floors D. maps
8. A. hour B. happy C. high D. hotel
9. A . tenth B. math C. brother D. theater
10. A. intersection B. eraser C. bookstore D. history
II. Choose the best answer.
1.I like ………..because I like to learn about the numbers.
A. literature B. Geography C. History D. Math
2. The hotel is in front of the car park so the car park is ……. the hotel.
A. between B .behind C. next to D.opposite
3. People often play sports at the ………….
A .factory B. movie theater C. stadium D.bakery
4. Why do you like flowers? – Because ………. beautiful.
A. They’re B.It’s C. There’re D. We’re
5. The weather is………… in the deserts.
A. hot B.warm C. cold D. foggy
6. Her…………season is spring.
A. nice B. beautiful C. favourite D. interesting
7. We save the earth by not……… forests.
A.make B. lifting C. cutting D. bringing
8. There isn’t ………in the next room.
A. some one B. no one C. any one D.somebody
9. The football match………… at three o’clock.
A. does B. gives C. watches D. finishes
10. Could I have a………… of matches, please?
A. bar B. can C. box D.bottle
11. Ho Chi Minh city is………… city in Vietnam.
A. the bigger B. biggest C. the biggest D.more big
12. I learn music………………. : on Mondays and Fridays.
A. two times a week B. once aweek
C.one aweek D. twice a week
13. Which month is ……………? May or June.
A. hottest B. hotter C. more hot D. hot than
14. She doesn’t have ………..friends at school.
A. a B. some C. many D. much
15. Why don’t we go camping? ………… a good idea.
A. Let’s B.That’s C. It D. With
16. There are five …………. in one hand.
A. fingers B. arms C. toes D. feet
17. We……….. stop when the light is red.
A. can’t B. can C. mustn’t D. must
18. What is your favourite food?
A. I favourite chicken B. My favourite food chicken
C. Chicken favourite me D. I like chicken best.
19. Linda ……… her hair every day.
A. washes B. wash C. clean D.cleans
20 .How many minutes are there in………… hour?
A. a B. an C. the D. these
21.What are there in this box? ………….. of shoes.
A. a couple B. a pair C. some D . afew
22. It’s hot ………. our country …….. the summer .
A. in/in B. in/on C. in/at D. on/in
23. I often help my mother …….. her housework.
A. of B. with C. for D .from
24. My sister …….. a new language every year.
A. study B. studies C. works D. prepares
25. When it becomes hot, people often feel ……..
A.hungry B. thirsty C. happy D. full
26. The boy looks a little thin ,……….. he’s strong.
A. and B. for C. or D. but
27. Mary and ……… would like to join the English Speaking Clup.
A. me B. my C. mine D. I
28. Please read the dialogue……………
A. aloud B. loud C. loudly D. loudily
29 . I always get up early. I ………. get up late.
A. usually B.often C. never D. sometimes
30. Classes ……… at 7.15 every morning.
A. start B. starts C. is start D. starting
III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in standard English.
1.Ba often does his homeworks in the evening.
A B C D
2. They aren’t go to bed at 9 o’clock.
A B C D
3. I don’t have some apples but I have some bananas.
A B C D
4. That’s my sister over there. She stands next to the window
A B C D
5. He’s waiting to the bus at the moment.
A B C D
6. My father never have lunch at home.
A B C D
7. We need eight hundred gram of beef.
A B C D
8. There is a temple old near our school.
A B C D
9. How long are you going to staying in Vietnam?
A B C D
10. Would you like any sugar? – Yes , please.
A B C D
IV.Choose the best option to complete the passage.
It’s Sunday morning. The Browns are sitting in (1)……… living room. They are talking (2)…….. the dinner this evening. David likes beef and Susan does, too. He says that beef (3)……..good for childen. Their father, Mr. Brown, prefer chicken to beef. He asks his wife to buy (4)…….. for him. Helen, their youngest daughter doesn’t want any meat .She would (5)……….. cakes and sweets. Mrs. Brown doesn’t like beef. She doesn’t like chicken, either. She likes fish, vegetables and fruit. She says that fish and vegetables (6)…………. good for old men and every body (7)………. to eat fruit.
At last they decide to go out (8)…….dinner (9)………..Mrs. Brown says that she can’t cook so(10)…………food for every body in the family.
1.A. the B.a C.an D. to
2. A. with B. for C. about D. to
3.A . are B. has C. does D. is
4. A. little B. some C. any D. none
5. A. like B. likes C.have D. has
6. A. is B. have C.are D. do
7. A. need B. needs C. are D. have
8. A. to B.of C. with D. for
9. A. because B. but C. so D. and
10. A. many B. little C. much D. lots of
ENGLISH TEST 15
I. Chọn từ có cách phát âm khác với các từ còn lại :
1. A. call B. fall C. shall D. wall
2. A. clown B. down C. own D. town
3. A. thank B. that C. this D. those
4. A. books B. pens C. rulers D. bags
5. A. come B. home C. some D. none
II. Chọn câu trả lời đúng nhất
1. We have Geography on Tuesday and on Saturday. We have it …………… a week.
A. once B. twice C. second D. two time
2. Mai and Thao often do aerobic in ……………… free time.
A. your B. her C. his D. their
3. She doesn't like playing badminton. She ……………… plays badminton.
A. always B. usually C. often D. never
4. He wants …………. an engineer.
A. is B. be C. to be D. being
5. I'm tired. I'd like …………….
A. sit down B. sitting down C. to sit down D. to sitting down
6. Do you have any toothpaste? I want a large …………………
A. tin B. box C. bar D. tube
7. What …. the weather like in summer?
A. is B. does C. are D. do
8. It's very hot. Why ………. go swimming?
A. not we B. we not C. don't we D. we don't
9. How ………….. is a kilo of beef?
A. many B. much C. money D. much money
10. ……………………. book is this, yours or mine?
A. What B. Which C. Whose D. Who's
11. Hoa ………………… a lot of friends at her school.
A. has B. have C. to have D. to has
12. I'd like a hot drink. What ………….. you, Uyen?
A. are B. would C. about D. for
13. There are ………… eggs in the supermarket.
A. hundred B. hundred of C. hundreds of D. of hundred
14. …………… is Ba going to stay with?
A. Who B. Where C. What D. Which
15. In Math, Tom is …………….. than Billy.
A. good B. well C. better D. best
16.She often goes to school …………………
A. with bike B. on bike C. by plane D. by bus
17. Who is …………………, Bill Gates or Bill Clinton?
A. rich B. richer C. richest D. poor
18. The police station is ……………… to the bank.
A. next B. near C. besides D. opposite
19. There is …………….. milk in the glass.
A. many B. a lot C. any D. some
20. She has …………….. hair.
A. a black long B. black long C. long black D. long a black
III. Cho dạng đúng của từ viết hoa
1. Is your brother an ……………………… ? ACT
2. Mai's sister is a ………………….…….. . SING
3. I am Vietnamese. What's your ……….…………… NATION
5. These children like ……………….….. weather. SUN
6. How are you today? - I am ……….……………… GOOD
7. She doesn't have many …………..………… in Ha Noi. RELATE
8. There are nineteen ………….………. in my school. CLASS
9. In Tan's ……………….…, there are many high buildings. NEIGHBOR
10. Students like taking part in many ……….……........ at recess. ACTIVITY
IV. Chia động từ
1. There ………………..…. (be) many bookselves in the library.
2. Lan and Mai …………………… (play) games at the moment.
3. ………………..…………... (she / drive) a car? - Yes, she can.
4. Hoa ……………..…….. (not go) to shool on Sundays.
5. You shouldn't ………………….. (get) up late. 6. Don't …………………… (throw) trash in the street.
7. What ……………………….. (she / have) for breakfast everyday?
8. ………………………………. (you / live) in a town?
9. How often …………………….. (you / watch) television?
10. He is not going to read books. He …………………………. (listen) to music.
V. Xác định và sửa lỗi sai
1. I am twelve year old. …………………………
A B C D
2. My school have three floors and twelve classrooms. ………………………….
A B C D
3. What is your classroom? - It is on the third floor. ………………………….
A B C D
4. She often plays sports in afternoon. ………………………….
A B C D
5. There are many tree near her house. ………………………..
A B C D
6. We often reads books in the library. ………………………….
A B C D
7. What does Ngan go to school every day? …………………………..
A B C D
8. My mother is going to the market with my. ……………………….….
A B C D
9. There are some beef on the table. …………………………..
A B C D
10. He plays badminton five time a week. ……………………………
A B C D
VI. Điền một giới từ thích hợp vào mỗi chỗ trống
1. How …………….. eating out tonight, Tom? 2. Lan sometimes goes to school ………………… foot.
3. The film starts ………………… half past seven. 4. They are never late ……………….. school.
5. She is English. She is ……………..….. England.
VII. Điền vào mỗi chỗ trống một từ thích hợp
Salesperson: Can I ……(1)……… you
Customer: Yes. I would like ……(2)…….. meat.
Salesperson: How ……(3)………. do you want?
Customer: A kilo, ……(4)…...
Salesperson: A kilo of meat. Is there ……(5)……. else?
Customer: Yes. I'd ……(6)……….. some banans.
Salesperson: How ……(7)…….. do you want?
Customer: Five. And I want to buy half a ……(8)…..of sugar.
Salesperson: ……(9)…… you are.
Customer: Thank you.
Salesperson: Thank you. See ……(10)… again.
VIII. Chọn từ thích hợp nhất để điền vào chỗ trống
Jim Green ……(0)…… a student in a secondary chool. He …(1)… classes from Monday to Friday. He has many …(2).. to do after class in the afternoon. On Monday and Wednesday, he helps his ..(3)... with their English. On Tuesday and Thursday, he takes part in the Informatics Club. On Friday, he …(4)……basketball. He goes to the park or museum …(5)…. his parents and his sister ……(6)……Saturday. On Sunday, he has a good rest …(7)….. home and …….(8)…. his homework.
Now, it is 8:30 in the morning, Jim ………(9)……… in the classroom and having a Math class. He is listening to the teacher carefully. His friends David and Tony are looking at the blackboard. Lucy and Lily are thinking. Mary is writing something in her notebook. All of them ……(10)….. working hard.
| 0. | A. be | B. are | C. is | D. am |
| 1. | A. to have | B. has | C. have | D. having |
| 2. | A. school | B. lesson | C. housework | D. things |
| 3. | A. books | B. friends | C. rulers | D. notebooks |
| 4. | A. reads | B. plays | C. writes | D. sees |
| 5. | A. with | B. to | C. by | D. of |
| 6. | A. at | B. in | C. on | D. to |
| 7. | A. in | B. at | C. on | D. of |
| 8. | A. makes | B. works | C. does | D. thinks |
| 9. | A. are sitting | B. sitting | C. sit | D. is sitting |
| 10. | A. is | B. are | C. be | D. to be |
IX. Đọc đoạn văn, trả lời câu hỏi
Anna lives in a village in Africa. Her day start at 4 o'clock. She gets up and she walks three kilometers to the river. She collects some water and carries it back to her house. The water is very heavy. It isn't clean but there isn't any water in her village. Anna doesn't go to school. She can't read or write. She helps her mother in the house.
1. Where does Anna live?………………………………………..
2. What does she do after she gets up?………………………………………
3. What does she collect?…………………………….……….
4. Is the water clean?……………………………………
5. Can she write?……………………………………
X. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân trong các câu sau
1. I am fine, thank you.………………………………………………………………………………
2. They are black.………………………………………………………………………………
3. She is in the school yard.………………………………………………………………………………
4. I play soccer every afternoon.………………………………………………………………………………
5. They are doing their homework.……………………………………………………………………………
XI. Viết câu dùng từ gợi ý
1. I/ not want/ eat anything/ because/ not hungry………………………………………………………………
2. How much / beef / you / want? ………………………………………………………………………
3. Thuy / her friends / skip rope / now /………………………………………………………………………
4. Phong / go fishing / three times / week ……………………………………………………………………
5. There / be / a garden / behind / school /…………………………………………………………………
ENGLISH TEST 16
I.Rewrite each of the following sentences in such a way that it means exactly the same as the sentence
1. Ha’school bag is new and big.à Ha has ……………………………………..
3. Phuong has a sister, Lan.à Phuong………………………………..
4. No house on the street is bigger than this house.à This house……………………………………
5. How many apples does she want?à How many apples would…………………………..?
II. Make the question for the answer below.
- ………………………………………………………………………………
- …………………………………………….………………………………..
3. ………………………………………………….…………………………..
There is some orange juice to drink after breakfast?
4………………………………………………..………………………………
Peter and Mary are both Canadian .
5. ………………………………………………………………………………
Her father is an achitect.
III. Using the cues to complete the sentences.
- Lan/ Ly/ go/ bookstore/ buy/ books/ now……………………………………………………………………….
- I/ not like/ winter/ because/ it/ very cold.………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………….…………………………………………………………….…..
4.Ba / usually / play tennis / fall/ but/ sometimes/ sailing.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………….…
5.Mrs. Ngoc/ going/ buy/ some toys/ children?………………………………………………………………………
IV. Write a paragraph about 80-100 words about your daily activities.
| Activities | time | |
| Morning | - get up - have breakfast - go to school - classes start/ finish - .......... | |
| Afternoon | - .............. - ............. | |
| Evening | -.............. - ............ |
.................................................................................................................................
V. Em hãy đọc đoạn hội thoại sau rồi trả chọn câu trả lời thích hợp A,B, C hoặc D cho câu hỏi bên
THE CITY AND THE COUNTRY
David: How do you like living in the big city?
Maria: There are many things that are better than living in the country!
David: Can you give me some examples?
Maria: Well, it certainly is more interesting than the country. There is so much more to do
and see!
David: Yes, but the city is more dangerous than the country.
Maria: That’s true. People in the city aren’t as open as those in the countryside.
David: I’m sure that the country is more relaxed, too.
Maria: Yes, the city is busier than the country. However, the country is much slower than
the city.
David: I think that’s a good thing!
Maria: Oh, I don’t. The country is so slow and boring! It’s much more boring than the city.
David: How about the cost of living? Is the country cheaper than the city?
Maria: Oh, yes. The city is more expensive than the country.
David: Life in the country is also much healthier than in the city.
Maria: Yes, it’s cleaner and less dangerous in the country. But, the city is so much more
exciting. It’s faster, crazier and more fun than the country.
David: I think YOU are crazy for moving to the city.
Maria: Well, I’m young now. Maybe when I’m married and have children I’ll move back to
the country.
Questions
1. Maria thinks life in the city is __________ life in the countryside.
A. cheaper than B. as cheap as C. more expensive than D. as expensive as
2. David says that the countryside is __________ the city.
A. less dangerous than B. more dangerous than C. as dangerous as D. as safe as
3. Maria says __________ when she is married and has children.
A. she will move to the city B. she will buy a house in the country
C. might leave the countryside D. she might move back to the country
4. According to the conversation, which of the following statements is TRUE?
A. The city is quieter than the country. B. The country is healthier than the city.
C. Maria thinks the country is more fun than the city. D. The country is more exciting than the city.
5. According to the conversation, which of the following statements is NOT TRUE?
A. The people in the countryside aren’t as open as the people in the city.
B. David thinks Maria is crazy for leaving the country.
C. Life in the country isn’t as hectic as life in the city. D. the country is slower than the city.
VI: Chän tõ mµ phÇn g¹ch ch©n cã c¸ch ph¸t ©m kh¸c víi c¸c tõ cßn l¹i
A. want B. basketball C. family D. camp 1. ………………...
A. foodstall B. bookshelf C. foot D. noodles 2. ………………...
A. who B. which C. what D. when 3. ………………...
A. brother B. mother C. thank D. weather 4. ………………...
A. engineer B. geography C. gymnast D. garden 5. ………………...
A. desks B. seasons C. lamps D. eats 6. ………………...
A. lemonade B. stereo C. hotel D. television 7. ………………...
A. coffee B. volleyball C. chocolate D. opposite 8. ………………...
A. round B. couch C. routine D. housework 9. ………………...
A. station B. question C. intersection D. destination 10. ……………...
VII: Chän ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®Ó hoµn thµnh c¸c c©u sau.
I like playing badminton very much. I ………………… play badminton in my free time.
A. want B. don’t C. never D. always
There are ………………… syllables in the word “supermarket”.
A. two B. three C. four D. five
Do you live in the country or in the city? ~ ………………….
A. Yes, I do B. I live in the city C. No, I don’t D. I live on the city
What would you like ………………… dinner?
A. for B. to C. in D. at
What’s the ………………… like in the summer? ~ It is usually hot.
A. food B. sea C. weather D. neighborhood
……………………………………? ~ We play badminton and swim.
A. What sports do you and your brother like? B. Which sports do you and your brother play?
C. When do you and your brother play sports? D. What are you and your brother doing?
How many ………………… do you want? ~ A dozen.
A. noodles B. cooking oil C. carrot D. eggs
Does Mrs. Vui ………………… to buy any tomatoes?
A. want B. wanting C. wants D. to want
………………… are these pens and pencils? ~ They are 25, 000 dong.
A. How old B. How C. How much D. How often
……………………………………? ~ Black. And it’s very long.
A. What color are her lips B. What color is her hair
C. What color are her teeth D. What color are her hair
VIII: Chia d¹ng ®óng cña ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc
My brother (21 – do) ………………… his homework in his room at present. He always (22 – do) ………………… it in the evening.
What (23 – be) ………………… there (24 – drink) ………………… for dinner?
Nam usually (25 – not play) ……………… sports, but sometimes, he (26 – fly) ………………… the kites.
What you (27 – do) ………………… this summer holiday? ~ We (28 – visit) ………………… President Ho Chi Minh’s Mausoleum.
Let’s (29 – help) ………………… Mom, Lan. You mustn’t (30 – eat) ………………… food in the classroom.
IX: §iÒn giíi tõ thÝch hîp vµo chç trèng nÕu cÇn. NÕu kh«ng cÇn th× ®iÒn q
I live (31) ………………… a small house (32) ………………… the countryside.
My house is (33) ………………… a bookstore and a toystore: the bookstore to the left and the toystore to the right.
Miss Mai wants a kilo ………………… (34) meat and a dozen (35) ………………… eggs.
Nga goes (36) ………………… school (37) ………………… foot every morning and she goes (38) ………………… home (39) ………………… four thirty in the afternoon.
Who do you usually play badminton (40) …………………?
X: Cho d¹ng ®óng cña tõ in hoa ®Ó hoµn thµnh c©u.
I’d like some bread. Let’s go to the (41) ………………… BAKE
My mother and my sister are (42) ………………. My mother (43) ………………
English at a primary school near my house. TEACH
Thai Binh has a lot of (45) …………… beaches as: Con Vanh, Diem Dien, … etc BEAUTY
You must be (46) ………………… when you cross the busy streets. CARE
My school library is on the (47) …………… floor. I go there (48) …………… a week. TWO
Why are you (49) ………………… late for school? USUAL
There are many (50) ………………… in the summer. ACT
XI: §iÒn “a / an / the / some / any” vµo chç trèng nÕu cÇn. NÕu kh«ng cÇn th× ®iÒn q
I am going to (51) ………………… supermarket. I want to buy half (52) ………………… kilo of beef.
There’s (53) ………………… orange and (54) ………………… apple pie on the kitchen table.
Are you hungry? Would you like (55) ………………… bread? ~ No, thanks. I’m not hungry. I don’t want (56) ………………… bread.
I like learning English best. It is my (57) ………………… favorite subject at school.
Are there (58) ………………… trees in front of your house? ~ Yes. And there are (59) ………………… flowers, too.
My sister usually goes to school at (60) ………………… quarter to seven. She is never late for school.
ENGLISH TEST 17
I: T×m vµ söa lçi sai trong mçi c©u sau.
1. My father doesn’t like coffee. He doesn’t never drink it.
Ba gets up at 6 o’clock and gets dressing.
Would you like some noodles? ~ Yes, I wouldn’t. I’m not hungry but I’m thirsty. I’d like a cold drink.
What are you doing when it’s cold?
Where is your classroom? ~ It’s on the nineth floor.
How do you say the word “businessman”? ~ B – U – S – I – N – E – S – S – M – A – N.
After getting up in the morning, Hoa washes her face, brushes her tooth and then has breakfast.
How many homework does Ba have every day? ~ He has a lot of homework.
How often does Mr. Ba go to Ha Noi? ~ Seldom, one a year.
Are you and Hoa in grade 6? ~ Yes. We are at class 6A.
II: T×m mét tõ thÝch hîp ®iÒn vµo mçi chç trèng trong ®o¹n v¨n sau
I get up at six o’clock every day. I brush my teeth, wash my face, (1) ………………… a shower and then have breakfast. My breakfast has bread, cheese, beefsteak (2) ………………… some milk. After morning classes, I have (3) ………………… with noodles, an apple and a glass of orange (4) …………………. In the afternoon, I have more three classes. I go home at five o’clock after playing sports with my school friends. I like (5) ………………… badminton very much. We also (6) ………………… aerobics three times a week. I have dinner (7) ………………… my family at half (8) ………………… six. Then I do my homework. Sometimes, I watch television or listen to music or play video (9) ………………… after finishing homework. I usually go to bed at ten o’clock. I never (10)………………… up too late at night.
III. Chän tõ cã phÇn g¹ch ch©n in nghiªng ph¸t ©m kh¸c:
board factory short floor
winter hospital business building
ahead breakfast great heavy
produce pollute collect volleyball
teachers thanks pupils farmers
flow throw yellow plow
look school book room
clothes oranges watches glasses
hour house help home
fall cat plan scrap
IV. Chän tõ hoÆc côm tõ trong ngoÆc thÝch hîp víi chç trèng trong c©u:
I’m going to the ________ now. I want to buy some bread(post office / drugstore / bakery / toys tore)
It is twenty–five past ________. (fifty / a quarter / four o’clock / eleven)
She doesn’t have ________ friends at school. (a / some / many/ much)
There is ________ rain in our country. (a lot / many / a few / a lot of)
My sister ________ and play volleyball. (can swims / cans swim / can swim / swim)
Mexico City has a population ________ 13.6 million. (of / on / in / to)
He wants _________ an engineer. (to be / being / be / is)
They would like some milk ________ dinner. (in / at / for / of)
It’s also ________ cleaner and nicer. (more / much / many / most)
Wai Man is from ______ . He speaks _______ .
(Chinese-China / China-Chinese / Chineses- China / Chinas-Chinese)
________ the three books, the green one is mine. (In / On / Of / To)
There are ________ syllables in the word “supermarket”. (two / three / four / five)
~ Do you live in the country or in the city?
~ ________ (Yes, I do / I live in the city / No, I don’t / I live on the city)
Look ________ that man. He is looking ________ Hoa, but she isn’t there. (for-at / at-for / at-at / in-for)
A glass of ________ , please. I never drink alcohol. (orange juice / whisky / larger / beer)
I hope the _________ can repair our car quickly. ( mechanic / reporter / architect / dentist)
What part of the country are you ________ ? (to / by / of / from)
Minh is the ________ student of the two boys (better / best / good / well)
Where is Lan? – She is down ________ the river. (in / next / by / on)
She’s doing ________ in the garden, just walking about. (anything / nothing / everything / something)
V. ViÕt d¹ng thÝch hîp cña ®éng tõ trong ngoÆc:
Look! The plane is flying towards the airport. It (land).
Your father (go) to work by bike every day?
My sister always wears nice clothes for work. Today she (wear) a blue jacket and shirt.
What you (do) this summer holiday? 5. We shouldn’t (throw) trash on the street.
(Not ask) him to lend. He doesn’t have any money 7. It usually (rain) a lot in June?
Lan with her mother (go) to the market at the moment.
There (be) a vase of flowers in the sitting room?
It’s a pity that she (not understand) what I am saying at the moment.
VI. Chän a; an; any; some thÝch hîp víi chç trèng trong mçi c©u:
I would like ______ dozen eggs. 2. They are planting ______ trees in the garden.
There aren’t _______ pictures in the album. 4. Would you like______ coffee?
There is _______ orange in the box. 6. Do you have _______ brothers or sisters?
There is ______ milk in the bottle. 8. Mrs. Brown doesn’t have _______ children
VII. S¾p xÕp c¸c tõ, côm tõ thµnh c©u cã nghÜa:
classroom/ desks / it/ is/ Mai’s/ has/ on/ floor/ fifth/ the/ twenty/and.
does/ your/ every/ what/ sister/ afternoon/ play?
you/ me/ to/ with/ would/ like/ shopping/ the/ help?
Mekong River/ starts/ the/ Tibet/ in/ flows/ into/ the/ Bien Dong/ and.
spring/ weather/ the/ in/ the/ warm/ is/ usually.
you/ going to/ what/ do/ summer/ this/ vacation/ are?
like/ I/ wouldn’t/ because/ bread/ not/ I’m/ hungry.
Mr./ Mrs. Thu/ travel/ work/ bus/ to/ and/ by/ every day/
VIII. Trong mçi c©u sau cã mét lçi sai. T×m vµ söa l¹i cho ®óng:
The fall is cool than the summer
How many homework does Ba have every day? He has a lot of homework
A lot of my friends play tennis but not much of them play soccer
My friend sometimes go sailing in the fall
How many childs are there in the room?
He brushes his teeth, takes a shower and gets dressing.
We are pollute the land, the rivers and the oceans.
Lam is a gymnast and she is not week.
IX. ViÕt d¹ng ®óng cña tõ in hoa ®Ó hoµn thµnh c©u:
Has your sister got a _____ ? She looks tired HEAD
This is my favorite chair. It’s so _____ COMFORT
Nobody in my class is _____ than Thuy GOOD
This tree has a lot of green _____ . LEAF
There are many _____ in the summer. ACT
Mr. Minh is always _____. BUSINESS
My friend is a great _____ MUSIC
His ambition is to be a ____ one day. MILLION
X. Dïng tõ gîi ý viÕt l¹i c©u sao cho nghÜa cña c©u kh«ng ®æi so víi c©u ®· cho:
What is the width of the Great Wall? àHow_______________________
It’s very cold. He can’t swim. àIt’s too_____________________
Tuan is the tallest boy in my class. àNo body ____________________
Farmers need more land, so they burn forests. àFarmer burn forests ___________
My sister cycles to the supermarket every day àMy sister goes _______________
Is there a garden in your school? à Does your __________________?
Mr. Minh has a son, Nam àMr. Minh is _________________
This house is small. àIt is ________________________
XI. Dùa vµo tõ gîi ý, viÕt c©u hái vµ c©u tr¶ lêi theo néi dung ®o¹n v¨n:
Mr. Hung is a farmer. He has some paddy fields and he produces a lot of rice. Near his house, he has a small field and he grows a few vegetables. He also has a few fruit trees. They produce a little fruit.
Mr. Hung has some animals. He has two buffalo. They plow the paddy fields and pull a cart. He has a few cows. They produce a little milk. He has some chickens. They produce a lot of eggs. He also has a dog and two cats.
81. What / Mr. Hung / do? 82. .....................................................
83. How / rice / Mr. Hung / produce? 84. .....................................................
85. How / kinds / animals / Mr. Hung / have? 86. .....................................................
87. His cows / plow / paddy fields / pull / a cart? 88. .....................................................
89. Where / his vegetable field? 90. .....................................................
ENGLISH TEST 18
I. T×m tõ thÝch hîp víi mçi chç trèng ®Ó hoµn thµnh ®o¹n v¨n sau:
John likes fishing. He ......(1)...... in the river near our house. ......(2)...... Sunday afternoon, when he ......(3)...... no work, he goes down to the river with a ......(4)...... of water and some sandwiches and fishes ......( 5)...... it is quite dark. There are always a few ......(6)...... people there. They love fishing, ......(7)...... , and they all sit there quietly for hours. ......(8)...... they catch some ......(9)......, sometimes they do not. I do not like that kind of sport ......(10)...... I am not very patient.
II: §äc ®o¹n v¨n vµ chän ®¸p ¸n ®óng cho mçi th«ng tin ë díi
Joanna lives in Oxford in England. She is tall and thin with brown hair and blue eyes. She is 11 years old and her birthday is on June 22nd. She loves swimming very much. In the summer, she goes swimming every afternoon. She sometimes plays tennis, but not always. In the winter, she likes watching television at home. She doesn’t want to go out in the cold weather.
Where does Joanna live?
A. In Oxford. B. In England. C. A & B are correct. D. A & B are incorrect.
What color is her hair?
A. Brown. B. Blue. C. Brown and blue. D. No information.
What is her favorite sport in the summer?
A. Playing tennis. B. Swimming. C. A & B D. Doing aerobics.
How old is she?
A. June 22nd. B. Eleventh C. June. D. Eleven.
Which of the following is NOT true?
A. Joanna doesn’t like going out when it’s cold. B. Joanna is tall and heavy.
C. Joanna enjoys going swimming when it is hot. D. Joanna’s hair is brown and her eyes are blue.
III. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với những từ còn lại.
| 1. | A. boots | B. toothpaste | C. food | D. flood |
| 2. | A. watches | B. brushes | C. classes | D. lives |
| 3. | A. their | B. math | C. thing | D. theater |
| 4. | A. station | B. intersection | C. question | D. invitation |
| 5. | A. teacher | B. children | C. lunch | D. chemist |
| 6. | A. answer | B. travel | C. plane | D. bank |
| 7. | A. teacher | B. repeat | C. year | D. meat |
| 8. | A. warm | B. park | C. farm | D. car |
| 9. | A. one | B. jog | C. box | D. doctor |
| 10. | A. house | B. hour | C. country | D. mouse |
1. She ………………. to the radio in the morning.
| A. listen | B. watches | C. listens | D. sees |
| A. What | B. Where | C. When | D. How |
| A. post office | B. drugstore | C. bakery | D. toystore |
| A. a | B. an | C. any | D. the |
| A. a | B. some | C. many | D. much |
| A. Does Mai have hair C. Does Mai’s hair have | B. Is Mai’s hair D. Is hair of Mai |
| A. What | B. Would | C. How | D. Are |
| A. bar | B. can | C. tube | D. box |
| A. to go | B. go | C. going | D. goes |
| A. have | B. has | C. are | D. is |
| A. a | B. any | C. some | D .an |
| A. reading | B. am reading | C. is reading | D. are reading |
| A .much | B. many | C. long | D. often |
| A .being | B. to be | C. is | D. be |
| A. games and jogging C. volleyball and soccer | B. soccer and aerobics D. volleyball and swimming |
| A. shower C. take the shower | B. take showers D. take a shower |
| A. How often | B. How long | C. How about | D. How |
| A. once | B. twice | C. two times | D. three times |
| A. in | B. at | C. for | D. of |
| A. sit down | B. sitting down | C. to sit down | D. to sitting down |
| 1. | A. boots | B. toothpaste | C. food | D. flood |
| 2. | A. watches | B. brushes | C. classes | D. lives |
| 3. | A. their | B. math | C. thing | D. theater |
| 4. | A. station | B. intersection | C. question | D. invitation |
| 5. | A. teacher | B. children | C. lunch | D. chemist |
| 6. | A. answer | B. travel | C. plane | D. bank |
| 7. | A. teacher | B. repeat | C. year | D. meat |
| 8. | A. warm | B. park | C. farm | D. car |
| 9. | A. one | B. jog | C. box | D. doctor |
| 10. | A. house | B. hour | C. country | D. mouse |
1. I live in the country. There is a rice paddy near…………….. house.
- a B. an C. the D. my
A. behind B. left C. in front D. right
3. It's seven thirty and Minh is late…………….. school.
A. to B. at C. for D. in
4. What do they often do when …………………. cold?
A. there’s B. it’s C. its D. they’re
5. Fall means_________ in British - English.
A. summer B. winter C. autumn D. spring
6. Nam ________ to school everyday.
A. go B. going C. goes D. went
7. How does he go to school? - > On ________
A. bus B. foot C. bike D. walk
8. Look! That boy ___________trash on the street.
A. leave B. leaves C.is leaving D. is going to leave
9. He's from Canada. He _______English.
A. speak B. speaks C. is speaking D. is going to speak
10. ______going to the museum?
A. Let's B. Why don't C. What about D. Do you want
VII. Find and correct the mistakes.
| 1. My mother is going to the market with my. ............................................................................. 2. Mr. Minh rides his bike to work at the moment. ............................................................................ 3. How many homework does Lan have every day? ............................................................................. | 4. The Browns are traveling to Ho Chi Minh City in train. ................................................................. 5. I'm twenty-one year old and I' m a student. ......................................................... |
ENGLISH TEST 19
I. Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others
1. A. fall B. small C. wash D. want
2. A. blue B. tube C. full D. fruit
3. A. bread B. teacher C. eat D. read
4. A. rulers B. pens C stamps D. tables
5. A. benches B. dishes. C. clothes D. classes . 6. A. station B .nose C. eraser D. intersection
7. A. chicken B. children C. lunch D. school.
8. A. they B. thin C. with D. then
9. A. money B. some C. brother D. movie
10. A. skip B. swim C. minibus D. fried
II. Choose the word or phrase which best completes each sentence.
1. How about…………..a cup of tea?
A. drink B. drinking C. you drink D. do you
2.His ………..sport is soccer.
A. nice B. beautiful C. favorite D. interesting
3.……..your school ? – Yes, It is very beautiful.
A. Do you want B. Do you like C. Would you like D. How is
My father ……. …….to work by car.
A. goes often B. often goes C. go often D. is often
Nam wants ……..a doctor.
A. becoming B. become C. to become D. becomes
6. We have English on Monday and Friday. We have it ……………………a week.
A. twice B. two times C. once D. every
How ……….children do you have ?
A. long B. much C. many D. about
There isn’t …….. on your street?
A. no one B. many people C. anyone D. some one
- ……..do you go to school? – I go there on foot.
A. How B. By what C. How many D. How by
How many minutes are there in…………..hour?
A. an B. a C. these D. the
III Each sentence has a mistake. Find and correct it.
1. We play games often after school. ………………………………………………….
2. Let’s us go to the zoo tonight. ………………………………………………
3.What are the weather like in winter?………………………………………………..
4. It is often cold in the summer? ……………………………………………….
5.My brother never goes swiming.…………………………………………
6. Minh is going to the market with I ?………………………………………………
7.I often do my homeworks at night.…………………………………………………………..
8. Are they many students in your school?………………………………………………………………..
9. I need five hundreds grams of beef…………………………………………………………………………….
10. My father is a farmer. He works in a farm.…………………………………………………………………
IV. Give the correct forms of the verbs in brackets to complete the sentences below.
1. He usually (drive ) ……… his car to work, but he ( not, drive ) ………….. at the moment .
2. Where is your mom?- She( be) … . in kitchen. She (cook) … …. …….. dinner.
3. My close friend ( visit ) … …………………………..me next week.
4. Her children (ride) ………………… their bikes to school now.
5. Oh, no! It (rain) ................... We can’t go out . It always (rain) ............. a lot in summer.
6. - What ………your son usally (do ) ................in his free time?
- He usually (play) .................. volleyball and (watch ) ................. T.V.
7. - What ………...you ( do ) ……………………..at present? I(write)............. …………a letter to my grandparents in Vinh city.
8. He (not ,go)......................... to school on Sundays. 9. Look! Our teacher (arrive).................................here.
10. What (be) ………..there (eat ) ............................for dinner?
11. What … …..your mother (do) … ……….? - She (be) …….. a teacher.
12. We mustn’t ( go )………………………….straight when the traffic light is red.
V. Read the text and choose the best answer to complete each sentences below.
Americans usually (1) ______ up very early. They have breakfast between six (2)______ nine. They usually have bread or a (3)______ and a cup of tea or coffee for breakfast. Most people eat a quick (4)______ at twelve or twelve thirty. The big meal of the day (5)______ usually dinner. This is usually between (6)______ and seven o’clock in the evening. They usually have (7)______ , fish, vegetables and fruit for dinner. They often (8)_______ beer or wine, too.
1. A. have B. get C. eat D. sleep
2. A. at B. between C. to D. and
3. A. sandwiches B. sandwich C. rice D. orange
4. A. dinner B. lunch C. supper D. breakfast
5. A. is B. does C. are D. going
6. A. seven thirty B. nine C. eight D. six
7. A. meat B. dinner C. oil D. soap
8. A. cook B. drink C. buy D. eat
VI. Read the following passage and answer the questions
Marry is 21. She has fair hair and blue eyes. She has two brothers, William and Phillip but she doesn’t have any sisters. Her brothers have brown hair and brown eyes. One of her brother, Phillip, is married and has two children, so she is an aunt. Marry lives with her parents in an apartment, it has five rooms but it doesn’t have a garden. She has her own room in the apartment. In it she has a computer and a TV. She has a car but her parents don’t have one because they can’t drive.
- How old is Marry?…………………………………………………………………..
- How many brothers does she have?……………………………………………………………………..
- What color are her eyes?……………………………………………………………………..
- Does Marry live with her parents in a house?…………………………………………………………………..
- Is there a computer and a TV in Marry’s room?……………………………………………………………….
VII. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning.
1. How old is she? What ……………………………………………………………………………...?
2. The bookstore is to the right of the toy store.The toy store is……………………………………........................?
3. How much is a bowl of noodles? How much does……………………………………………………………..?
4. Orange juice is her favorite drink. She ………………………………………………………………………
5. Is there a garden in your school?Does your …….……..………………………………………………………...?
6. Why don’t we help these old women? What about ………………………………………………………………
7. The girl is very beautiful.She is …………………………………………………..................
8. My sister often walks to school. My sister often ………………………………………………………………….
9. I want a bowl of noodles.I’d …………………………………………………………………….
10. That pencil belongs to Hoa.-> That’s……………………………
VIII. Give the correct form of the words in capital in brackets.
| 1. The Mekong River is _______ river in Viet Nam (long ). 2. These flowers are _________than these trees (beautiful). 3. He is a________ of English at a high school (teach). 4. There are four _______ in my house (bookshelf). | 5. She likes_____ sweets (eat). 6. Lan is the______ girl in her class.(beauty) 7. We don’t like going in his car as he is a______ driver (care). 8. Mai's sister is a _____ (sing). |
I don’t usually eat breakfast. I only have _______(1) of coffee. I don’t eat _______ (2) until about eleven o’clock. Then I have a biscuit and a glass of _______ (3) . For lunch I usually have a salad. That’s _______ (4) about two o’clock. I have _______(5) at half pass six in the afternoon. I’m a vegetarian, so I don’t eat _______(6) or fish. I eat cheese and eggs and things like that. I have a glass of water or fruit _______(7) with my meals.
At the weekends, I go to a _______(8) in the evenings. You can_______(9) vegetarian meals in a _______(10) restaurants now.
| 1. | A. a packet | B. a cup | C. a can | D. a bar |
| 2. | A. any | B. some | C. anything | D. something |
| 3. | A. peas | B. rice | C. chocolates | D. milk |
| 4. | A. at | B. on | C. in | D. of |
| 5. | A. breakfast | B. lunch | C. dinner | D. supper |
| 6. | A. meat | B. rice | C. vegetables | D. noodles |
| 7. | A. water | B. soda | C. juice | D. lemonade |
| 8. | A. store | B. restaurant | C. shop | D. apartment |
| 9. | A. get | B. getting | C. to get | D. gets |
| 10. | A. many | B. much | C. dozen | D. lot of |
There are four seasons in a year.They are spring, summer, fall and winter. In the spring, the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold but not very cold.There are many flowers in the spring. In the summer , the day is long and the night is short. People often go swimming in this season. The fall is the season of fruits. In the winter, it’s usually very cold The day is short and the night is long.
Answers:
- How many seasons are there in a year?...............................................................................
- What are they?......................................................................................
- Is it usually warm in the spring?...............................................................................
- What are there in the spring?....................................................................................
- What do people often do in the summer?..........................................................................
- Is the day long or short in the summer?............................................................................
It’s six o’clock in the evening. Many people are at home. They are having dinner. They are watching T.V. They are listening to music. But Mrs Lan is going to work. She’s a doctor and she works at night in the hospital. Today she’s late. The hospital is not in her neighborhood so she usually goes by car. Mrs Lan is in her car now. She’s driving fast. She should slow down but she must be at work by six thirty. A policeman stops her. “You are driving too fast!” he says. "You are going to have an accident". It’s six thirty. Mrs Lan is not at the hospital. She’s at the police station. Her car must stay there for fourteen days.
| 1. Many people are not working. | |
| 2. Mrs Lan comes home every evening at six. | |
| 3. Mrs Lan is a nurse. | |
| 4. The hospital is near her house. | |
| 5. Mrs Lan goes to work by motorbike. | |
| 6. She is late for work. |
ENGLISH TEST 20
Bài I. Tìm từ mà phần gạch chân có cách phát âm khác với những từ còn lại
1. A. part B. take C. date D. favor
2. A. beds B. doors C. plays D. students
3. A. chorus B. school C. architect D. chair
4. A. thick B. thank C. though D. think
5. A. expect B. expand C. exam D. exercise
6. A. bought B. daughter C. cough D. sight
7. A. sure B. soup C. season D. small
8. A. switch B. stomach C. match D. catch
9. A. but B. bury C. nut D. young
10. A. study B. ready C. copy D. occupy
Bài II. Chọn đáp án thích hợp nhất trong ngoặc để hoàn thành câu
11. …… is your favorite place?
A. What B. When C. Where D. How
12. There are …… accidents on the roads nowadays.
A. many B. much C. a lot D. a little
13. This is a secret. You......... anyone
A. mustn’t be B. mustn’t tell C. mustn’t say D. speak
14. The roard signs are very ........... They tell us what we must do.
A. useful B. dangerous C. easy D. difficult
15. Throw the papers in the waste......... I don’t need them anymore
A. bag B. box C. basket D. 0
16. Let’s play a ........ now.
A. guitar B. games C. sports D. game
17. There ............ of stars in the sky.
A. is million B. are million C. are millions D. has millions
18. My girlfriend is a ..........
A. gymnastic B. gymnasium C. gymnasts D. gymnast
19. My son is really afraid ......... dogs.
A. for B. of C. with D. at
20. They want ........ to many different places in the country
A. travel B. traveling C. to travel D. traveled
Bài III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành đoạn văn sau
I am a student at Tran Phu school. I (21- be) in grade 6 now. But after vacation this summer I (22- be) in grade 7. Everyday I (23- go) to school and (24- do) the homework but today it’s Saturday. Tomorrow, I (25- not go) to school so I (26- not do) my homework now. I (27- watch) television. My father (28- say) “We (29- visit) our grandfather tomorrow”. I (30- love) my grandfather a lot and he (31- do). Tomorrow we (32- have) lunch with our grandfather.
Bài IV. Sử dụng từ gợi ý trong ngoặc viết lại những câu sau sao cho nghĩa của câu không đổi
33. Mrs Thu would like six oranges (DOZEN)
34. She needs half a kilo of beef. (GRAMS)
35. How much does an ice-cream cost? (IS)
36. No sudent in the class is taller than John. (TALLEST)
37. What about going fishing this Saturday? (DON'T)
38. Mr. and Mrs. Pike have daughter, Mary. (PARENTS)
39. They are flying to Ho Chi Minh City now. (TRAVELING)
40. There are about one thousand students in our school. (HAS)
41. My sister has a round face (IS)
42. Trang gets up at five forty-five every morning. (A QUARTER)
Bài V. Có một lỗi sai trong 4 phần được gạch chân ở mỗi câu tìm và chữa lại cho đúng
43. We live on a nice and clean house in the country.
A B C D
44. Hoa’s school have got twenty classrooms.
A B C D
45. It is very dangerously to drive too fast.
A B C D
46. Can you go to the store to buy some fruit to me?
A B C D
47. I would like buying a packet of tea and a tube of toothpaste.
A B C D
48. My classmates always have a picnic two a year.
A B C D
49. Mary is traveling by bus and visit a lot of intersting places.
A B C D
50. I think no city in the world are more beautiful than Paris.
A B C D
51. What is your sister do when it is cold?
A B C D
52. How long are you go to stay with your aunt and uncle?
A B C D
Bài VI. Dùng từ gợi ý viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh có nghĩa
53. My son / never/ dentist/ so / his/ teeth/ bad
………………………………………………………………………
54.They/ visit/ Yen Tu Pogoda/ way to Ha Noi/ next week.
………………………………………………………………………………
55. I/ do /homework/ moment/ so/ can not/ go/ you.
……………………………………………………………………………
56. John/ not/ have/ blue eyes/ but/ color/ eyes/ black.
………………………………………………………………………………
57. Mary/ always/ cycle/ school/ and/ never/ late.
……………………………………………………………………………
58. Peter/ from/ Great Britain/ and/ speak/ English.
……………………………………………………………………
59. There/ much/ noise/ many/ vehicles/ city.
………………………………………………………………………
60. It / too/ far/ us/ go/ Hai Phong/ bike.
…………………………………………………………………
61.When/ not/ need/ light/ you/ switch.
……………………………………………………………………………
62. Mark/ watch/ television/ or/ listen/ music/ after/ school?
……………………………………………………………………………………
Bài VII. Đặt câu hỏi cho từ được gạch chân ở những câu sau
63. We shouldn't walk because it is too far. -> ……………………………
64. They are going to stay there for a week. -> ……………………………………
65. Peter has three meals a day. -> ……………………………………
66. My mother is going to visit her friend this Sunday.…………………………………………………………………
67. His teacher is very young and nice. ->…………………………………….
68. We smell the noodles at the store. -> …………………………………
69. Her roommates are from Mexico. ->…………………………………………
70. No. She doesn't have Literature on Monday. ->……………………………….
71. My father goes jogging three times a week. ->……………………………………………………………...
72. My brother is 170 cm tall. ->………………………………………………………………
Bµi VIII. §äc kü ®o¹n v¨n sau và chän mét ®¸p ¸n ®óng trong sè A, B, C hoÆc D
I live in a house near the sea. It is ...(73)... old house, about 100 years old and...(74)... very small. There are two bed rooms upstairs...(75)... no bathroom. The bathroom is downstairs ...(76)... the kitchen and there is a living room where there is a lovely old fire place. There is a garden...(77)... the house. The garden...(78)... down to the beach and in spring and summer...(79)... flowers every where. I like alone...(80)... my dog, Rack, but we have a lot of visitors. My city friends often stay with ...(81)...
I love my house for... (82)... reasons the garden, the flowers in summer, the fee in winter, but the best thing is the view from my bedroom window.
| 73. | A. a | B. an | C. the | D. any |
| 74. | A. it's | B. it | C. there's | D. they're |
| 75. | A. and | B. or | C. but | D. too |
| 76. | A. between | B. next | C. near to | D. next to |
| 77. | A. in front | B. front of | C. of front in | D. in front of |
| 78. | A. go | B. going | C. goes | D. in goes |
| 79. | A. there are | B. they are | C. there are | D. those are |
| 80. | A. for | B. of | C. on | D. with |
| 81 | A. me | B. I | C. my | D. I'm |
| 82. | A. a | B. any | C. many | D. a lot |
|
|
ENGLISH TEST 21
I. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it has the similar meaning to the first.
1. This school is big and modern. -> It …………………
2. She goes to school on foot.-> She…………………………..
3. There are four rooms in my house.-> My house …………………………..
4. I go to school at six thirty -> I go to school ……………………….
5. She likes noodles.-> Her favorite …………………………….
6. The movie theater is in front of the hotel.-> The hotel ……………………………….
2/ Write a paragraph about Jane using the given cues.
Jane / gymnast . She/ pretty. She/ tall /thin. She /light /but she / not/week. She /oval /lovely face. She /long /black /hair /brown eyes. She/ small mouth. Her teeth /small / white . Everyone /love her because she/ always help/ others.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc
Oh, no! It (rain) ................... We can’t play tennis at the moment.
What your son (have) ................ for breakfast? They (drink) ............. some orange juice now.
She can (speak)............. English. He (eat) ............... a lot of meat?
My mother (give)......... me a new bike next week.
He (not go)................. often to the movies on Sunday nights.
Where Mai (be) ........... now?. Look! She (come)..................
What is there (drink) ............for dinner?
IV. Cho dạng đúng của từ trong ngoặc
| 1. My mother is a....................................................of English. | (TEACH) |
| 2. Our .....................................................are in the bookstore. | (CHILD) |
| 3. In the ................................there is a museum, a factory, and a stadium | (NEIGHBOR) |
| 4. There is a .........................................rice paddy near my house | (BEAUTY) |
| 5. His ......................................................are small and long. | (FOOT) |
| 6. Mai’s sister is a…………………….. | (SING) |
| 7. There are four................................... in my house. | (BOOKSHELF) |
| 8. We must be ............................................. when we cross the road. | (CARE) |
| 9. Nam is the …................................................ of the three boys. | (TALL) |
| 10. Thuy is a good................................................ | (STUDY) |
There are (1)................. seasons in North of Vietnam. I like the spring and (2) ............ most. In the spring, it is warm and there are many kinds of (3) .............. blowing. I live in the countryside so the air is very fresh in the spring. The view looks like a beautiful picture. In the summer, it is very (4)............. My friends and I usually (5)............... swimming and (6) ................. our kites. Sometimes we (7) ............... fishing. I don't like the (8) .................. because the (9).................... is very cold and there is a lot of cold wind. I like living in the (10)......................
VI. Mỗi câu sau đây có một lỗi, hãy tìm và sửa cho đúng
| Eg: 0. Minh don’t work in a bank | don’t à doesn’t |
| 1. We are going stay in Phong Nha for three days. | |
| 2. Does your sister have more or less vacations than you? | |
| 3. The public library in the city has thousand of good books. | |
| 4. It takes me about fifteen minutes going to school by bicycle. | |
| 5. Would you like go to the cinema tonight? | |
| 6. You look tired. You’d better staying inside at recess. | |
| 7. My sister likes badminton but she doesn’t play it very good. | |
| 8. Minh enjoys to play volleyball in his free time. | |
| 9. She buys some book from the shop. | |
| 10. He doesn’t usually come house late. |
1. The bookstore is to the left of his house. His house ……………………………………………………….
2. The building is tall. It’s .....…………………………………................................………………….
3. How much meat do you want?How much meat would …………………………...…………………….....
4. This box has twenty packets of tea. There ………………………………………..………………………..
5. What is the price of the flowers?How …………………………………………..…………………………
6. Mr. Kien has a daughter. Her name is Lan. Mr. Kien is ..................................... ...............................………
7. Does your school have over eight hundred students?Are……………………....………………………..
8. My house is behind the hotel. The hotel …………………................................………….…………
9. We usually ride to school.We usually go........................................................................................................
10. She likes orange juice best.Her favorite ......................................................................................................
- VIII. Dùng từ gợi ý cho sẵn để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh.
- 1. They/ often / go / park.
- ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
- 2. What / weather / like / spring?
- ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
- 3. When / hot / I / swimming.
- ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
- 4. My father / visit / Ha Noi / this summer vacation.
- ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
- 5. How / much / a fried rice?
- ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
- 6. How/ your father / go / work?
- ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
- 7. What time / you / go to bed?
- ………………………………………………………………...…………………………………
- 8. It / hot / Viet Nam / April?
- ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
- 9. When / you / go out / your friends?
- ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
- 10. How often / you / ride / bike?
ENGLISH TEST 22
QuestionI:Chọn và khoanh tròn từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác so với các từ cùng hàng
| 1. A. gray | B. face | C. orange | D. make |
| 2. A. big | B. time | C. fine | D. light |
| 3. A. tall | B. fat | C. cat | D. hat |
| 4. A. do | B. brother | C. two | D. to |
| 5. A. has | B. name | C. family | D. lamp |
7. A. middle B. mile C.kind D.time
8. A.school B.scout C. sew D. sure
9. A. everything B.tooth C. theater D., they
10. A. marbles B. classes C. teaches D.changes.
Question III. Chọn đáp án đúng nhất
1. ______ trash over there.
A. Don’t throw B. Not throw C. Throw D. Can’t throw
2. There is _____ oil in the bottle. We should buy some more.
A. little B. a little C. few D. a few
3. ______ fruit does your father produce?
A. How much B. How many C. How long D. How often
4. What would you like to do at the weekend?
A. I like to do a lot B. I can’t do it C. I’d like to do D. I don’t like the weekend
5. What about ______ a cup of coffee ?
A. A have B. having C. you have D. do you have
6. Are there ................... stores on your street?
| A. a | B. an | C. any | D. the |
| A. there are | B. there has | C. are there | D. have there |
Ours country is small and very beautiful. It has four season in a year. They are Spring, Summer, Autumn and Winter. It is warm on spring, hot in summer coll in autumn and cold in winter. When a weather is warm, we often playing volleyball, tennis or go fishing. When it is hot, we often go camping or go swimming. When it cool we often play footballs or go jogging. When the weather is cold, we often play basketball, skip or play video game. We favourite season is autumn because the weather in autumn is not very cold and not very hot. The weather is cool so it is very good with our health.
Question V-Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc1.Tuan and his brother (not watch)…TV at the moment. They (be)…asleep.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
2. My father always (come)….home late. He (finish)…work at 5 o’clock.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
3. I (not understand)…this sentence. What this word (mean)…?
……………………………………………………………………………………….
4. Right now I (look)…around the classroom. Minh (write)…in his book.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
5. Lien’s friend (have)…a new bike but he (not like)…it very much.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
6. Where your children ( be) ...? - They’re upstairs. They (play) ...video games.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
7. What you ( do) ... now? - I (unload) ... the vegetables.
……………………………………………………………………………………….
8. Nam (work) .... in the garden at the moment?
……………………………………………………………………………………….
QUESTION VI- Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân
She walks to school veryday.……………………………………………………………………?
My sister works in Sydney, Australia.……………………………………………………………………?
We are having bread and milk for breakfast.……………………………………………………………………?
There are 10 boys and 19 girls in our class.……………………………………………………………………?
Thu is reading a book.……………………………………………………………………?
QUESTION VII –Dựa vào thông tin trong nhật ký của Ann để hoàn thành đoạn hôi thoại sau: ( 20 điểm)
Mon | Tues. | Wed. | Thur | Fri | Sat | Sun. |
Language class | Study for test | Guitar lesson | TV | Movie | camping | rest |
Mary: What (1)…………………………………….next week, Ann?
Ann: I’m very busy indeed. On Monday (2)…………………………………………..….
Mary:Are you? Do you go to language class every Monday?
Ann: Yes, I do
Mary:What’s (3)……………………………………………………..…….evening?
Ann: I’m staying at home to study (4)…………………………………….…..
Mary: (5)…………………………………………free on Wednesday night?
Ann: No, I’m not. I always have (6)……………………………..……..Wednesdays.
Mary:Do you ever stay at home and (7)………………………………………..….?
Ann: Yes, I’m doing that on Thursday. But on Friday, I’m not (8) …………………… I’m going (9)………………………………with Sarah.
Mary: Surely you are staying at home on the weekend.
Ann: Well, On Saturday I’m (10)…………………..…..but on Sunday I’m taking a rest.
Question VIII: Viết lại các câu sau giữ nguyên nghĩa so với câu gốc
1. Lan’s hair is long. -> Lan …………….…………………………………………………………….
2. Nam rides his bike to school everyday. -> Nam goes ……………………………………………………………
3. Let’s go swimming. -> What about ………………………………………………………..?
4. My house is behind the post office. -> The post office ……………………………………………………….
5. She likes drinking milk. -> Milk is …………………………………………………………………….
6. What’s the height of the Mount Everest? -> How ……………………………………………………………….?
7. This boy is strong and tall. -> He is ………………………………………………………………..
8. My room is smaller than your room.-> Your room is …………………………………………………………….
9. Mr. Hung drives very carefully.-> Mr Hung is ……………………………………………………………………
10. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms?-> Are …………………………………………………………….?
IX. Sắp xếp những từ sau thành câu hoàn chỉnh
house/ a/ Minh/ lake/ a/ lives/ in/ near.
………………………………………………………………………
yard/ front/ school/There/ big/ of/ is/ our/ in/ a.
………………………………………………………………………
many/ right/ the/ museum/ Are/ flowers/ the/ there/ to/ of/?
………………………………………………………………………
next/ photocopy/ What/ store/ there/ the/ is/ to /?
………………………………………………………………………
hospital/ father/ in/ the/ city/ My/ a/ works/ in.
………………………………………………………………………
there/ family/ many/ in/ are/ How/ Linh’s/ people/ ?
………………………………………………………………………
his/ friend/ in/ family/ My/ Hanoi/ doesn’t/ with/ live.
………………………………………………………………………
brushes/ six/ gets/ her/ o’clock/ Hoa/ at/ up/ teeth/ and.
………………………………………………………………………
on/ floor/ classroom/ the/ is/ Our/ first.
………………………………………………………………………
Minh’s/ six/ There/ in/ rooms/ house/ are.
……………………………………………………………………
X. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần bị gạch chân ở mỗi câu.
1. She is cooking dinner in the kitchen.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
2. I’d like some milk and vegetables.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
3. Miss. Nga is teaching English at a secondary school.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
4. Nam never flies a kite.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
5. I have Math and Literature on Monday and Thursday.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
6. He goes to the movies once a week.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
7. My sister is in grade 6.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
8. Mai always has dinner at seven o’clock.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
9. My brother wants a glass of lemon juice.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
10. Linh has milk and eggs for her breakfast.
…………………………………………………………………………………………
XI: Chän c©u ®óng tõ nh÷ng tõ bÞ x¸o trén
1. dinner / when / get/ home / we / have / let’s
A. Let’s have home when we get dinner. B. Let’s have dinner get when we home.
C. Let’s have dinner when we get home. D. Let’s have get dinner when we home.
how / do / Jack / sports / Tom / and / often / play?
A. How often do Jack and Tom play sports? B. How do Jack and Tom play sports often?
C. How often Jack and Tom do play sports? D. How do Jack often and Tom play sports?
day / James / homework / every / his / does.
A. James does every day his homework. B. James every day does his homework.
C. James does his homework every day. D. James does every his day homework.
famous / reading / I / people / about / like / books.
A. I like reading about people famous books. B. I like reading books about famous people.
C. I like reading books about people famous. D. I like reading about people books famous.
5. short / girl / hair / tall / with / black / a / is.
A. She is a girl tall with short black hair. B. She is a tall girl with black short hair.
C. She is a short girl with tall black hair. D. She is a tall girl with short black hair.
XII: ViÕt l¹i c¸c c©u sau b¾t ®Çu b»ng tõ ®· cho sao cho nghÜa cña c©u kh«ng ®æi
1. Shall we go camping in Con Vanh Beach this Sunday?
| Let |
| How much |
| Is the post office |
| My father is traveling |
| Nam’s father has |
| How much beef would |
| My new house |
| I go |
| What |
| Nhung |
ENGLISH TEST 23
I. Choose the word or phrase of words which best completes each of the following sentences
0. We shouldn’t _____ trash on the street .
A. throwing B. to throw C. throws D. throw
01. Lemonade, apple juice, soda and ______ are cold drinks.
A. beans B. noodles C. vegetables D. iced tea
02. We have English on Tuesday and on Saturday. We have it _____ a week .
A. once B. twice C. two times D. three times
03. Ngoc and Yen often do aerobic in ____ free time .
A. your B. his C. her D. their
04. Mai doesn’t like playing soccer. She ____ plays soccer .
A. always B. usually C. never D. often
05. He wants ____ an engineer.
A. to be B. being C. be D. is
06. They would like some milk _____ dinner.
A. in B. at C. for D. of
07. Minh often goes _____ in the mountain on the weekend.
A. walking B. walks C. walk D. to walk
08. My father is _____ man.
A. a old B. an old C. not young D. not very young
09. I’m tired . I’d like ______ .
A. sit down B. sitting down C. to sit down D. to sitting down
10. Do you have any toothpaste? I’d like a large _____ .
A. tube B. roll C. bar D. tin
II. Complete the following sentences with an appropriate form of the word in bracket .
01. There are four ______ in my house . ( bookshelf )
02. The photocopy store is between the _____ and the drugstore . ( bake )
03. Is your brother an _____ ? ( act )
04. Mai’s sister is a _____ . ( sing )
05. We must be _____ when we cross the road . ( care )
06. This tree has a lot of green _____ . ( leaf )
07. Is his father a ______ . ( business )
08. I’m Vietnamese. What’s your ______ ? ( nation )
09. Air _____ is a big problem in many cities in the world . ( pollute )
10. Yoko is from Japan . She is ______ . ( Japan )
III. Read the passage and choose
My name is Petty and this is my husband, Phil. We both work in offices in London. We have breakfast at half past seven. We don’t have a big breakfast. We usually have bread, coffee and orange juice. For lunch we usually have a salad or soup and sandwich. That’s at about 1.30
We usually have dinner at half past seven in the evening. It is a big meal of the day and we have meat or fish with vegetables and potatoes or rice. We have orange juice with the milk. On Saturday we often go to a restaurant for dinner at about eight o’clock.
1/ Petty and her husband work in
A/offices B/factories C/ hospitals D/ clinics
2/Petty and Phil have
A/a big breakfast B/ a light breakfast C/ breakfast with meat D/ breakfast with eggs
3/ What do they have for lunch?
A/ salad and sandwich B /salad and soup C /fish and soup D/ sandwich and fish
4/What do they drink for dinner?
A/iced tea B/ iced coffee C/ soda D/ orange juice
5/ What time do they usually have dinner?
A/6.30 B/7.15 C /7.30 . D/ 8.00
6/ Where do they have dinner on Saturday evenings?
A/at home B/at a hotel C /at their friend’s house D/ at a restaurant
IV. Fill each of the numbered blanks in the passage . Use only one word for each space
listen Mondays teach have my
movie on lunch usually small
I live in a …(1)…. house in Hanoi. I ….(2)……..English at a school there. I usually ….(3)…….. breakfast at seven o’clock in the morning and I have ……..(4)…. ……at twelve o’clock in the canteen of the school. I teach ……(5)……students in the morning. I teach them dialogues ..(6)…. Wednesdays and Fridays. On …….. ….(7)… I teach them grammar. In the evening I …8)…. stay at home and …(9)… to the radio. I sometimes go to the ……(10)…. .I always go to bed at ten o’clock
V. Complete the passage and answer the questions
winter are night In
but cold seasons are go
There are four (1) ……. in a year. They …(2)……. spring, summer, fall and ..…(3)… .In the spring, the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold …(4)….not very cold .There …(5)……..many flowers in the spring. ……(6)….. the summer, the day is long and the night is short .People often ..(7)…….swimming in this season. The fall is the season of fruits. In the winter, it’s usually very ……(8)…… . The day is short and the ………(9)………is long .
1. How many seasons are there in a year?...............................................................................
2. What are they?......................................................................................
3. Is it usually warm in the spring?...............................................................................
4. What are there in the spring?....................................................................................
5. What do people often do in the summer?..........................................................................
6. Is the day long or short in the summer?............................................................................
VI. Read the passage and check T/F
Hello! My name is Phong. I’m twelve years old and I’m in grade 6. My school is in the country. It’s a small school. My school has two floors and sixteen classrooms . My classroom is on the first floor. There are thirty five students in my class. Every morning I get up at six o’clock. I get dressed, brush my teeth and wash my face. I have breakfast at six twenty and go to school at six forty.
- Phong is twelve years old .
- Phong’s school is in the city
- There are sixty classrooms in Phong’s school .
- Phong’s classroom is on the second floor .
- His class has 53 students .
- He has breakfast at 6.30
8. Phong’s school is small
9. Phong brushes his teeth at 6.20
10. He goes to school at 6.40
VII. Finish each of the following sentences in such a way that it has the similar meaning to the first
1.This school is big .->It ……………………………………………………………………………………………. .
2. She goes to school on foot .->She…………………………………………………………………………………………
3. There are four rooms in my house.->My house ……………………………………………………………………… .
4. I go to school at six thirty >I go to school ……………………….……………………………………………..
5.She likes noodles.->Her favorite ………………………………………………………………………
6. The movie theater is in front of the hotel .->The hotel …………………………………………………………
VIII. Putting the words in the correct order to make the meaningful sentences.
- father / his /time /does /often / what /free /your /in /do?
- sports / play /the /which /he /weekend /does /on?
- your / drink / brother’s /what / favorite /is ?
- small / think /sister / white / and / his / lips / teeth / has .
- an/ the / city / apartment / in / we / in /live
IX.Write a paragraph about Jane using the given cues
Jane / gymnast .She/pretty.She/ tall /thin .She /light /but she / not/week.She /oval /lovely face .She /long /black /hair /brown eyes .She/ small mouth .Her teeth /small / white .Everyone /love her because she/ always help/ others .
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
ENGLISH TEST 24
I. Pick out the word whose underlined and bold part is pronounced differently from that of the other words
1. A.fish B. like C. nine D. rice
2. A. apple B. cabbage C. take D. matter
3. A. brown B. round C. how D. nose
4. A. takes B. yards C. starts D. books
5. A. hotel B. those C. hospital D. cold
6. A. end B. help C. ahead D. eat
II. Complete sentences using the words in the blankets
1. There …………………five people in Nga’s family. ( am / have / is / are ).
2. ……….…………….beef do you want? ( How old / How many /How much/ What)
- I want 2 kilos of beef.
3. My father……..……………….to work by car. ( go / travels / drive / live)
4. The hospital is ………..…………….…the river. ( next to / in / on / under)
5. My mother is not big. She is…………..………....( big / small / fine / game)
6. They………….……….…dinner at the moment. ( is having / are having/ have / has)
7. ………….…..does she live? – On Nguyen Trai street. ( Where / What / How / Who)
8. My sisters ………………….….….teeth every day. ( brush / play / read/ brushes)
III. Use the correct form of the verbs in the blankets
- In the afternoon, he (read)………………books,and they (play)……………soccer.
- Do you (like)………………..chicken? No, I ……………………
- There (not be)……………………any tea. There (be)………………..some coffee.
- Nam (live)……………………in Gialai. Minh (live)……….…………..in Hanoi.
- I like ………………eggs and …………………..meat.
- I don’t want ………………soup. I want ………………….vegetables.
- Nga is …………..…….worker. She has ……………..oval face.
- Do you want……………………milk? Yes, I want………………
A | B |
| 1. How do you go to school? 2. How old is Lan? 3. What does she do? 4. Does she play soccer? 5. Do you watch TV? 6. What’s your favorite food? 7. Where is the bookstore? 8. What do you do in your free time? | a. She is ten years old. b. I like chicken. c. I play soccer. d. I go to school by bike. e. She is a doctor. f. Yes, I do. g. It is next to the hotel. h. No, she doesn’t. |
Today is Sunday, Mrs.Lien (1)………………….to the market. She goes (2)…….…..motorbike. She (3)……………………many things. First, she wants (4)……………. kilo of fish and five hundred grams of beef. She(5)………………like eggs, so she doesn’t buy eggs. Then, she wants (6)……………………….vegetables. She needs four cans of peas, (7)……………….of toothpaste. She goes home (8)………………ten o’clock.
1. A. go B. play C. going D. goes
2. A. on B. by C. to D. at
3. A. want B. like C. wants D. don’t want
4. A. some B. any C. an D. a
5. A. not B. don’t C. doesn’t D. isn’t
6. A. some B. any C. an D. a
7. A. a bar B. a tube C. a box D. a can
8. A. at B. on C. in D. to
VII. Read and choose the best answers
This is Thuan. He is eleven years old. He is in grade 6. His family has four people, his parents, his sister and Thuan. They live in a small house near the Lam river. Thuan gets up at five o’clock. He has breakfast at six fifteen. He goes to school at half past six. The school is not near his house, so he goes by bike. His classes start at seven and end at eleven fifteen. He goes home at twelve o’clock. He has lunch at twelve ten. He likes meat and vegetables. He doesn’t like fish. In the afternoon, he does his homework and then he plays soccer with Minh, his friend.
Sentences | True | False |
| 1. Thuan is eleven years old. | ||
| 2. There are five people in his family. | ||
| 3. He gets up at six o’clock. | ||
| 4. The school is near his house. | ||
| 5. He likes meat. | ||
| 6. He plays soccer with Minh in the morning. | ||
| 7.His classes finish at eleven o’clock. | ||
| 8. He is in grade 6. |
VIII. Make questions
- ……………………………………………………………………..?
- ……………………………………………………………………..?
- ……………………………………………………………………….?
- ……………………………………………………………………….?
IX. Arrange the words or phrases to make full sentences
1. people/ are/ How / in / family / many/ there/ his.
-> …………………………………………………………………….?
2. and / round / full / has / a / lips / face / Hoa.
-> …………………………………………………………………….
3. by/ he / school / bus / goes / to
-> …………………………………………………………………….
4. hungry / We / not /are /
-> …………………………………………………………………….
5. Mr. Quang / what / do / does.
-> …………………………………………………………………….?
6. music / not / to / Nga / listen / does /
-> …………………………………………………………………….
7. is/ She / playing/ soccer/
-> …………………………………………………………………….
8. bananas / How / does/ many / want / he
-> …………………………………………………………………….?
X. You are going to have a summer vacation. Write a short paragraph (about 80-100 words) to say about your plan. The questios bellow may help you.
Which places are you going to visit ? ( first? then? next? after that? and finally?)
Where are you going to stay?
How long are you goig to stay?
What are you going to do do there?
........................................................
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
ENGLISH TEST 25
I. Choose the word having the underlined letters pronounced differently from the other
| 1 | A.game | B.geography | C.vegetable | D.change |
| 2 | A.read | B.teacher | C.eat | D.ahead |
| 3 | A.tenth | B.math | C.brother | D.theater |
| 4 | A.engineer | B.between | C.teeth | D.greeting |
| 5 | A.intersection | B.eraser | C.bookstore | D.history |
| 6 | A.plays | B.says | C.days | D.stays |
| 7 | A.watches | B.brushes | C.classes | D.lives |
| 8 | A.their | B.math | C.thing | D.theater |
| 9 | A.station | B.intersection | C.question | D.invitation |
| 10 | A.teacher | B.children | C.lunch | D.school |
It’s twelve o’clock, Nam. Let’s……..home.
A. go B. to go C. going D. goes
Tuan and I……..badminton in the yard.
A. playing B. is playing C. are playing D. am playing
This sign says “stop!”. We ……..go straight ahead.
A. can B. don’t can C. must D. must not
They are going to New York……..plane.
A. in B. by C. with D. writes
Nam is ……..something on his book.
A. writing B. written C. wrote D. writes
Are there……..stores on your street?
A. a B. an C. any D. the
My sister and I……..television in the living room now.
A. am watching B. are watching C. is watching D. watching
……..do you go to school? – I go there on foot.
A. how B. by what C. how many D. how by
“Does Tom play volleyball?” - “No, …..”
A. she not plays B. she don’t C. she isn’t D. she doesn’t
How many floors …….in your school?
A. there are B. there has C. are there D. have there
11 The city is noisy, but the country is ………….
a. silent b. quiet c. peace d. busy
12 In my bedroom, there are ..................... pictures on the wall.
a. a b. any c. much d. some
13My father is tall, but my brother is ………….
a. tall b. taller c. tallest d. the tallest
14 Mom: Would you ……. noodles? Yes, please.
a. want b. like c. has dhave
15. Ba’s house is near my house. He is my ……………
a. brother b. classmate c. neighbor d. friend
16 I often help my brother ............. his homework.
a. of b. for c. with d. from
17 Anna is talking ................... Annie.
a. to b. with c. of d. on
18. They ……… go out at weekend. They stay at home.
a. always b. usually c. sometimes d. never
19. Is there ………….. else you want?
a. a b. an c. anything d. something
20. Does Mrs. Van ………….. one kilo of sugar?
a. need b. needs c. to need d. needing
III.Supply a suitable preposition to complete the sentence.
1…..(1)…..summer I play tennis…. (2)…the evening.
2.We always go… (3)…..the city center ….(4)….our own car.
3.I’d like to stay….. (5)……home tonight .Is there anything interesting…. (6)…TV?
4.John is often late …..(7)…..school but I am always early.
5.I live only a few yard …..(8)….the bus stop.
6.Let’s listen…….(9)…….some music….(10)…the radio.
IV Fill in each blank with the suitable given word
There are four (1)…… in a year. (2)….. are spring, summer, fall and winter. In the (3)……., the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold (4)…. not very cold. There are (5)…. flowers in the spring. In the summer, the day is long and the night is (6)…. People often (7)… swimming in this season. The fall is the season (8)… fruits. In the (9)…, it is usually very cold. The day is short and the (10)…. is long.
| 1. | A. | weather | B. | seasons | C. | activities | D. | months |
| 2. | A. | It | B. | What | C. | They | D. | The |
| 3. | A. | summer | B. | autumn | C. | fall | D. | spring |
| 4. | A. | but | B. | and | C. | in | D. | too |
| 5. | A. | many | B. | much | C. | two | D. | lots |
| 6. | A. | long | B. | short | C. | fat | D. | tall |
| 7. | A. | go | B. | do | C. | play | D. | skip |
| 8. | A. | on | B. | of | C. | at | D. | in |
| 9. | A. | summer | B. | fall | C. | winter | D. | spring |
| 10. | A. | afternoon | B. | morning | C. | dinner | D. | night |
1.Tuan and his brother (not watch)………,,,…TV at the moment. They (be)………asleep.
2. look! The plane (fly) ............................ toward to the airport. It (land) ............................
3.I (not understand)………………………this sentence. What this word (mean)……
4.Right now I (look)……..…..around the classroom. Minh (write)…………..…in her book.
5.Lien’s friend (have)…………..a new bike but he (not like)…………..it very much.
VI. read and answer questions
My name is Nam. I stay with my friend, my brother and my sister in a small house. My friend’s name is Thang. He is tall and strong. He plays volleyball. My brother is a doctor. His name is Tuan. He is handsome. He is tall but thin. He works in a hospital in Ha noi. My sister is Mai. She is young and nice. She has long dark hair, brown eyes, and an oval face. She is now a student at Nguyen Trai school. She is in grade 6.
1. What’s the writer’s name? ………………………………………………
2. Who is Tuan? ………………………………………………………….
3. Is Thang strong or weak? …………………………………………………..
4. What color is Mai’s hair? …………………………………………………
5. Who has brown eyes? ……………………………………………………..
VII. Complete these sentences using the words given
1. I/ not want/ go out/ night. -> ………………………………………………..
2. The weather / always/ cold/ winter-> ………………………………………
3. Mekong river/ long/ than/ Red river.-> ……………………………………
4. There/ rice paddy/ left/ my house -. ……………………………………….
5. there/ many/ tree/ your village?-> ………………………………………..
6. Long/ tall/ brother/ not. -> ……………………………………………..
7. your school/ big/ small? -> ……………………………………………
8. there/ some tree/ opposite/ hotel -> ………………………………………….....
9. my sister/ like/ read/ book/ I /not /like.-> …………………………………………
10. We/ stop/ when/ light/ red. -> …………………………………………….
VIII.Find the mistakes and correct them.
1.Mr Hien isn’t live in a house in the country.
A B C D
2.The Browns are traveling to Ho Chi Minh City in train.
A B C D
3.There aren’t a trees to the left of Lan’s house.
A B C D
4.That’s my sister over there. She stands near the window.
A B C D
5.Do you know how many teachers does your school have?
A B C D
6.He wants any books on that shelf.
A B C D
7 How many teachers there are in your school?
A B C D
8 They no get up at 6 o’clock.
A B C D
9. Her garden is big. It’s a garden big.
A B C D
10.Sorry. You can't speak to Jim now. He's have a bath.
A B C D
IX. Tìm 1 từ thích hợp điền vào chỗ trống.
SINGAPORE
Singapore is an island city of about three million people. It's a beautiful (1) .................... with lots of parks and open spaces. It's also a very (2) ............................ city.
Most of the people (3) ............................. in high rise flats in different parts of the island. The business district is very modern with (4) ....................... of high new office buildings. Singapore also has some nice older sections. In China town, there (5) ............................ rows of old shop houses. The Government buildings in Singapore are very beautiful (6)............................. date from the colonial days.
Singapore is famous (7)....................... its shops and restaurants. There are many good shopping centers. Most of the (8) .................... are duty free. Singapore's restaurants (9) ................. Chinese, Indian, Malay and European food, and the (10) ....................... are quite reasonable.
X. Haõy cho daïng duùng cuûa caùc tính töø ñaõ cho trong ngoaëc ñeå hoaøn thaønh ñoaïn vaên sau, theo ví du.
Example: 1: best
Dave and I are having the (1-good) ________ holiday of our lives! We are in Barbados, one of the (2- lovely ) ________ islands in the Caribean. Although it is much (3- small)______ than Jamaica, there seems to be ( 4- much)________ to do than in Jamaica. Moreover, the people here seem to be (5-friendly) ________ than those on the other islands. We are staying in the ( 6- mordern)_________ hotel I have ever seen. It’s large and cool, and many people think it is the (7 –good) _________ hotel on the island. It’s far (8- comfortable) _________ than any of the other hotels, and it’s even (9-big)____ than the world famous Belton Hotel. The (10- near) ________ beach is (11-little)_________ than a hundred metres away, and so we can go swimming a lot. It’s really good, and I do wish you were here.
XI. Rewrite these sentences with the same meaning
1. Mr Binh is going to England by plane. (FLYING)…………………………………………………………………..
2. The stadium is behind the park. (FRONT) ………………………………………………………
3. Mrs Khanh has a daughter, Nguyet. (MOTHER)………………………………………………………………..
4. Are there five rooms in Nhung’s house? (HAVE)…………………………………………………………………..
5. My father rides his motorbike to work every day. (BY)…………………………………………………………..
XII. Give the correct form of the word
There are four……………….in my house (BOOKSHELF).
The photocopy is between the ……………….and the drugstore (BAKE).
Is your brother an…………………? (ACT).
Mai’s sister is a…………… ……(SING).
We must be ……………… …when we cross the road (CARE).
This tree has a lot of green …………… ……(LEAF).
Is your father a……………… …(BUSINESS).
I’m Vietnamese. What’s your……………… …?(NATION).
Air ……………… …is a big problem in many cities in the world (POLLUTE).
Yoko is from Japan. She is ……………… …(JAPAN).
XIII- Rewrite these sentences that it means the same as the sentence printed before it.
1. My room is smaller than your room.Your room is…………………………………………………………
2. Mr. Hung drives very carefully. Mr. Hung is ..................................................................
3. Does Phong’s school have forty classrooms? Are …………………………………………?
4. Does your father cycle to work?>Does your father get .......................?
5. How much does a box of chocolates cost? >What ...........................................................?
6. Nam likes tea. >Nam’s favorite .......................
7. The Mekong River is longer than the Red River.The Red River is …………………………………………
8. How much is a bowl of noodles?How much ………………………………………..?
9. What is the height of that building?How ...............................................
10. What is the price of a cake and an orange?How much …………………………………………..?
XIV. Fill in the blank with one suitable word
This (1)…… …….… Smith’s room. You can see, (2).................. room is not very large. (3)…
are two chairs, a table, a bed, a wardrobe (4)…………………….. a bookshelf in his room. The
table is near (5) ………….. window. There is (6) ............. ink- pot, some books and (7) …………
English- Vietnamese dictionary on the table. The bed is on the right. There are also some books and newspapers on the bed. The wardrope is opposite the bed. Smith has many clothes. (8) ………. clothes are all in the wardrobe. The bookshelf is (9)…….. the wall. There are many (10)………….…. on it.
ENGLISH TEST 26
I. Chọn 1 từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại.
| 1. A. brother | B. these | C. thank | D. that |
| 2. A. engineer | B. greeting | C. teeth | D. street |
| 3. A. chair | B. school | C. coach | D children |
| 4. A. tenth | B. math | C. brother | D. theater |
| 5. A. watches | B. brushes | C. glasses | D. lives |
| 6. A. second | B. eraser | C. bookstore | D. history |
| 7. A. usually | B. fly | C. thirsty | D. hungry |
| 8. A. son | B. come | C. home | D. mother |
| 9. A. live | B. his | C. dinner | D. fine |
| 10. A. face | B. small | C. grade | D. late |
II. Chọn phương án đúng nhất điền vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành các câu sa
1. Nam usually goes ……….. after school.
A. to fishing B. home C. the cinema D. house
5. How many floors …………. in your school?
A. there are B. there has C. are there D. have there
6. I usually go to school …………. bike, but today I am going to school ………foot.
A. by / by B. on / on C. by / on D. on / by
7. Are there …………. stores on your street?
A. a B. an C. any D. the
8. …………..do you get there? – We walk, of course.
A. Why B. What C. How by D. How
9. ………….do you work? - I work at a school.
A. What B. Where C. When D. How
10. The opposite of “weak” is …………….
A. thin B. small C. strong D. heavy
11. I’m going to the …………….now. I want to buy some bread.
A. post office B. drugstore C. bakery D. toystore
12. ………….long or short?
A. Does Mai have hair B. Is Mai’s hair
C. Does Mai’s hair have D. Is Mai of hair
13. Don’t be late ………….. your school.
A. on B. at C. to D. for
14. What ………… are her eyes? - They are black.
A. subject B. color C. time D. class
15. My sister is ………….. me.
A. tall than B. taller than C. than tall D. than taller
16. I do not go to school …………. Sundays.
A. on B. in C. at D. for
17. John likes sports very much. He usually plays ………… after school.
A. games and geography B. soccer and literature
C. volleyball and soccer D. volleyball and simming
18.My grandfather is …............. man.
A. a old B. an old C. not young D. not very young
19. We go to school at …………. in the morning.
A. a quarter to seven B. seven to a quarter
C. seven quarter D. a quarter seven to
20. My father gets up at 7.00 and eats ……………..
A. a big breakfast B. the big breakfast C. big breakfast D. a breakfast big
III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc
Mai (not / do) _________ her homework every evening.
She (have) ___________ breakfast at 6.10.
Look ! Linh (come)___________.
Every evening, my father (read) _____________ newspapers.
We (not/ listen) ___________ to the radio after lunch.
Lan and Nga (play) _______ chess in the afternoon?
Where (your children/ be)_____? They’re upstairs. -They (play) _______video games.
What you (do)_______ now? - I (unload)_________ the vegetables.
Nam ( work)________ the garden at the moment?
Our school ( have)________ a small garden. There( be)______ many flowers in it.
11.My father watch) __________TV in the living room. He often ( watch) …… TV in the evening.
IV. Mỗi câu dưới đây có MỘT lỗi sai, em hãy tìm và sửa lỗi sai ấy
1. She and he goes to work on foot . 1. ....................................
2. Mai and Nam don’t go to school in Sundays. 2. ..................................
3. Mr. Linh always have dinner at seven o’clock in the evening. 3. ....................................
4. He comes here with bicycle. 4. .....................................
5. When is your classroom?- On the second floor. 5....................................
V- Đọc kỹ đoạn văn sau đây rôi trả lời các câu hỏi
Linda is a vegetarian so she doesn’t eat meat. She doesn’t have a big breakfast every morning. She usually has
a slide of bread and a glass of milk. She has lunch at the office at about 11.30. She has only rice with vegetables for lunch. At weekends, she often goes to a Chinese restaurant because there is a lot of delicious food for vegetarians.
* Questions:
1. Why doesn’t Linda eat meat?..............................................................................................................................
2. What does Linda usually have for breakfast?
..............................................................................................................................................
3. What does she have for lunch?..................................................................................................................................
.4. Where does she have lunch?.................................................................................................................
5. Why does she often go to a Chinese restaurant at weekends?
..............................................................................................................................................
VI. Sử dụng từ loại đúng của các từ cho sẵn trong ngoặc để hoàn thành câu
There is a …………… next to my house. (bake)
She is a …………… of English. (teach)
Peter ……………… a very big truck. (driver)
4. There are four……………………in my house. (room)
5. Mai's sister is a …………… ……..…………… (work)
VII. Sử dụng các từ gợi ý để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh
1. Minh / live / brother / apartment / town.
..............................................................................................................................................
2. Mrs. Lan / and / children / travel / London / plane.
..............................................................................................................................................
3. There / be / any flowers / your / school / yard ?
..............................................................................................................................................
4. He / not ride / home / but / go / taxi.
..............................................................................................................................................
5. Sister / have / bike / and / cycle / work / everyday.
..............................................................................................................................................
VIII. Viết lại các câu sau theo gợi ý cho sẵn sao cho nghĩa của câu mới tương tự như câu đã cho
1. Does your school have twenty classrooms? Are ………………………………………………………………….
2. Phong has a sister, Lan. Lan is …………………………………………………………………………………..
3. My mother often drives to work. My mother often goes …………………………………………………………
5. Miss White’s face is oval. It is small.Miss White………………………………………………………………….
6. The bookstore is to the right of the restaurant.The restaurant is……………………………………………………
7. He gets up at five fifteen. He …………………………………………………………………..…………………..
8. How many oranges do you want? How many oranges would………………………………………………………
9. Tom travels to work by car every morning.Tom…………………………………………………………………..
10. Carol doesn’t live far from her office.Carol lives…………………………………………………………………..
IX. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân trong các câu sau
Thuy goes to school by bus.……………………………………………………………………………………….
I am in grade 6.………………………………………………………………………………………….
There are four people in his family.……………………………………………………………………………….
Her eyes are brown.………………………………………………………………………………………….
It is cool and nice in the fall in my country.……………………………………………………………………….
They are going to school.………………………………………………………………………………………….
Mrs. Trang feels very tired.……………………………………………………………………………………
Those are armchairs.………………………………………………………………………………………….
An ice – cream is 4,000 dong.…………………………………………………………………………………..
Marie speaks French.…………………………………………………………………………………………...
X. Sắp xếp lại các từ bị sáo trộng thành câu có nghĩa (10 điểm)
1. house / a / Minh /lake / lives / in / near / a.
………………………………………………………………………………………...
2. a / plays / badminton / Paul / week / twice.
………………………………………………………………………………………...
3. like / the / weather / fall/ What / is / the / in?
………………………………………………………………………………………...
4. building / tallest / in / This / my city / the / is .
………………………………………………………………………………………...
5. good / the/ there /Let’s / and / time / beach / go / have / to / a.
………………………………………………………………………………………...
6. small / thin / sister / white / and / His / lips / teeth / has.
………………………………………………………………………………………...
7. do / go / When / you/ often/ swimming ?
………………………………………………………………………………………...
8. camping / often / do / How / you / go?
………………………………………………………………………………………...
9. stay / grandparents / vacation / are / with / next / we / to / our / going / summer.
………………………………………………………………………………………...
10. the / mother / in / My / house / are / father /and .
………………………………………………………………………………………...
ENGLISH TEST 27
I. Pick out the word whose underlined part in pronounced differently from that of the other words.
| 1. | A. | beach | B. | seat | C. | meat | D. | great |
| 2. | A. | boots | B. | floor | C. | toothpaste | D. | food |
| 3. | A. | idea | B. | year | C. | wear | D. | near |
| 4. | A. | camp | B. | plan | C. | plane | D. | badminton |
| 5. | A. | maps | B. | beds | C. | rooms | D. | taxis |
| 6. | A. | full | B. | summer | C. | sunny | D. | Sunday |
| 7. | A. | orange | B. | hot | C. | hobby | D. | nose |
| 8. | A. | sometimes | B. | washes | C. | benches | D. | couches |
| 9. | A. | ride | B. | night | C. | river | D. | tired |
| 10. | A. | teeth | B. | tree | C. | between | D. | engineer |
1. There are...................eggs in the fridge.
A. a lot B. a few C. a little D. little
2. What do you do .............................the weekend.
A. on B. in C to D. for
3. I am going .........Ha Long bay
A. visiting B. visit C. visited D. to visit
4. There isn’t _______milk in the bottle.
A. an B. a C. any D. some
5. How much is a _________of toothpaste.
A. can B. bar C. tube D. box
6. What about ______table-tennis?
A. to play B. playing C. plays D. play
7. Fall means ……………..in British-English .
A. summer B. winter C. autumn D. spring
8. What is her _____________? _ She is Australian.
A. language B. nationality C. population D. country
9. They are going _________vacation in London.
A. in B. on C. at D. for
10. ________languages can you speak?
A. When B. How C. How much D. Which
11. The Great Wall of China is the world’s _____structure.
A. long B. longer C. the longest D. longest
12. Ho Chi Minh has a ___________of 3.5 million.
A. city B. capital C. population D. country
13. I am Mary. I am __________ Great Britain.
A. to B. from C. at D. on
14. ______are you going to stay? _ In a hotel.
A. Which B. Where C. When D. What
15. Tomatoes, lettuce and potatoes are ………………
A. fruits B. vegetables C. drinks D. flowers
16. There is an intersection ahead. You must______ .
A. slow down B. go fast C. stop D. go ahead
17. There isn’t any water in the bottle. I am going to take ______.
A. many B. an C. any D. some
18. A. What is the matter with you? – B: ______
A. I go by bike B. I’m heavy C. I like chicken D. I’m tired
19. A: Would you like a glass of lemon juice? – B: ______
A. No, I’m not B. No, I don’t like C. No, thanks D. No. It’s too hot.
20. PETRONAS Twin Towers is the…………. building in the world.
A. tall B. taller C. tallest D. the tallest
21. Mai needs ……………………chocolates.
A. a bar of B. a packet of C. a box of D. a bottle of
22. He ……………………his bicycle at the moment.
A. rides B. is riding C. ride D. to ride
23. Phanxipang is the ……………………mountain in Viet nam.
A. high B. higher C. highest D. the highest
24……………………is the weather like ?
A. How B. What C. Who D. How much
25.My house is as ……………………as Hoa’s house.
A. smaller B. small C. biggest D. bigger
26.We ……………………waste food and feed it to pigs.
A. damage B. collect C. leave D. throw
27.Chi is……………………girl in her class.
A. more beautiful B. the most beautiful C. beautiful D. a most beautiful
28.I’m going ……………………the Ngoc Son Temple tomorrow
A. see B. sees C. to see D.seeing
29.What ……………………you ……………………to do tomorrow?
A. does / go B.is / going C.are / going D. do / go
30. We shouldn’t ………… our environment.
A. destroying B. to destroy C. destroys D. destroy
31. He often ________ he ________ the kites when he isn’t busy?
A. does / flies B. does / fly C. does / play D. does / play
32. Why don’t we ________ to the movies? ~ That’s a good idea.
A. go B. to go C. going D. to going
33. Some people can speak many ________
A. countries B. nationalities C. languages D. speeches
34. There are four ________ in a year: spring, summer, fall and winter.
A. activities B. pastimes C. weathers D. seasons
35. Can I help you? ~ ________ please. I need a kilo of beef.
A. Yes B. Sorry C. Can D. No
36. Mr Thanh is a policeman. He has a ……………….job
A. fast B. careful C. difficult D. bad
37. Her sister has an…………face and long black …………
A. round - hairs B. long - hairs C. oval -hair D. oval - hairs
38. What are ………? …………..are his shoulders
A. those-These B. those-Those C. this-This D. those-This
39. How many oranges, Mom? ……… dozen, please
A. A half of B. Half a C. A half D. Half
40.You ……… eat too much meat. It isn’t good for your health.
A. should B. shouldn’t C. not D. don’t want
III. Supply the correct verb tense/ form of the verbs in the brackets.
1. Mrs Thu (do) …………… the housework every day. => ………………………………….
2. My brother (listen) ………………. to music now. => …………………………………….
3. They (visit)……………. Da Lat this summer vacation. => ………………………………….
4. Long is thirsty. He’d like (drink)………….. some water. => ………………………………...
5. Now they ( play ) …………soccer. => ………………………………….
6. He ( not go ) ………….fishing in the winter. => ………………………………….
7. You usually ( jog) ………in the morning? – Yes, I do. => ……………………………...
8. This summer vacation, my parents ( visit)……..to Hue. => ………………………………….
9. What about ( go) ……….to Nha Trang? => ………………………………….
10. We mustn’t (drive) fast on the street. => …………………………………..
IV. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets to complete each sentence.
1. It is very …………………………………….. in the city. NOISE
2. Her …………………….. are small and white. TOOTH
3. This is my favorite chair. It’s so ………………… . COMFORT
4. There is a ………………………. next to my house. BAKE
5. She is a ……………………. of English. TEACH
7. Long goes ……………….. at the weekend. SAIL
8. Their house is on the ………………… floor of the room. FIVE
10. Do you ……………………… play video games? USUAL
V. Read the passage carefully and then answer the following questions.
My name is Petty and this is my husband, Phil. We both work in offices in London. We have breakfast at half past seven. We don’t have a big breakfast. We usually have bread, coffee and orange juice.
For lunch we usually have a salad or soup and sandwich. That’s at about 1.30.
We usually have dinner at half past seven in the evening. It is a big meal of the day and we have meat or fish with vegetables and potatoes or rice. We have orange juice with the milk. On Saturday evenings we go to a restaurant for dinner at about eight o’clock.
1. Who is Petty’s husband?................................................................ …………………………………….
2. What do they have for lunch?………………………………………………………………………………
3. What time do they usually have dinner?……………………………………………………………………………….
4. What do they drink for dinner……………………………………………………………………………………..
5. Where do they have dinner on Saturday evenings……………………………………………………………………
6. Is dinner a big meal for Petty and her husband?..............................................................................................................
VI. Choose the suitable word for each blank in the following passage
| pollution | best | world | visit |
| five | population | streets | clock |
The (6) ……….. thing about London is the parks. There are (7) ……….. in the city center. But my children’s favorite place is Harleys. It is the biggest toyshop in the (8) ………..
VII. Rewrite the following sentences so that the second sentence means the same as the first one
1. What about eating some rice?--> Let’s ..........................................................................................................................
2. Her eyes are brown.--> She has .................................................................................................................................
3. What drink do you like?--> What is ..............................................................................................................................
4. Our school has 12 classrooms.-> There are ...................................................................................................................
5. Let’s go to the park.→ What about ………………………………………………………………………………?
6. How about watching Television?→ Why don’t you ……………………………………………………………….?
7. . Why don’t we go to the movies? → What ……………………………………………………………………….?
8. What’s the weather like in the spring? →How ………………………………………………………………?
9. How about visiting our friends? →Why..............................................................................................................................?
10. How’s the weather this morning? → What ...........................................................................................................................?
VIII. Correct the mistakes in the following sentences
There are an books. =>
This are benches. =>
What time it is? =>
She is ride her bike. =>
There aren’t some tall trees behind my house. =>
My father watching TV at the moment. =>
Chi is beautiful. Her tooth are small and white.=>
I like drink apple juice. It’s my favorite drink. =>
I’m very full. I’d like a bowl of noodles, Mom. =>
There are four season in a year in Viet Nam. =>
IX. Write the sentences with the cue words.
- I/ going to / visit Ha Long Bay/ summer vacation.
- It/ cool/ fall.=>…………...............................................................................…………………………….
- Where / you/ from?=>………….......................................................................…………………………….
- Ho Chi Minh City / big/ Ha Noi.=>…………........................................................……………………………..
- Mexico City / big city/ world.=>…………..............................................................…………………………….
- The Nile River/ long river/ world.=>………….....................................................…...........................................
- We / going to / visit / Hue / next week.=> ……………………………………………………………………….
- Hoa / often / go fishing / on Sundays.=> ……………………………………………………………………
- It / hot / summer.=> ………………………………………………………………………………………….
- There / be / a lot of / rivers and mountains / my country.
X. Rearrange the following words to make a complete sentences
1. I’d / am / so / like / noodles / I / hungry / some.
=>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
2. Skipping / her / and / younger / like / winter / Mai / sister / in.
=>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
3. Vietnamese / is / Vietnam / He / and / speak / He / from =>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
4. language / you / often / French / ? / Which / do / speak / English / or
=>…………………………………………………………………………………………………
5. like / what / the / is / weather/ in / winter /the /?=>……………………………………………………………………
6. often / Peter / to / school / goes / 6:30 / at=>…………………………………………………………………………
7. often / at / dinner / I / o’clock / have / seven. =>….……………………………………………………..
8. bigger / Ho Chi Minh City / which / or / Ha Noi / is? =>….……………………………………………………………………………………………..
9. don’t / Pagoda / go / why / to / we / Huong?=>………………………………………………………………………..
10. listens / usually / in / to / free / Lan / her / music / time. =>….……………………………………………………………………………………………...
ENGLISH TEST 28
I. Chọn một đáp án đúng nhất.
1. …………… sports do you play?
a. How b. Who c. Which d. What’s
2. My mother wants a good pair of shoes because she often goes ………….
a. jogging b. fishing c. sailing d. running
3. He often …………….. his kite when he’s not busy.
a. does b. plays c. goes d. flies
4. Why don’t we go to the movies?
a. Because I like it b. Good idea c. Yes, we do d. I don’t think so
5. Some people can speak many …………………
a. countries b. nationalities c. languages d. speeches.
6. People are …………. many forests because they need more land.
a. destroying b. producing c. growing d. polluting
7. There is ……….. oil in this bottle. We should buy some more.
a. a few b. few c. little d. a little
8. Can I help you? - …………., please. I need a kilo of beef.
a. Sorry b. Yes c. Can d. No
9. Minh …………… likes fish and beef.
a. isn’t b. don’t c. doesn’t d. never
10. He goes to work six days a week. He ……. goes to work.
a. always b. usually c. often d. never
II. Tìm một từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với từ còn lại.
1. a. citadel b. vacation c. destination d. lemonade
2. a. teachers b. doctors c. students d. workers
3. a. accident b. soccer c. clinic d. camera
4. a. mounth b. weather c. thick d. throw
5. a. language b. engineer c. sausage d. jogging
III. Viết lại câu sau sao cho nghĩa không đổi.
1. Lan’s hair is long. -> Lan …………….…………..
2. Nam rides his bike to school everyday. -> Nam goes …………………..
3. Are there four people in your family? -> Does ………………….……?
4. Nobody in our class is happier than Nga. -> Nga …………..……..………
5. Let’s go swimming. -> What about ………………..?
6. My house is behind the post office. -> The post office …………….
7. She likes drinking milk. -> Milk is …………………….
8. Ba has a sister, Lan. -> Ba ………………………….
9. What’s the height of the Mount Everest? -> How ……………………….?
10. This boy is strong. -> He is ……………………….
IV. Cho dạng đúng của từ trong ngoặc.
1. There are lots of (beauty) beaches in Viet Nam. …………..
2. Is Mr.Ha a (business) ? ……………….
3. She’s from Viet nam. What’s her (nation)? ………………….
4. Air (pollute) is a big problem in the big cities…………………..
5. In the (neighbor) , there is a hospital and a factory…………………..
V. Điền một giới từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống nếu cần.
1. A few people are …………. the mountain and they are ……… danger.
2. I have to stay..…late because I don’t finish ……. my homework.
3. My father always goes to work ………… his own car.
4. Our school starts ……….. six forty five to eleven o’clock.
5. The beef is on the table …….. the eggs and the fish.
VI. Chia động từ trong ngoặc cho phù hợp thì.
- What they (do) tonight? - They (listen) to music on the radio.
- Your brother (can, swim) ? - Yes, he can. He (swim) very well.
- He (be) tired and he’d like (sit) down.
- Hoa (not do) her homework in the afternoon. She (do) it in the evening.
- Look! The plane (fly) towards the airport. It (land)
VII. Điền vào mỗi chỗ trống một từ cho thích hợp.
Dear Mai
I am visiting Ha Long Bay with my family ...(1)… June 12th to 20th. …(2)… you have a double room with a shower for these days? How …(3)… is the room? We would like …(4)… room facing the sea if it is possible. We …(5)… eat meat but we …(6)… all other kinds of food.
We are arriving …(7)… Ha Long Bay …(8)… about six o’clock on Monday evening. We plan to leave the hotel …(9)…Sunday morning.
I …(10)… forward to hearing from you soon.
Love
Nga.
VIII. §iÒn ®óng d¹ng so s¸nh cña tÝnh tõ trong ngoÆc.
1. Which is the (big) city in Viet Nam ? ……………
2. Spring is (warm) than Fall. But Summer is the (hot) season of a year. …………
3. Hoa is the (good) student in our class. …………
4. The Nile River is the (long) river in the world. ……………
5. The city is (noisy) than the country. ………………
IX. Viết một đoạn văn ngắn nói về thời tiết ở quê em và những việc mà em thường làm vào các mùa đó .
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………..………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
ENGLISH TEST 29
Part 1: Chọn một từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại.
A. citadel B. vacation C. destination D. lemonade
A. beach B. read C. bean D. ahead
A. accident B. soccer C. clinic D. camera
A. visit B. season C. sausage D. museum
A. thigh B. high C. nine D. sandwich
Part 1: Chọn một từ không cùng loại với các từ khác trong nhóm.
A. television B. radio C. stereo D. table
A. soccer B. teacher C. worker D. driver
A. occasionally B. always C. second D. sometimes
A. sausage B. packet C. lettuce D. beef
A. load B. dangerous C. difficult D. heavy
Part 2: Chọn đáp án đúng nhất cho mỗi câu sau.
My sister ……………………. her homework every day.
A. does B. is C. are D. do
There is an intersection ahead. We……………………. .
A. must not slow down. B. must slow down. C. must go fast. D. cannot go straight.
How…………………….packets of candy would you like?
A. many B. much C. often D. about
At the zoo, they see a man going into the enclosure. He is going to ……………..the lion.
A. work B. feed C. talk D. sail
Mai goes to school …………………….Monday…………………….Friday.
A. from / on B. on / on C. in / in D. from / to
There is a ……………………..behind my classroom.
A. big flower garden B. flower big garden C. garden big flower D. big garden flower
Nam is going to stay…………..Hue…………….his uncle and aunt this summer vaction.
A. at / in B. on / with C. in / with D. with / in
Nam usually goes to school ……………………. foot because he lives near his school.
A. from B. with C. on D. about
Would you like something to drink, Mary?
A. Sorry B. No.Thank you C. Yes, you would D. Why
How…………………….oil do you want? - A bottle, please. And ……………. butter.
A. much/some B. many/any C. much/any D. many/some
Listen! Who……………………. in the next room?
A. is going to sing B. sings C. does sing D. is singing
…………………….walk to the park? - That’s a good idea!
A. What do we B. Would you like to C. Why don’t we D. Are we going to
Fifteen plus nineteen equal …………………….
A. eighteen B. thirteen C. thirty D. thirty four
March is the ……………………month of the year.
A. first B. second C. third D. fifth
Mekong is …………………… river in Vietnam.
A. long B. longer C. longest D. the longest
Part 3: Cho dạng đúng của các động từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành những câu sau.
Her father often (watch) ………………………………… news on television every evening.
How many classes (Hoa / have) ……………………………………….today?
Look! The children (wait) ……………………………………………for the bus over there.
Nga (not visit) …………………………………………………..Hue next week.
…………………… (be / there) any milk in the fridge? – Yes, we have some.
Part 4: Đặt câu hỏi cho từ hoặc cụm từ gạch chân
Nam goes to school 6 days a week.=> ........................................................................................................................
My mother is cooking in the kitchen.=> .............................................................................................................
I am going to stay in Ha Noi for a week.=> ..............................................................................................................
That shirt costs 100 000 dong.=> ......................................................................................................................
Miss Lien’s hair is dark.=> ....................................................................................................................
Part 5: Đọc đoạn văn sau và trả lời câu hỏi.
Ba is a student at Quang Trung School. Every morning, Ba gets up at six o’clock. He washes his face and brushes his teeth. At 6.30 he eats his breakfast then he goes to school. At eleven thirty, he goes home. It’s twelve o’clock now and he is having lunch. This afternoon, he is going to play soccer. He is going to do his homework tonight.
What does Ba do?=> . .............................................................................................................
What time does Ba get up every morning?=> ..........................................................................................................
Does Ba go to school in the morning?=> .............................................................................................................
What is Ba doing at twelve o’clock?=> ..................................................................................................
What is Ba going to do in the evening? => ...........................................................................................................
Part 6: Điền một từ thích hợp vào mỗi chỗ trống trong đoạn văn sau.
My sister’s name is Nga. She lives in Ha Noi. She (1) …………………… Literature at a school there. She goes to work every day. She has two (2) ……………………off a week: Saturday and Sunday. She has a bike but she never cycles to work because it’s very far (3) …………………… her house to her school. She goes by bus. The school starts at half past seven in the (4) ………………… and finishes at four o’clock in the afternoon. After work she usually plays badminton or goes swimming. She comes back home at seven o’clock, and has dinner. After dinner, she listens to music or watches TV. She (5) ……………………plays volleyball, but she likes watching volleyball matches on TV. She goes to bed at eleven o’clock.
Part 7: Chọn các câu trong khung sau để hoàn thành bài hội thoại một cách hợp lý, có một câu không dùng đến.
| A. What are there in your neighborhood? B. Is your school big? C. Wow! That’s wonderful. I never come to Vinh City. D. Nice to meet you, too. E. Is it a souvenir shop near the house? F. Vinh City. I live in an apartment. |
Ba: Good morning, Hoa. This is my new friend. His name is Quang.
Hoa: Nice to meet you, Quang!
Quang: (1)………………………………………………………….……….
Hoa: Where are you from, Quang?
Quang: (2)………………………………………………………………….
Hoa: (3)………………………………………………….……………….
Quang: There is a shop, a cinema and a market near my house. It is very noisy.
Hoa: (4)………………………………………………………………….
Quang: Yes, it is. And my classroom is on the fouth floor.
Hoa: (5)………………………………………………….……………….
Ba: It’s 7.00 and we have to come in. Good bye.
Hoa: Good bye. See you later.
Part 8: Hoàn thành câu thứ hai sao cho câu có cùng nghĩa với câu đã cho.
Let’s walk to school!=> Why................................................................................................................................?
Her nose is small and straight.=> She ..................................................................................................................
How old is your mother?=> What ........................................................................................................................?
Miss Nga goes to Ha Noi by plane today.=> Miss Nga ........................................................................................
No house in this street is older than my house.
=> My house ...............................................................................................................................................................
Part 9: Dùng từ gợi ý viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh để hoàn thành bức thư sau.
Dear Lien,
Thank you for your letter you sent me last week.
I / be / in / country / uncle / aunt.=> .................................................................................................................
They / live / small / house / near / paddy field.
=> ................................................................................................................................................................................
There / big / yard / flower garden / front / house.
=> ................................................................................................................................................................................
left / house / there / be / well.=> .....................................................................................................................
Behind / house / there / be / mountains / tall trees.
=> ................................................................................................................................................................................
Is it beautiful? I will send you a photo of it with the letter.
Write soon,
Linh.
Linh.
Part 10: Điền một từ thích hợp vào mỗi chỗ trống trong lá thư sau.
Dear Alice ,
Today is the first day of the school term. I have just got my new timetable. The first lesson (1)______ English . This lesson begins (2)______ nine o’clock and finishes at ten (3)_______ ten. The next lesson is Geography and then we have a break . The break lasts (4)______ twenty to eleven (5)_______ five to eleven . The two lessons (6)_______ the break are Spanish and Maths .
Tomorrow we have Physics (7)_______ the break and then History and English (8) _______ . Thusday we have my favourite subject (9)_______ ten fifty-five and twelve thirty-five. The (10)______ twenty lessons each week but they all take place (11)_______ the morning. We are all very tired by lunchtime . Love ,
Lala
Part 11: Cho dạng đúng của các từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành những câu sau.
Dave and I are having the (1-good) ________ holiday of our lives ! We are in Barbados , one of the (2- lovely ) ________ islands in the Caribean . Although it is much (3- small)______ than Jamaica , there seems to be ( 4- much)________ to do than in Jamaica . Moreover , the people here seem to be (5-friendly) ________ than those on the other islands . We are staying in the ( 6- mordern)_________ hotel I have ever seen . It’s large and cool , and many people think it is the (7 –good) _________ hotel on the island . It’s far (8- comfortable) _________ than any of the other hotels , and it’s even (9-big)____ than the world famous Belton Hotel . The (10- near) ________ beach is (11-little)_________ than a hundred metres away , and so we can go swimming a lot . It’s really good , and I do wish you were here .
ENGLISH TEST 30
I. Read the passage carefully and then answer the following questions.
Jack Tippit and his wife, Isabel, who is Spanish, both work at the Regent Hotel in the centre of London . Jack is a receptionist and Isabel works in the hotel bar . Jack says :
“ Ten million people visit London every year . In our hotel we have fifty rooms , and we have visistors from all over the world , especially from America and Japan . I speak English , German , French and Spanish . I don’t speak Japanese , but I want to learn it . Isebel speaks English and French , and Spanish , of course .Our visitors like doing many things . On a typical day they have breakfast in the hotel restaurant , an English breakfast of eggs , bacon , tea , and toast . After breakfast they visit the Houses of Parliament and Buckingham Palace and go shopping in Harrods . They come back to the hotel at four o’clock and have tea and relax . Then in the evening they go to the theatre .
We work long hours. I work from six o’clock in the morning till three in the afternoon , and Isabel works from six in the evening till one in the morning, but we love our work . We like meeting people of all nationalities .
0. Jack’s wife is Isabel . T
1. Jack’s wife is Tippit F
2. A lot of foreign visitors come to the hotel. _______
3. Both Jack and Isabel speak French and German . _______
4. Both Isabel and Jack want to learn Japanese. _______
5. The visitors have breakfast in bed in the hotel . _______
6. They visit the Houses of Parliament in the morning _______
7. They like shopping in Buckingham Palace _______
8. They have tea in the hotel. _______
9. They relax in the evening . _______
10. Jack and Isabel don’t like their work . _______
11. They work all day . _______
II Fill in each blank with the suitable given word
For many young people sport is a popular part of school life and (1)____ in one of the school teams and playing in matches is very important . (2)_____ someone is in a team it means a lot of extra practice and often spending a Saturday or Sunday away (3)______ home , as many matches are played then.
It (4)______ also involve travelling to other towns to play against other school teams and then (5)_____ on after the match for a meal or a drink . Sometimes parents , friends or other students will travel with the team to support (6)_____ own side .
When a school team wins a match it is the whole school feeling proud , (7)______ only the players . It can also mean that a school (8)_______ well-known for being good at certain sports and pupils from that school may end up playing (9)_______ national and international teams so that the school has some (10)______ names associated with it .
| 1 | A. having | B. being | C. taking | D. putting |
| 2. | A. If | B. As | C. Then | D. So |
| 3. | A. at | B. on | C.for | D. from |
| 4. | A. ought | B. is | C. can | D.has |
| 5. | A. being | B. staying | C. leaving | D. spending |
| 6. | A. their | B. its | C. our | D. your |
| 7. | A. but | B. however | C. and | D. not |
| 8. | A. turns | B. makes | C. comes | D. becomes |
| 9. | A. up | B. to | C. for | D. beside |
| 10 | A. old | B. new | C. common | D.famous |
There are two long (1)______ in VietNam. The Red river is 1,200 kms long. It (2)______ in China and flows to the Gulf (3)____ Tonkin.
The (4)______ river is longer than the Red river . It starts in Tibet and flows to the Bien Dong .
The River Amazon is the (5)_______river in the world . It is 6,750 kilometres long . It starts in Peru and flows to the Atlantic Ocean .
Everest is the tallest (6)_______ in the world . It is 8,863 metres (7)____ Vietnam has (8)_______ mountains . The Truong Son is the (9)______ range of mountains . (10)_______ Vietnam mountains are smaller than Everest .
IV. Fill in each blank with the suitable given word
clean are lots live and
for sell prices city goods
SINGAPORE
Singapore is an island city of about three million people. It's a beautiful (1) ........... with lots of parks and open spaces. It's also a very (2) ................. city.
Most of the people (3) ................ in high rise flats in different parts of the island. The business district is very modern
with (4) ........... of high new office buildings. Singapore also has some nice older sections. In China town, there (5) ................. rows of old shop houses. The Government buildings in Singapore are very beautiful (6)................. date from the colonial days.
Singapore is famous (7).......... its shops and restaurants. There are many good shopping centers. Most of the (8) .......... are duty free. Singapore's restaurants (9) ........ Chinese, Indian, Malay and European food, and the (10) ............ are quite reasonable.
V. Choose the best answer.
1. My father is..................... man.
A. a old B. an old C. not young D. not very young
2. I’m tired. I’d like..................... .
A. sit down B. sitting down C. to sit down D. to sitting down
3. Do you have any toothpaste? I’d like a large ..................... .
A. tin B. roll C. bar D. tube
4. What is the ............of that river?
A. long B. wide C. length D. heavy
5. Bangkok is ..................... capital of Thailand.
A. a B. one C. X D. the
6. There are ..................... girls in his class.
A. not B. no C. none D. any
7. ..................... she plays the piano!
A. How beautiful B. How beautifully C. What good D. What well
8. Which word has the final sound /s/:
A. bananas B. carrots C. apples D. guavas
9. I don’t want much sugar in coffee. Just ....................., please.
A. little B. a little C. few D. a few
10. The weather is ..................... today than yesterday.
A. much better B. very better C. too better D. so better
11. ______ trash over there.
A. Don’t throw B. Not throw C. Throw D. Can’t throw
12. There is _____ oil in the bottle . We should buy some more .
A. little B. a little C. few D. a few
13. ______ fruit does your father produce?
A. How much B. How many C. How long D. How often
14. What would you like to do at the weekend?
A. I like to do a lot B. I can’t do it C. I’d like to do D. I don’t like the weekend
15. What about ______ a cup of coffee?
A. A have B. having C. you have D. do you have
16. The weather often ______ quickly. It is difficult to forecast .
A. change B. changes C. is changing D. is going to change
17. When it becomes hot , people often fell ______
A. hungry B. thirsty C. happy D. worried
18. My brother wants a good pair of shoes because he often goes ______
A. jogging B. running C. swimming D. sailing
19 . None of these trains stop at Ramsey. They _____ stop at Ramsey .
A. sometimes B. usually C. never D. rarely
20.The sign says “No smoking “ . You ______ smoke .
A. can B. are not C. must not D. must
21. Do you like pop music?
A. I would B. Yes, a lot C. No, I like it D. Yes , we are
22.Let’s go to the concert at New College.
A. All right B. You’re going C. We go D. Goodbye
23 . I’m playing table tennis. _______ you like table tennis?
A.Have B .Is C. Are D. Do
24 . There is an English examination ______ Friday, 11th December .
A. at B. in C. to D. on
25 .______ do the buses run? - Every twenty minutes .
A. How far B. What time C. How often D. How much
26. What time _____ back ?
A. is she coming B. comes she C. she does come D. does she comes
27. The students have got ______ news about their exams .
A. many B. some C. a D. a few
28 . The boy looks a little thin, ______ he is strong.
A. and B. for C. or D. but
29. Mary and _______ would like to join the English Club speaking .
A. me B. my C. mine D. I
30 . The clothes are _______ cleaner than the others .
A. as B. very C. so D. much
VI. Rearrange the sentences to make a dialogue.
- What do you usually have for breakfast?
- Usually. I Put on my clothes. I have breakfast.
- Do you always have breakfast?
- Always?
- No, I don’t. It’s not my favorite.
- Do you ever have cereal for breakfast?
- Yes.
- What are some of the things you often do in the morning?
- Bread and cheese and coffee. Sometimes, I have an egg.
- I get up at seven.
Mr. Hung: (1)…………………………………children?
Mrs. Nga: They’re in their room.
Mr. Hung: (2) …………………………………………….television?
Mrs. Nga: No. They are in bed.
Mr. Hung: (3)…………………………………………………….?
Mrs. Nga: Reading? No, they aren’t. They are asleep.
Mr. Hung: (4)……………………………………………………..?
Mrs. Nga: Hoang? He’s writing a postcard and watching TV at the same time.
Mr. Hung: (5)……………………………………………………..?
Mrs. Nga: He’s watching a movie.
VIII. Complete the dialogue with the cues given.
Salesgirl: Good / Can I …..(1)……………………………..?
Nam: Yes / I’d / rice / meat. (2)
Salesgirl: How much / want? (3)
Nam: Two kilos / rice / half / kilo (4)
Salesgirl: Is / anything else ? (5)
Nam: Yes / 2 bottles / milk / 6 apples (6)
Salesgirl: OK. Here / are (7)
Nam: How? (8)
Salesgirl: Fifty thousand dong.
Nam: This/ one hundred dong (9)
Salesgirl: Here/ change (10)
Nam: Thank you.
IX. Fill in each gap with a QUESTION WORD.
1………………is the weather like in Viet Nam in the summer?
2………………sausage do you want?_2 kilos please.
3………………oranges are there in the fridge? _There are five.
4………………do you usually do on Sunday?
5………………does David always go in the morning?
6………………do you travel to work everyday? _By bus, of course.
7………………is it? _It’s five past eight.
8………………is her hair? _It’s yellow.
9………………does he feel? _Tired and thirsty.
10……………..don’t we go swimming? _Yes, that’s a good idea.
VI. Fill in each gap with a word given.
bring do have help play see stay take visit watch
1.What are you and your family going to………………………..this weekend?
2.We’re going to……………the museum next Saturday
3.Is Mr. Minh going to ………….badminton?
4.She’s going to……………with her uncle in the country
5.I’m going to…….a new film with my friend
6.We are going to………..dinner with them
7.Are you going to……………….Mom do the housework?
8.Van and Hiep are going to……………..a football match
9.Nam’s going to…………some photos
10.Tuan and his brother are going to……………..some food and drinks
VII. Fill in each gap with a word given.
my have movie usually old teach
on listen at eats there
Mondays lunch dinner play
on listen at eats there
Mondays lunch dinner play
I live in a small house in Hanoi. I ________(1) English at a school _____(2). I usually ___________(3) breakfast at seven in the morning and I have ___________(4) at twelve o’clock in the canteen of the school. I teach ___________(5) students in the morning. I teach them dialogues _______________(6) Wednesdays and Fridays. On _________(7) I teach them grammar. In the evening I ___________(8) stay at home and ___________(9) to the radio. I sometimes go to the ___________(10) theater. I always go to bed at ten o’clock.
VIII. Which word has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others?
1. A. window B. flow C. how D. show
2. A. hungry B. thirsty C. finally D. recycle
3. A. mouth B. weather C. thick D. throw
4. A. language B. engineer C. sausage D. jogging
5. A. ground B. should C. about D. mountain
IX. Supply the correct form of the words in parentheses.
What is the (high)……………of that mountain? – About 2000 meters.
How many (child)……………..do you have, Mr. Nam?
Lan is the (small)……………………of the three girls.
Jane is the (young)………………of the two girls.
There are ten (bookshelf)…………………….in the library.
The country is (quiet)…………….than the city.
Which color do you like (good)…………….?
We must (take) ………..an umbrella. It (rain)……………..
Nga doesn’t like (China)………………..food.
The weather is becoming (cold)………………
We must be (care)........................... when we cross the road.
This tree has a lot of green (leaf)....................................
Is your father a (business).............................?
I’m Vietnamese. What’s your (nation)......................................?
Air (pollute)......................... is a big problem in many cities in the world.
The photocopy is between the (bake)..........................and the drugstore.
Is your brother an (act).........................................?
Mai's sister is a (sing).......................................
Yoko is from Japan. She is (Japan)................................
She is (beautiful)……………………than her sister.
X. Rewrite sentences as directed.
- Whose book is this? Who ………………………………………?
- How much is that pen? How much does…………………………………?
- How heavy are you? How much…………………………………..?
- Lam is Mrs. Hoa’s son Mrs. Hoa……………………………………..
- No one in our class is as tall as Nam . Nam is the ………………………………
- There are 40 monkeys in the cage . The cage ………………………………
- It is one fifty . It is ten ……………………………………………………….
- My mother walks to work everyday . My mother goes …………....................
- Does your class have forty students? Are……………………………..?
CHỦ ĐỀ LIÊN QUAN
CHỦ ĐỀ MỚI NHẤT
